IOWA ADMINISTRATIVE BULLETIN
Published Biweekly VOLUME XXIV NUMBER 20 April 3,
2002 Pages 1561 to 1644
CONTENTS IN THIS ISSUE
Pages 1572 to 1640 include ARC 1490B to ARC
1534B
ALL AGENCIES
Schedule for rule making 1564
Publication procedures 1565
Administrative rules on CD–ROM 1565
Agency identification numbers 1570
CITATION OF ADMINISTRATIVE RULES 1569
EDUCATION DEPARTMENT[281]
Notice, Standards for teacher intern preparation
programs,
ch 77 ARC 1525B 1572
Filed, Conservation education, 68.1 to
68.4, 68.6, 68.8 to
68.11 ARC 1526B 1620
Filed, Standards for practitioner preparation
programs,
rescind ch 77 ARC 1527B 1620
Filed, Standards for graduate practitioner
preparation
programs, rescind ch 78
ARC 1528B 1620
EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT DIVISION[605]
PUBLIC DEFENSE
DEPARTMENT[601]“umbrella”
Filed, Wireless enhanced 911 implementation
and operation
plan; recovery of overpayments;
administrative hearing process,
10.7(2),
10.9, 10.15 ARC 1490B 1620
EMPOWERMENT BOARD, IOWA[349]
Notice, Iowa empowerment board, ch 1
ARC
1513B 1575
GENERAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT[401]
Notice, Purchasing standards for service
contracts, ch 12
ARC 1532B 1580
Notice, Uniform terms and conditions for
service contracts,
ch 13 ARC 1531B 1583
Filed, Inventory guidelines for state of Iowa
personal and
real property, 10.2, 10.3, 10.6
ARC 1533B 1621
HUMAN SERVICES DEPARTMENT[441]
Notice, FIP—elimination of well–being
visits,
41.24(8)“e,” 93.138(3)“f,”
93.138(4)
ARC 1504B 1586
Filed Emergency, FIP—elimination of
well–being
visits, 41.24(8)“e,”
93.138(3)“f,” 93.138(4) ARC
1503B 1618
Filed, Refugee services program—limitations
on
eligibility, 61.6(2) ARC 1497B 1622
Filed Emergency After Notice, Refugee
services
program—pilot recredentialing services; targeted
assistance
grants, 61.16, 61.17 ARC 1498B 1618
Filed, Medicaid for employed people with
disabilities
coverage group—payment policy
and procedures for recipients who are
assessed
premiums, 75.1(39)“b” ARC 1499B 1622
Filed, Medicaid—eligibility, 75.1(40), 75.2 to
75.4,
75.5(3), 75.7, 75.11(1), 75.13(2),
75.14, 75.23, 75.57 ARC
1500B 1623
Filed, Enrollment as Medicaid
independent
providers—advanced registered
nurse practitioners
certified in family,
pediatric, or psychiatric mental health
specialties,
77.36, 78.1(21), 78.21(1),
78.23, 78.31(5), 78.40, 79.1(2),
79.14(1)
ARC 1501B 1624
Filed, Medicaid policy—optometric and
optical
services, 78.6, 78.7, 78.28(3)
ARC 1502B 1626
MEDICAL EXAMINERS BOARD[653]
PUBLIC HEALTH
DEPARTMENT[641]“umbrella”
Filed, International medical graduates—
test of
spoken English (TSE) as substitute
for test of English as a foreign
language
(TOEFL) for special license,
10.4(3)“a”(4) ARC
1496B 1627
Filed, Acupuncturists—English proficiency
test
requirements, 17.3, 17.4(1)“c”(2)
ARC 1494B 1627
NATURAL RESOURCE COMMISSION[571]
NATURAL RESOURCES
DEPARTMENT[561]“umbrella”
Notice, Fish habitat promotion for county
conservation
boards, ch 35 ARC 1518B 1586
Notice, Nursery stock prices, 71.3
ARC
1517B 1589
NATURAL RESOURCE COMMISSION[571]
(Cont’d)
Filed, Land acquisition projects eligible for
ATV grant
awards, 28.1, 28.10(2)
ARC 1515B 1627
Filed, Specifications for inflatable flotation
devices
(PFDs); personal flotation—operators
and passengers of personal
watercraft, 37.13
ARC 1516B 1628
Filed, Boating speed and distance zoning,
40.20, 40.44,
40.48 ARC 1514B 1628
PERSONNEL DEPARTMENT[581]
Notice, Years of service incentive program,
1.1, 4.12, 4.13
ARC 1519B 1589
Notice, IPERS—benefits advisory
committee, 21.33
ARC 1491B 1590
PHARMACY EXAMINERS BOARD[657]
PUBLIC HEALTH
DEPARTMENT[641]“umbrella”
Filed, Automated medication distribution
systems, ch 9
ARC 1511B 1629
PROFESSIONAL LICENSURE DIVISION[645]
PUBLIC HEALTH
DEPARTMENT[641]“umbrella”
Notice, Dietitians, rescind ch 79; renumber ch 80
to ch 83
as ch 81 to ch 84; adopt new ch 80;
amend 81.1 to 81.13, 82.2(1)
ARC
1510B 1593
Notice, Speech pathologists and audiologists,
ch 299;
300.1; rescind ch 301; 303.2(1)
ARC 1509B 1595
Notice, Physician assistants, chs 325 to 327;
328.5, 328.7;
chs 329, 330 ARC 1495B 1597
PUBLIC HEARINGS
Summarized list 1566
PUBLIC HEALTH DEPARTMENT[641]
Filed, Radiation, amendments to chs 38 to 46
ARC
1493B 1630
Filed, Health data, 177.2 to 177.4, 177.8
ARC
1492B 1631
RACING AND GAMING COMMISSION[491]
INSPECTIONS AND APPEALS
DEPARTMENT[481]“umbrella”
Notice, Definition of “steward”; initiation
by
steward of suspension of occupational license;
gambling games of chance
with prizes awarded
through promotional activities, 4.2, 4.6,
7.5(2),
11.5(4) ARC 1512B 1606
REGENTS BOARD[681]
Notice, Personnel administration, amendments
to ch 3
ARC 1534B 1607
REVENUE AND FINANCE DEPARTMENT[701]
Filed, Individual income tax, income tax
withholding,
corporate income tax,
7.5(3), 39.1, 40.21, 40.38(1), 40.56,
40.57,
41.3(3), 41.5(9), 42.2(11), 43.4(7), 46.7,
52.7, 53.11(8) ARC
1523B 1631
Filed, Retrieval of protest; errors not considered
as
penalty exceptions; minimum bond for motor
fuel licensees; E–mail
address or fax signature
valid on application for motor fuel license
or
cigarette permit, 7.50(1), 10.8, 67.21(1),
67.23(1), 81.13(1) ARC
1521B 1632
Filed, Eligible development business investment
tax credit,
42.17, 52.20, 58.9 ARC 1522B 1633
SCHOOL BUDGET REVIEW COMMITTEE[289]
EDUCATION
DEPARTMENT[281]“umbrella”
Filed, Waivers or variances from administrative
rules, ch 8
ARC 1529B 1633
SECRETARY OF STATE[721]
Filed Emergency, Primary election—nominations
by
write–in votes for certain offices, 21.602
ARC
1524B 1619
SOIL CONSERVATION DIVISION[27]
AGRICULTURE AND LAND STEWARDSHIP
DEPARTMENT[21]“umbrella”
Notice, Soil and water conservation districts—
use of
other public funds; permanent practices—
tree planting and conservation
cover,
10.41(9), 10.60(1), 10.82(3), 10.84
ARC 1530B 1616
TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT[761]
Filed, Holiday rest stops; promotion of Iowa
agricultural
products at rest areas; adopt–a–highway
program, amendments to
chs 105, 106, 121
ARC 1505B 1633
Filed, City requests for closure of primary
road
extensions, 151.1 ARC 1506B 1634
Filed, Regulations applicable to carriers,
520.1 ARC
1507B 1634
Filed, Motor carrier regulations, 529.1
ARC
1508B 1636
UTILITIES DIVISION[199]
COMMERCE
DEPARTMENT[181]“umbrella”
Filed, Competitive bidding process, ch 40
ARC
1520B 1636
PUBLISHED UNDER
AUTHORITY OF IOWA
CODE SECTIONS 2B.5 AND
17A.6
__________________________________
PREFACE
The Iowa Administrative Bulletin is published biweekly in
pamphlet form pursuant to Iowa Code chapters 2B and 17A and contains Notices of
Intended Action on rules, Filed and Filed Emergency rules by state agencies.
It also contains Proclamations and Executive Orders of the
Governor which are general and permanent in nature; Economic Impact Statements
to proposed rules and filed emergency rules; Objections filed by Administrative
Rules Review Committee, Governor or the Attorney General; and Delay by the
Committee of the effective date of filed rules; Regulatory Flexibility Analyses
and Agenda for monthly Administrative Rules Review Committee meetings. Other
“materials deemed fitting and proper by the Administrative Rules Review
Committee” include summaries of Public Hearings, Attorney General Opinions
and Supreme Court Decisions.
The Bulletin may also contain Public Funds Interest Rates
[12C.6]; Workers’ Compensation Rate Filings [515A.6(7)]; Usury
[535.2(3)“a”]; Agricultural Credit Corporation Maximum Loan Rates
[535.12]; and Regional Banking—Notice of Application and Hearing
[524.1905(2)].
PLEASE NOTE: Italics indicate new material
added to existing rules; strike through letters indicate
deleted material.
Subscriptions and Distribution Telephone:
(515)242–5120
Fax: (515)242–5974
KATHLEEN K. BATES, Administrative Code
Editor Telephone: (515)281–3355
STEPHANIE A. HOFF, Assistant
Editor (515)281–8157
Fax: (515)281–4424
SUBSCRIPTION
INFORMATION
Iowa Administrative
Bulletin
The Iowa Administrative Bulletin is sold as a separate
publication and may be purchased by subscription or single copy. All
subscriptions will expire on June 30 of each year. Subscriptions must be paid
in advance and are prorated quarterly.
July 1, 2001, to June 30, 2002 $273.00 plus
$16.38 sales tax
October 1, 2001, to June 30, 2002 $215.00 plus $12.90
sales tax
January 1, 2002, to June 30, 2002 $144.50 plus $8.67 sales
tax
April 1, 2002, to June 30, 2002 $72.00 plus $4.32 sales tax
Single copies may be purchased for $20.50 plus $1.23 sales
tax.
Iowa Administrative
Code
The Iowa Administrative Code and Supplements are sold in
complete sets and subscription basis only. All subscriptions for the Supplement
(replacement pages) must be for the complete year and will expire on June 30 of
each year.
Prices for the Iowa Administrative Code and its Supplements
are as follows:
Iowa Administrative Code - $1,252.75 plus $75.17 sales
tax
(Price includes 22 volumes of rules and index, plus a
one–year subscription to the Code Supplement and the Iowa Administrative
Bulletin. Additional binders may be purchased for $11.75 plus $.71 sales
tax.)
Iowa Administrative Code Supplement - $440.50 plus
$26.43 sales tax
(Subscription expires June 30, 2002)
All checks should be made payable to the Iowa State Printing
Division. Send all inquiries and subscription orders to:
Customer Service Center
Department of General Services
Hoover State Office Building, Level A
Des Moines, IA 50319
Telephone: (515)242–5120
Schedule for Rule
Making
2002
NOTICE SUBMISSION
DEADLINE
|
NOTICE PUB.
DATE
|
HEARING OR COMMENTS 20
DAYS
|
FIRST POSSIBLE ADOPTION
DATE 35 DAYS
|
ADOPTED FILING DEADLINE
|
ADOPTED PUB.
DATE
|
FIRST POSSIBLE
EFFECTIVE DATE
|
POSSIBLE EXPIRATION OF NOTICE 180
DAYS
|
Jan. 4 ’02
|
Jan. 23 ’02
|
Feb. 12 ’02
|
Feb. 27 ’02
|
Mar. 1 ’02
|
Mar. 20 ’02
|
Apr. 24 ’02
|
July 22 ’02
|
Jan. 18
|
Feb. 6
|
Feb. 26
|
Mar. 13
|
Mar. 15
|
Apr. 3
|
May 8
|
Aug. 5
|
Feb. 1
|
Feb. 20
|
Mar. 12
|
Mar. 27
|
Mar. 29
|
Apr. 17
|
May 22
|
Aug. 19
|
Feb. 15
|
Mar. 6
|
Mar. 26
|
Apr. 10
|
Apr. 12
|
May 1
|
June 5
|
Sept. 2
|
Mar. 1
|
Mar. 20
|
Apr. 9
|
Apr. 24
|
Apr. 26
|
May 15
|
June 19
|
Sept. 16
|
Mar. 15
|
Apr. 3
|
Apr. 23
|
May 8
|
May 10
|
May 29
|
July 3
|
Sept. 30
|
Mar. 29
|
Apr. 17
|
May 7
|
May 22
|
May 24
|
June 12
|
July 17
|
Oct. 14
|
Apr. 12
|
May 1
|
May 21
|
June 5
|
June 7
|
June 26
|
July 31
|
Oct. 28
|
Apr. 26
|
May 15
|
June 4
|
June 19
|
June 21
|
July 10
|
Aug. 14
|
Nov. 11
|
May 10
|
May 29
|
June 18
|
July 3
|
July 5
|
July 24
|
Aug. 28
|
Nov. 25
|
May 24
|
June 12
|
July 2
|
July 17
|
July 19
|
Aug. 7
|
Sept. 11
|
Dec. 9
|
June 7
|
June 26
|
July 16
|
July 31
|
Aug. 2
|
Aug. 21
|
Sept. 25
|
Dec. 23
|
June 21
|
July 10
|
July 30
|
Aug. 14
|
Aug. 16
|
Sept. 4
|
Oct. 9
|
Jan. 6 ’03
|
July 5
|
July 24
|
Aug. 13
|
Aug. 28
|
Aug. 30
|
Sept. 18
|
Oct. 23
|
Jan. 20 ’03
|
July 19
|
Aug. 7
|
Aug. 27
|
Sept. 11
|
Sept. 13
|
Oct. 2
|
Nov. 6
|
Feb. 3 ’03
|
Aug. 2
|
Aug. 21
|
Sept. 10
|
Sept. 25
|
Sept. 27
|
Oct. 16
|
Nov. 20
|
Feb. 17 ’03
|
Aug. 16
|
Sept. 4
|
Sept. 24
|
Oct. 9
|
Oct. 11
|
Oct. 30
|
Dec. 4
|
Mar. 3 ’03
|
Aug. 30
|
Sept. 18
|
Oct. 8
|
Oct. 23
|
Oct. 25
|
Nov. 13
|
Dec. 18
|
Mar. 17 ’03
|
Sept. 13
|
Oct. 2
|
Oct. 22
|
Nov. 6
|
Nov. 8
|
Nov. 27
|
Jan. 1 ’03
|
Mar. 31 ’03
|
Sept. 27
|
Oct. 16
|
Nov. 5
|
Nov. 20
|
Nov. 22
|
Dec. 11
|
Jan. 15 ’03
|
Apr. 14 ’03
|
Oct. 11
|
Oct. 30
|
Nov. 19
|
Dec. 4
|
Dec. 6
|
Dec. 25
|
Jan. 29 ’03
|
Apr. 28 ’03
|
Oct. 25
|
Nov. 13
|
Dec. 3
|
Dec. 18
|
Dec. 20
|
Jan. 8 ’03
|
Feb. 12 ’03
|
May 12 ’03
|
Nov. 8
|
Nov. 27
|
Dec. 17
|
Jan. 1 ’03
|
Jan. 3 ’03
|
Jan. 22 ’03
|
Feb. 26 ’03
|
May 26 ’03
|
Nov. 22
|
Dec. 11
|
Dec. 31
|
Jan. 15 ’03
|
Jan. 17 ’03
|
Feb. 5 ’03
|
Mar. 12 ’03
|
June 9 ’03
|
Dec. 6
|
Dec. 25
|
Jan. 14 ’03
|
Jan. 29 ’03
|
Jan. 31 ’03
|
Feb. 19 ’03
|
Mar. 26 ’03
|
June 23 ’03
|
Dec. 20
|
Jan. 8 ’03
|
Jan. 28 ’03
|
Feb. 12 ’03
|
Feb. 14 ’03
|
Mar. 5 ’03
|
Apr. 9 ’03
|
July 7 ’03
|
Jan. 3 ’03
|
Jan. 22 ’03
|
Feb. 11 ’03
|
Feb. 26 ’03
|
Feb. 28 ’03
|
Mar. 19 ’03
|
Apr. 23 ’03
|
July 21 ’03
|
PRINTING SCHEDULE FOR IAB
|
ISSUE NUMBER
|
SUBMISSION DEADLINE
|
ISSUE DATE
|
22
|
Friday, April 12, 2002
|
May 1, 2002
|
23
|
Friday, April 26, 2002
|
May 15, 2002
|
24
|
Friday, May 10, 2002
|
May 29, 2002
|
PLEASE
NOTE:
Rules will not be accepted after 12 o’clock noon
on the Friday filing deadline days unless prior approval has been received from
the Administrative Rules Coordinator’s office.
If the filing deadline falls on a legal holiday, submissions
made on the following Monday will be accepted.
PUBLICATION PROCEDURES
TO: Administrative Rules Coordinators and Text Processors of
State Agencies
FROM: Kathleen K. Bates, Iowa Administrative Code
Editor
SUBJECT: Publication of Rules in Iowa Administrative
Bulletin
The Administrative Code Division uses Interleaf 6 to publish
the Iowa Administrative Bulletin and can import documents directly from most
other word processing systems, including Microsoft Word, Word for Windows (Word
7 or earlier), and WordPerfect.
1. To facilitate the publication of rule–making
documents, we request that you send your document(s) as an attachment(s) to an
E–mail message, addressed to both of the following:
bruce.carr@legis.state.ia.us and
kathleen.bates@legis.state.ia.us
2. Alternatively, you may send a PC–compatible diskette
of the rule making. Please indicate on each diskette the following information:
agency name, file name, format used for exporting, and chapter(s) amended.
Diskettes may be delivered to the Administrative Code Division, First Floor
South, Grimes State Office Building, or included with the documents submitted to
the Governor’s Administrative Rules Coordinator.
Please note that changes made prior to publication of the
rule–making documents are reflected on the hard copy returned to agencies
by the Governor’s office, but not on the diskettes; diskettes are returned
unchanged.
Your cooperation helps us print the Bulletin more quickly and
cost–effectively than was previously possible and is greatly
appreciated.
______________________
IOWA ADMINISTRATIVE RULES and IOWA COURT RULES on
CD–ROM
2001 WINTER EDITION
Containing: Iowa Administrative Code (updated through
December 2001)
Iowa Administrative Bulletins (July 2001 through
December 2001)
Iowa Court Rules (effective February 15,
2002)
For free brochures and order forms contact:
Legislative Service Bureau
Attn: Ms. Stephanie
Runde
State Capitol
Des Moines, Iowa 50319
Telephone:
(515)281–3566 Fax:
(515)281–8027
lsbinfo@legis.state.ia.us
PUBLIC HEARINGS
To All Agencies:
The Administrative Rules Review Committee voted to request
that Agencies comply with Iowa Code section 17A.4(1)“b” by allowing
the opportunity for oral presentation (hearing) to be held at least twenty
days after publication of Notice in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin.
AGENCY
|
HEARING LOCATION
|
DATE AND TIME OF HEARING
|
ARTS DIVISION[222]
|
|
Grant programs, chs 3 to 5, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5 to 6.9, 6.11,
6.15, chs 7 to 13, 18.2 IAB 3/20/02 ARC 1485B
|
Classroom A State Historical Society of Iowa 600 E.
Locust St. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 15, 2002 1 to 3 p.m.
|
CULTURAL AFFAIRS DEPARTMENT[221]
|
|
Iowa community cultural grants program; cultural
enrichment grant program, 6.1 to 6.5, 8.4, 8.7 to 8.9 IAB 3/20/02 ARC
1486B
|
Classroom A State Historical Society of Iowa 600 E.
Locust St. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 15, 2002 1 to 3 p.m.
|
EDUCATIONAL EXAMINERS BOARD[282]
|
|
Adding endorsements to licenses, 14.106 IAB 3/20/02
ARC 1483B
|
State Board Conference Room Second Floor Grimes State
Office Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 10, 2002 1 p.m.
|
Mandatory training for identifying and reporting child and
dependent adult abuse, 16.3, 17.5 to 17.9, 19.5, 20.6, 21.5, 22.13 IAB
3/20/02 ARC 1484B
|
State Board Conference Room Second Floor Grimes State
Office Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 10, 2002 2 p.m.
|
EDUCATION DEPARTMENT[281]
|
|
Standards for teacher intern preparation programs, ch
77 IAB 4/3/02 ARC 1525B (ICN Network)
|
ICN Room, Second Floor Grimes State Office Bldg. Des
Moines, Iowa
|
April 25, 2002 4 to 5:30 p.m.
|
|
Room 208 Metro High School 1212 Seventh St. SE Cedar
Rapids, Iowa
|
April 25, 2002 4 to 5:30 p.m.
|
|
Marv O’Hare Room, Admin. Office Forum Bldg. 2300
Chaney Dubuque, Iowa
|
April 25, 2002 4 to 5:30 p.m.
|
|
A–H–S–T High School 768 S.
Maple Avoca, Iowa
|
April 25, 2002 4 to 5:30 p.m.
|
|
Morningside College 1501 Morningside Avenue Sioux City,
Iowa
|
April 25, 2002 4 to 5:30 p.m.
|
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION COMMISSION[567]
|
|
Insignificant activities for the purpose of Title V permits,
22.100, 22.103 IAB 3/20/02 ARC 1475B
|
Conference Rooms 3 and 4 7900 Hickman Rd. Urbandale,
Iowa
|
April 24, 2002 10:30 a.m.
|
Animal feeding operations— adjacent feedlots,
65.1 IAB 3/20/02 ARC 1476B
|
Fifth Floor Conference Room Wallace State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 17, 2002 1 p.m.
|
Recycling operations; transfer stations and citizen
convenience centers, 104.21 to 104.24, 106.1 to 106.19 IAB 3/20/02
ARC 1477B
|
Conference Room 5 West Wallace State Office Bldg. Des
Moines, Iowa
|
April 9, 2002 3 p.m.
|
GENERAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT[401]
|
|
Purchasing standards for service contracts, ch 12 IAB
4/3/02 ARC 1532B
|
Director’s Conference Room, Level A Hoover State
Office Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 24, 2002 11 a.m.
|
Uniform terms and conditions for service contracts, ch
13 IAB 4/3/02 ARC 1531B
|
Director’s Conference Room, Level A Hoover State
Office Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 24, 2002 11 a.m.
|
INSURANCE DIVISION[191]
|
|
Financial instruments used in hedging transactions, ch
49 IAB 3/20/02 ARC 1488B (See also ARC
1487B)
|
330 Maple St. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 9, 2002 10 a.m.
|
NATURAL RESOURCE COMMISSION[571]
|
|
Fish habitat promotion for county conservation boards, ch
35 IAB 4/3/02 ARC 1518B
|
Fourth Floor East Conference Room Wallace State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
May 7, 2002 2 p.m.
|
State game management areas, 51.9 IAB 3/6/02 ARC
1461B
|
Fourth Floor East Conference Room Wallace State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 10, 2002 10 a.m.
|
Nursery stock prices, 71.3 IAB 4/3/02 ARC
1517B
|
Fourth Floor East Conference Room Wallace State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 23, 2002 1 p.m.
|
Waterfowl and coot hunting seasons, 91.1, 91.3, 91.4(2),
91.6 IAB 3/6/02 ARC 1460B
|
Fourth Floor East Conference Room Wallace State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 10, 2002 10 a.m.
|
Wild turkey fall hunting by residents—license
procedures, 99.9, 99.11(6) IAB 3/6/02 ARC 1462B
|
Fourth Floor East Conference Room Wallace State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 10, 2002 10 a.m.
|
Deer hunting by residents, 106.1(5), 106.5(2), 106.6(3),
106.7(3), 106.8, 106.10(1), 106.11 IAB 3/6/02 ARC 1463B
|
Fourth Floor East Conference Room Wallace State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 18, 2002 10 a.m.
|
PAROLE BOARD[205]
|
|
General, chs 1 to 16 IAB 3/20/02 ARC
1472B
|
Holmes Murphy Bldg. 420 Watson Powell Jr. Way Des
Moines, Iowa
|
April 9, 2002 10 a.m.
|
PERSONNEL DEPARTMENT[581]
|
|
Years of service incentive program, 1.1, 4.12, 4.13 IAB
4/3/02 ARC 1519B
|
Grimes North Conference Room First Floor Grimes State
Office Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 29, 2002 9 a.m.
|
IPERS—benefits advisory committee, 21.33 IAB
4/3/02 ARC 1491B
|
7401 Register Dr. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 23, 2002 9 a.m.
|
PROFESSIONAL LICENSURE DIVISION[645]
|
|
Dietetic examiners, chs 79 to 84 IAB 4/3/02 ARC
1510B
|
Fifth Floor Board Conference Room Lucas State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 23, 2002 9 to 11 a.m.
|
Speech pathology and audiology examiners, ch 299;
300.1; ch 301; 303.2(1) IAB 4/3/02 ARC 1509B
|
Fifth Floor Board Conference Room Lucas State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 23, 2002 9 to 11 a.m.
|
Physician assistant examiners, chs 325 to 327; 328.5,
328.7; chs 329, 330 IAB 4/3/02 ARC 1495B
|
Fifth Floor Board Conference Room Lucas State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 23, 2002 9 to 11 a.m.
|
RACING AND GAMING COMMISSION[491]
|
|
Stewards; gambling games of chance involving prizes
awarded to participants through promotional activities at a facility,
4.2, 4.6, 7.5(2), 11.5(4) IAB 4/3/02 ARC 1512B
|
Suite B 717 E. Court Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 23, 2002 9 a.m.
|
REGENTS BOARD[681]
|
|
Personnel administration, amendments to ch 3 IAB 4/3/02
ARC 1534B
|
Conference Room 11260 Aurora Ave. Urbandale,
Iowa
|
April 23, 2002 10 to 11 a.m.
|
SOIL CONSERVATION DIVISION[27]
|
|
Iowa financial incentive program for soil erosion
control, 10.41(9), 10.60(1), 10.82(3), 10.84 IAB 4/3/02 ARC
1530B
|
Second Floor Conference Room Wallace State Office
Bldg. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 24, 2002 10 a.m.
|
TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT[761]
|
|
For–hire intrastate motor carrier authority,
524.1(2), 524.3(3), 524.10, 524.11(1), 524.12, 524.16 to 524.18 IAB 3/20/02
ARC 1466B
|
DOT Conference Room Park Fair Mall 100 Euclid
Ave. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 11, 2002 10 a.m. (If
requested)
|
UTILITIES DIVISION[199]
|
|
Assessment allocation rules, 17.1 to 17.8 IAB 3/6/02
ARC 1457B (See also ARC 1279B, IAB
1/9/02)
|
Hearing Room 350 Maple St. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 19, 2002 10 a.m.
|
Electric delivery reliability, 20.2(5), 20.5, 20.7, 20.18,
25.3, 25.4 IAB 3/6/02 ARC 1437B
|
Hearing Room 350 Maple St. Des Moines, Iowa
|
April 30, 2002 9 a.m.
|
CITATION of Administrative Rules
The Iowa
Administrative Code shall be cited as (agency identification number)
IAC
(chapter, rule, subrule, lettered paragraph, or numbered
subparagraph).
441 IAC 79 (Chapter)
441 IAC
79.1(249A) (Rule)
441 IAC 79.1(1) (Subrule)
441 IAC
79.1(1)“a” (Paragraph)
441 IAC
79.1(1)“a”(1) (Subparagraph)
The Iowa Administrative
Bulletin shall be cited as IAB (volume), (number), (publication
date), (page
number), (ARC number).
IAB Vol. XII, No. 23 (5/16/90) p. 2050, ARC
872A
AGENCY IDENTIFICATION
NUMBERS
Due to reorganization of state government by 1986 Iowa Acts,
chapter 1245, it was necessary to revise the agency identification numbering
system, i.e., the bracketed number following the agency name.
“Umbrella” agencies and elected officials are set
out below at the left–hand margin in CAPITAL letters.
Divisions (boards, commissions, etc.) are indented and set out
in lowercase type under their statutory “umbrellas.”
Other autonomous agencies which were not included in the
original reorganization legislation as “umbrella” agencies are
included alphabetically in small capitals at the left–hand margin, e.g.,
BEEF INDUSTRY COUNCIL, IOWA[101].
The following list will be updated as changes occur:
AGRICULTURE AND LAND STEWARDSHIP DEPARTMENT[21]
Agricultural Development Authority[25]
Soil Conservation Division[27]
ATTORNEY GENERAL[61]
AUDITOR OF STATE[81]
BEEF INDUSTRY COUNCIL, IOWA[101]
BLIND, DEPARTMENT FOR THE[111]
CITIZENS’ AIDE[141]
CIVIL RIGHTS COMMISSION[161]
COMMERCE DEPARTMENT[181]
Alcoholic Beverages Division[185]
Banking Division[187]
Credit Union Division[189]
Insurance Division[191]
Professional Licensing and Regulation Division[193]
Accountancy Examining Board[193A]
Architectural Examining Board[193B]
Engineering and Land Surveying Examining Board[193C]
Landscape Architectural Examining Board[193D]
Real Estate Commission[193E]
Real Estate Appraiser Examining Board[193F]
Savings and Loan Division[197]
Utilities Division[199]
CORRECTIONS DEPARTMENT[201]
Parole Board[205]
CULTURAL AFFAIRS DEPARTMENT[221]
Arts Division[222]
Historical Division[223]
ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT, IOWA DEPARTMENT OF[261]
City Development Board[263]
Iowa Finance Authority[265]
EDUCATION DEPARTMENT[281]
Educational Examiners Board[282]
College Student Aid Commission[283]
Higher Education Loan Authority[284]
Iowa Advance Funding Authority[285]
Libraries and Information Services Division[286]
Public Broadcasting Division[288]
School Budget Review Committee[289]
EGG COUNCIL, IOWA[301]
ELDER AFFAIRS DEPARTMENT[321]
EMPOWERMENT BOARD, IOWA[349]
ETHICS AND CAMPAIGN DISCLOSURE BOARD,
IOWA[351]
EXECUTIVE COUNCIL[361]
FAIR BOARD[371]
GENERAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT[401]
HUMAN INVESTMENT COUNCIL[417]
HUMAN RIGHTS DEPARTMENT[421]
Community Action Agencies Division[427]
Criminal and Juvenile Justice Planning Division[428]
Deaf Services Division[429]
Persons With Disabilities Division[431]
Latino Affairs Division[433]
Status of African–Americans, Division on
the[434]
Status of Women Division[435]
HUMAN SERVICES DEPARTMENT[441]
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY DEPARTMENT[471]
INSPECTIONS AND APPEALS DEPARTMENT[481]
Employment Appeal Board[486]
Foster Care Review Board[489]
Racing and Gaming Commission[491]
State Public Defender[493]
LAW ENFORCEMENT ACADEMY[501]
LIVESTOCK HEALTH ADVISORY
COUNCIL[521]
MANAGEMENT DEPARTMENT[541]
Appeal Board, State[543]
City Finance Committee[545]
County Finance Committee[547]
NARCOTICS ENFORCEMENT ADVISORY
COUNCIL[551]
NATIONAL AND COMMUNITY SERVICE, IOWA COMMISSION
ON[555]
NATURAL RESOURCES DEPARTMENT[561]
Energy and Geological Resources Division[565]
Environmental Protection Commission[567]
Natural Resource Commission[571]
Preserves, State Advisory Board for[575]
PERSONNEL DEPARTMENT[581]
PETROLEUM UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK
FUND
BOARD, IOWA COMPREHENSIVE[591]
PREVENTION OF DISABILITIES POLICY
COUNCIL[597]
PUBLIC DEFENSE DEPARTMENT[601]
Emergency Management Division[605]
Military Division[611]
PUBLIC EMPLOYMENT RELATIONS BOARD[621]
PUBLIC HEALTH DEPARTMENT[641]
Substance Abuse Commission[643]
Professional Licensure Division[645]
Dental Examiners Board[650]
Medical Examiners Board[653]
Nursing Board[655]
Pharmacy Examiners Board[657]
PUBLIC SAFETY DEPARTMENT[661]
RECORDS COMMISSION[671]
REGENTS BOARD[681]
Archaeologist[685]
REVENUE AND FINANCE DEPARTMENT[701]
Lottery Division[705]
SECRETARY OF STATE[721]
SEED CAPITAL CORPORATION,
IOWA[727]
SHEEP AND WOOL PROMOTION BOARD,
IOWA[741]
TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND TECHNOLOGY COMMISSION,
IOWA[751]
TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT[761]
Railway Finance Authority[765]
TREASURER OF STATE[781]
TURKEY MARKETING COUNCIL,
IOWA[787]
UNIFORM STATE LAWS
COMMISSION[791]
VETERANS AFFAIRS COMMISSION[801]
VETERINARY MEDICINE BOARD[811]
VOTER REGISTRATION
COMMISSION[821]
WORKFORCE DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT[871]
Labor Services Division[875]
Workers’ Compensation Division[876]
Workforce Development Board and
Workforce Development
Center Administration Division[877]
NOTICES
ARC 1525B
EDUCATION
DEPARTMENT[281]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 256.7, the
State Board of Education hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to adopt Chapter
77, “Standards for Teacher Intern Preparation Programs,” Iowa
Administrative Code.
The proposed rules govern approval of practitioner preparation
programs at undergraduate and graduate levels rather than having separate
chapters for each level. New licensure rules proposed by the Board of
Educational Examiners set forth procedures for issuing a teacher intern license
to an individual possessing a baccalaureate degree and meeting other prescribed
requirements so that the individual may become the teacher of record in a high
school during the one–year teacher internship. Four–year colleges
or universities may offer a teacher intern preparation program approved by the
State Board of Education. The proposed rules establish the standards required
for approval of these teacher intern preparation programs.
A public hearing on the proposed rules will be held over the
ICN from 4 to 5:30 p.m. on April 25, 2002, at which time persons may
present their views orally or in writing.
The origination site is:
ICN Room, Second Floor
Grimes State Office Building
East 14th and Grand Avenue
Des Moines, Iowa
Additional sites are:
Metro High School
Room 208
1212 7th Street SE
Cedar Rapids
Dubuque Community School District
Marv O’Hare Room
Administration Office, Forum Building
2300 Chaney
Dubuque
A–H–S–T High School
768 S. Maple
Avoca
Morningside College
1501 Morningside Avenue
Sioux City
Persons who wish to make oral presentations at the public
hearing may contact Dr. Sandra Renegar, Administrative Consultant, Division of
Early Childhood, Elementary and Secondary Education, Grimes State Office
Building, East 14th and Grand Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0147, or at
(515)281–3427, prior to the date of the public hearing.
Any persons who intend to attend the public hearing and have
special requirements such as hearing or mobility impairments should contact the
Department of Education and advise of specific needs.
Any interested person may make written comments or suggestions
on the proposed new chapter through 5:30 p.m., April 25, 2002. Written comments
and suggestions should be addressed to Dr. Sandra L. Renegar, Administrative
Consultant, Department of Education, at the above address; fax
(515)281–7669; or E–mail
Sandra.Renegar@ed.state.ia.us.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code sections 256.7
and 256.16.
The following new chapter is proposed.
CHAPTER 77
STANDARDS FOR TEACHER INTERN
PREPARATION
PROGRAMS
281—77.1(256) General statement. Programs of
teacher intern preparation leading to licensure in Iowa are subject to approval
by the state board of education, as provided in Iowa Code chapter 256.
281—77.2(256) Definitions. For purposes of
clarity, the following definitions are used throughout the chapter:
“AEA” means area education agency.
“BOEE” means the board of educational examiners,
the board responsible for establishing licensure requirements and issuing
licenses.
“Cooperating teachers” means classroom teachers
who provide guidance and supervision to teacher candidates during the
candidates’ field experiences in the schools.
“Department” means the department of
education.
“Director” means the director of
education.
“Institution” means a four–year college or
university in Iowa offering teacher intern preparation and seeking state board
approval of its teacher intern preparation program.
“INTASC” means the Interstate New Teacher
Assessment and Support Consortium, the source of national standards for
beginning teachers.
“Intern” means an individual who is enrolled in a
teacher intern preparation program leading to teacher intern
licensure.
“Mentor” means an individual employed by a school
district or area education agency as a classroom teacher, or a retired teacher
who holds a valid license issued under Iowa Code chapter 272. The individual
must have a record of four years of successful teaching practice with at least
two of the four years on a nonprobationary basis and must demonstrate
professional commitment to both the improvement of teaching and learning and the
development of beginning teachers or teacher interns.
“Partnership” means an agreement between a college
or university and a school district or area education agency.
“Practitioner” means a teacher, administrator, or
other professional school personnel holding a license issued by the board of
educational examiners.
“Program” means the program for teacher intern
preparation at colleges and universities leading to licensure of teacher
interns.
“State board” means Iowa state board of
education.
“Teacher intern candidate” means an individual who
is enrolled in a teacher intern preparation program leading to teacher intern
licensure.
“Teacher intern preparation program” means the
program for teacher intern preparation at colleges and universities leading to
licensure of teacher interns.
“Unit” means the organizational entity within an
institution with the responsibility of administering the teacher intern
preparation program.
281—77.3(256) Institutions affected. All Iowa
colleges and universities engaged in the preparation of teacher interns and
seeking state board approval of their programs shall meet the standards
contained in this chapter.
281—77.4(256) Criteria for Iowa teacher intern
preparation programs. Each institution seeking approval of its program of
teacher intern preparation shall file evidence of the extent to which it meets
the standards contained in this chapter by means of a written
self–evaluation report and an evaluation conducted by the department.
After the state board has approved the teacher intern preparation program filed
by an institution, teacher intern candidates who complete the program and are
recommended by the authorized official of that institution will be issued the
appropriate license and endorsement(s).
281—77.5(256) Approval of programs. For initial
approval, institutions shall submit written documentation of the teacher intern
preparation program’s compliance with the program approval rules
77.10(256) through 77.16(256). Approval by the state board of the
institutions’ teacher intern preparation programs shall be based on the
recommendation of the director after study of the factual and evaluative
evidence on record about each program in terms of the standards contained in
this chapter. Approval, if granted, shall cover the period of time between
initial approval and the institution’s next regularly scheduled state
review under 281 IAC 79.5(256) and 281 IAC 79.6(256). After the initial
approval period, approval of the teacher intern preparation program will be
included as part of the institution’s reapplication for
approval.
If approval is not granted, the applying institution will be
advised concerning the areas in which improvement or changes appear to be
essential for approval. In this case, the institution shall be given the
opportunity to present factual information concerning its programs at the next
regularly scheduled meeting of the state board. The institution may also
reapply at its discretion when it is ready to show what actions have been taken
to address the areas of suggested improvement.
281—77.6(256) Periodic reports. Institutions
with approved teacher intern preparation programs shall make periodic reports
upon request of the department. The reports shall provide basic information
necessary to keep up–to–date records of each teacher intern
preparation program and to carry out research studies relating to teacher intern
preparation.
281—77.7(256) Approval of program changes. Upon
application for approval of program changes by an institution, the director is
authorized to approve minor additions to, or changes within, the curricula of an
institution’s approved teacher intern preparation program. When an
institution proposes a revision that exceeds the primary scope of its programs,
the revision shall become operative only after having been approved by the state
board.
281—77.8(256) Governance and resources. As a
component of the program, the institution shall develop a partnership with the
institution and local school district(s) or AEA. The partnership agreement
shall clearly delineate the partnership members’ responsibilities and
resources to be contributed to the program.
77.8(1) The institution’s responsibilities shall
include but not be limited to:
a. Organizing and implementing the screening of prospective
teacher interns;
b. Submitting a recommendation by the authorized official of
the institution to the BOEE for a teacher intern license. The recommendation
from the institution must be submitted to the BOEE upon the teacher intern
candidate’s completion of the first 12 semester hours, as outlined in the
program content, and prior to the beginning of the teacher internship
year;
c. Supervising the teacher intern during the internship year;
d. Verifying that the teacher intern has successfully
completed all required coursework and demonstrated
all required
competencies in the approved teacher intern program;
e. Submitting a recommendation to the BOEE that the teacher
intern candidate is eligible to move from the teacher intern license to the
initial license. The recommendation from the institution must be submitted to
the BOEE upon the teacher intern candidate’s completion of the second 12
semester hours, as outlined in the program content.
f. Preparing data in response to the department’s
request for information regarding, but not limited to, the teacher intern
selection and preparation program, institutional support, local school district
mentors, and local school district or AEA support.
77.8(2) The local school district’s or
AEA’s responsibilities shall include, but not be limited to:
a. Offering employment to an individual who has been evaluated
by a college or university for eligibility in the approved teacher intern
program;
b. Participating in a state–approved mentoring and
induction program;
c. Providing a district mentor for the teacher
intern;
d. Ensuring that an assignment does not unnecessarily overload
the teacher intern with extracurricular duties not related to the teaching
assignment;
e. Providing other support and supervision, as needed, to the
teacher intern to maximize the opportunity for the teacher intern to
succeed;
f. Preparing data in response to the department’s
request for information regarding, but not limited to, the teacher intern
selection and preparation program, institutional support, the local school
district mentor, and local school district support.
77.8(3) A teacher intern committee, with membership
from the partnership including, but not limited to, a program director from the
institution, teacher education faculty, and school principals, shall design the
teacher intern program.
The teacher intern committee shall develop program goals, the
program of study including field experiences, a system of support for teacher
interns including mentoring and supervision by program faculty, an assessment
plan for documenting teacher intern candidates’ progress during
preparation, and other items deemed appropriate to the program design.
Upon implementation of the teacher intern preparation program,
a teacher intern committee shall monitor progress of the program toward goals,
examine formative and summative data about candidates and the program, and
recommend ways to address issues arising during implementation or subsequent to
analysis of evaluative data.
77.8(4) Resources shall support quality clinical
practice for all teacher intern candidates, professional development for
faculty, and technological and instructional needs of faculty to prepare teacher
intern candidates with the dispositions, knowledge, and skills necessary to
support student learning.
77.8(5) Teacher intern candidates’ and
faculty’s access to books, journals, and electronic information shall
support teaching and scholarship.
77.8(6) Sufficient numbers of faculty and
administrative, clerical, and technical staff shall be available to ensure the
consistent planning, delivery, and quality of the teacher intern
program.
77.8(7) The use of part–time faculty and
graduate students in teaching roles shall be managed to ensure integrity,
quality, and continuity of the teacher intern program.
77.8(8) Institutional commitment shall include
financial resources, facilities and equipment to ensure the fulfillment of the
institution’s and unit’s missions, delivery of a quality program,
and preparation of teacher intern candidates.
281—77.9(256) Diversity.
77.9(1) Recruitment, admissions, hiring, and retention
policies and practices shall support a diverse faculty and teacher intern
candidate population in the program.
77.9(2) Efforts toward racial, ethnic, and gender
diversity among teacher intern candidates and program faculty shall be
documented. In addition, diversity efforts shall include persons with
disabilities, persons from different language and socioeconomic backgrounds, and
persons from different regions of the country and world.
77.9(3) Unit efforts in increasing or maintaining
diversity shall be reflected in plans, monitoring of plans and efforts, and
results.
77.9(4) The institution, the program and members of
the partnership shall maintain a climate that supports diversity in general as
well as supporting teacher intern candidates and faculty from underrepresented
groups in the program.
281—77.10(256) Faculty.
77.10(1) Faculty members from the institution and
others in the partnership shall have preparation and have had experiences in
situations similar to those for which the teacher interns are being
prepared.
77.10(2) The collective competence and background of
the total teacher intern preparation faculty shall reflect a balance of theory,
experience, and knowledge appropriate to the teacher intern program being
offered.
77.10(3) The program shall administer a systematic and
comprehensive evaluation system and professional development activities to
enhance the teaching competence and intellectual vitality of the teacher intern
program faculty.
77.10(4) Policies and assignments shall allow faculty
to be involved effectively in teaching, scholarship, and supervision of teacher
intern candidates.
Teacher intern faculty members shall maintain an ongoing,
meaningful involvement in activities in schools where teacher interns are
employed. Activities of full–time permanent teacher intern faculty
members from the institution preparing teacher interns shall include at least 40
hours of team teaching during a period not to exceed five years in duration at
the middle or secondary school level. This five–year period shall align
with the institution’s scheduled cycle of state review.
281—77.11(256) Teacher intern
selection.
77.11(1) Representatives from members of the
partnership shall be actively involved in the identification of criteria for
selecting teacher intern candidates. Representatives from members of the
partnership shall be actively involved in the screening, interviewing and
selection of teacher intern candidates.
77.11(2) Rigorous screening shall be used to select
teacher intern candidates. The screening shall include, but not be limited
to:
a. Verification of the prospective candidate’s
completion of a baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited institution.
If any candidate’s undergraduate grade point average is less than 2.5 on a
4.0 scale, the program admission criteria shall specify the additional criteria
that an applicant must satisfy for provisional admittance to the teacher intern
program;
b. Evaluation of the prospective candidate’s transcripts
to determine if the prospective candidate meets the state minimum requirements
for at least one of the board of educational examiners’ secondary
(7–12) endorsement areas listed in 282 IAC 14.141(272);
c. Evaluation of the prospective candidate’s minimum of
three years of postbaccalaureate work experience;
d. An in–person interview of the prospective candidate
designed to generate information related to the attributes identified as
essential for candidates by the partnership;
e. Examination of references submitted by the prospective
teacher intern; and
f. Evaluation of an impromptu writing sample submitted by the
prospective teacher intern.
281—77.12(256) Curriculum and
instruction.
77.12(1) Content. Teacher intern candidates shall
develop the dispositions, knowledge, and performance expectations of the INTASC
standards embedded in the professional education core for an Iowa teaching
license at a level appropriate for a novice teacher. The teacher intern
preparation program content shall include:
a. A minimum of 12 semester hours of introductory content
specified by the board of educational examiners to be completed prior to the
beginning of the academic year of the candidate’s initial employment as a
teacher intern. This introductory content shall include, but not be limited
to:
(1) Learning environment/classroom management. The intern
shall demonstrate an understanding of individual and group motivation and
behavior to create a learning environment that encourages positive social
interaction, active engagement in learning, and self–motivation.
(2) Instructional planning. The intern shall plan instruction
based upon knowledge of subject matter, students, the community, curriculum
goals, and state curriculum models.
(3) Instructional strategies. The intern shall demonstrate an
understanding of and shall use a variety of instructional strategies to
encourage students’ development of critical thinking, problem solving, and
performance skills.
(4) Student learning. The intern shall demonstrate an
understanding of how students learn and develop and provide learning
opportunities that support intellectual, career, social, and personal
development.
(5) Diverse learners. The intern shall demonstrate an
understanding of how students differ in their approaches to learning and create
instructional opportunities that are equitable and are adaptable to diverse
learners.
(6) Collaboration, ethics and relationships. The intern shall
foster relationships with parents, school colleagues, and organizations in the
larger community to support students’ learning and development.
(7) Assessment. The intern shall demonstrate an understanding
of and shall use formal and informal assessment strategies to evaluate the
continuous intellectual, social, and physical development of the
learner.
(8) Field experiences that provide opportunities for
interaction with students in an environment that supports learning in context.
These experiences shall total at least 50 contact hours in the field prior to
the beginning of the academic year of the candidate’s initial employment
as a teacher intern.
b. A minimum of 4 semester hours of a teacher intern seminar
during the teacher internship year to include support and extension of
coursework from the teacher intern introductory content.
c. A minimum of 12 semester hours of concluding content
specified by the BOEE to be completed prior to the recommendation for an initial
teaching license. This content shall include but not be limited to:
(1) Foundations, reflection, and professional development.
The intern shall continually evaluate the effects of the practitioner’s
choices and actions on students, parents, and other professionals in the
learning community and actively seek out opportunities to grow
professionally.
(2) Communication. The intern shall use knowledge of
effective verbal, nonverbal, and media communication techniques, and other forms
of symbolic representation, to foster active inquiry and collaboration and to
support interaction in the classroom.
(3) Exceptional learner. The intern shall use knowledge of
exceptional learners that contributes to the education of individuals with
disabilities and the gifted and talented.
(4) Reading strategies. The intern shall integrate reading
strategies into the teaching of the content area.
(5) Computer technology. The intern shall use knowledge of
technology, including computers, to enhance instruction.
(6) An advanced study of the items set forth in
77.12(1)“a”(1) to (7).
77.12(2) Instructional practices. The program faculty
shall:
a. Apply adult learning theory and its impact on professional
development;
b. Utilize innovative instructional practice supported by
research;
c. Reintegrate active engagement of teacher intern candidates
and facilitate teacher intern reflection; and
d. Connect professional education studies with teacher intern
candidates’ field experiences prior to, during, and following the
internship year.
281—77.13(256) Candidate support.
77.13(1) The program shall provide an orientation for
teacher intern candidates prior to the internship year including but not limited
to the program goals and expectations, licensure requirements, support to be
provided by the supervisor from the institution and the teacher mentor at the
site of the internship, and cohort–building.
77.13(2) Program faculty shall provide teacher intern
candidates with academic advising, monitoring of their performance throughout
the program, and consultation opportunities.
77.13(3) Program faculty shall provide regular
supervision in teacher intern candidates’ classrooms with additional
supervision and assistance as needed.
77.13(4) The program shall coordinate support between
the teacher intern candidate’s local district mentor and program
supervisor.
77.13(5) The program shall offer the teacher intern
candidate access to support services offered by the institution.
281—77.14(256) Candidate assessment.
77.14(1) Performance of teacher intern candidates
shall be measured against national professional standards, state licensure
standards, and the program’s learning outcomes.
77.14(2) The program shall utilize a coherent,
sequential assessment system for individual teacher intern candidates. The
assessment system shall clearly document candidates’ attainment of the
unit’s and the board of educational examiners’ licensure standards
by providing evidence via multiple measures of content knowledge, professional
and pedagogical knowledge, and effect on student learning and achievement.
Whenever possible, this assessment system shalldocument teacher intern
candidates’ performance of contentspecified in 77.12(1)“a”(1)
to (7) and 77.12(1)“c”(1) to (5) in the teacher intern
candidates’ classrooms.
77.14(3) The institution shall document teacher intern
candidates’ completion of licensure requirements, and the authorized
official of the institution shall recommend eligible candidates for
licensure.
281—77.15(256) Program evaluation. The
institution shall:
77.15(1) Demonstrate how the information gathered via
the individual teacher intern candidate assessment system is utilized to refine
and revise the program’s goals, content, delivery strategies, and
candidate support.
77.15(2) Document the quality of programs through the
collective presentation of assessment data related to performance of teacher
intern candidates and demonstrate how the data are used for continuous program
improvement.
a. This documentation shall include evidence of evaluative
data collected by the teacher intern program through studies of teacher intern
program candidates while they are in the program and data collected from the
district(s) or AEA employing the candidates. This evidence shall include, but
is not limited to, candidates’ content and pedagogical knowledge and
performance, level of support for candidates provided by the institution and the
local district, and perceived quality of preparation throughout the
program.
b. This documentation shall include evidence of evaluative
data collected by the teacher intern program through follow–up studies of
teacher intern program graduates and their employers.
77.15(3) Submit an annual report to the department
including, but not limited to, a composite of evaluative data collected by the
program.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code sections 256.7
and 256.16.
ARC 1513B
EMPOWERMENT BOARD,
IOWA[349]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 256.7(5), the
Iowa Empowerment Board hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to rescind Chapter
1, “Iowa Empowerment Board,” and adopt new Chapter 1,
“Community Empowerment,” Iowa Administrative Code.
This amendment:
• Complies with Executive
Order Number 8 in the review, revision and improvement of current
rules;
• Allows local community
empowerment greater flexibility in community planning to support children and
their families;
• Eliminates duplication of
phrases and terminology in current rules;
• Makes the language in the
rules consistent with the language in the community empowerment documents that
are used by community boards and local empowerment areas; and
• Orders and structures the
language in the rules to enhance understanding and to increase
readability.
Any interested person may make written suggestions or comments
on these proposed rules on or before April 23, 2002. Such written materials
should be directed to the Office of Empowerment, Department of Management, Room
12, State Capitol Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319; fax (515) 281–4225; or
E–mail Kris.Bell@idom.state.ia.us. Persons who wish to convey
their views orally should contact the Office of Empowerment at
(515)281–4537 or (515)281–4321 or at the Office of Empowerment in
Room 12 at the State Capitol Building.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter
28.
The following amendment is proposed.
Rescind 349—Chapter 1 and adopt the following
new chapter in lieu thereof:
CHAPTER 1
COMMUNITY EMPOWERMENT
349—1.1(28) Scope. Community empowerment is
created to establish partnerships between state government and communities. The
emphasis is to develop community empowerment areas to improve the
well–being of children and their families and, through collaboration, to
improve the efficiency and effectiveness of local education, health and human
services.
349—1.2(28) Purpose. Community empowerment is
intended to empower individuals and their communities to achieve desired results
to improve the quality of life for children and their families in Iowa.
Community empowerment will enable local citizens to lead collaborative efforts
involving education, health, and human services on behalf of children,
families, and other citizens residing in the area. It is believed that
individuals in local communities working together through the process of
community assessment, identification of priorities and development of their
community plan is the best means to reach desired results. The role of the Iowa
empowerment board and the state is to support and facilitate growth of
individual and community responsibility in place of the directive role the
public has come to expect of government.
Every community in Iowa will develop the capacity and
commitment to achieve these desired results for children and their
families:
1. Healthy children.
2. Children ready to succeed in school.
3. Safe and supportive communities.
4. Secure and nurturing families.
5. Secure and nurturing child care environments.
349—1.3(28) Availability. Community empowerment
areas are statewide to promote collaboration among state and local education,
health, and human services, consumers, business, faith organizations and public
and private organizations to reach the desired results.
349—1.4(28) Definitions. For the purpose of
these rules, the following definitions apply:
“Accountable” means the community board
will include the public in assessing, setting priorities, and developing and
implementing a community plan to reach the purpose and desired results of
empowerment and will ensure that adequate records are maintained.
“Advocacy” means to promote the purpose of
community empowerment, promote the enhancement and expansion of the community
plan and promote individual and family access to formal and informal
support.
“Alignment” means state– and
community–level interagency efforts to integrate early care, health, and
education systems and enhance state and community partnerships through
innovative approaches.
“Central office of empowerment” means a
facilitator (appointed by the governor) and staff in the Iowa department of
management.
“Citizen” means a resident of the empowerment
area, who is not an elected official or a required representative for education,
health, and human services, or a paid staff member of an agency whose services
fall under the plan or purview of the community board. A citizen representative
may also represent faith, consumer or business.
“Community assessment” means to identify all
formal and informal supports, assets and resources, as well as gaps, in the
empowerment area for children and their families. A community assessment
includes communitywide data, statistics, and facts upon which to base decisions
to develop a community plan and to identify priorities to reach the desired
results.
“Community board” means the governing board
for an empowerment area.
“Community board advisory council” means
individuals appointed by the community board to function on a continuing basis
to study and recommend policy and guidelines for the empowerment area.
“Community plan” means the local plan, adopted by
the community board following input from the community, implemented in the
empowerment area.
“Consumer” means an individual or a family member
who is or has been receiving services or who is impacted by the community
plan.
“Core functions” means components of services
which provide a common foundation for home visitation, parent support and
preschool services.
“Culturally competent” means the capacity to
function across cultures, requiring the ability to appreciate, understand and
interact with members of diverse populations within the community.
“Decategorization project” means the human
services decategorization of child welfare and juvenile justice funding project
operated under Iowa Code section 232.188.
“Designation” means the status awarded by the Iowa
board to an empowerment area meeting the criteria for geographic boundaries,
readiness, the collaboration process, assessment, priorities, a community plan
and budget to reach the desired results for children and their
families.
“Developmentally appropriate” means that services
are based on human development and learning, individual characteristics and
experiences, and social and cultural contexts.
“Elected official” means a member of a board or
governing body elected through the means of a public election.
“Empowerment area” means a geographic area
as defined by the local community and designated by the Iowa board.
“Family home visiting” means a
face–to–face visit in the home, or other temporary location, with an
individual or family to facilitate the individual or family to meet the goals.
“Fiscal agent” means a public agency as
defined in Iowa Code section 28E.2; a community action agency as defined in Iowa
Code section 216A.91; a nonprofit corporation; or an area education agency as
defined in Iowa Code chapter 273 to be designated as the fiscal agent by a
community board.
“Indicator” means a measure that indirectly
quantifies the achievement of a result.
“Iowa board” means the state of Iowa’s
community empowerment board as appointed by the governor that meets the
membership criteria of citizens and state agency directors as voting members and
legislators as nonvoting members.
“Iowa board advisory council” means a body of
individuals appointed by the Iowa board, including community board members, to
obtain input and recommendations on policy and guidelines.
“Iowa empowerment fund” means a fund created in
the state treasury from which moneys will be distributed to empowerment areas
for the purpose of supporting children and their families.
“Parent education” means any developmentally
appropriate information provided to or facilitated with individuals who function
in the role of parents or expectant parents.
“Parent support” means any activity, either formal
or informal, that supports the success of children and their families to reach
desired results.
“Performance measure” means a measure that
assesses a program, activity, or service.
“Redesignation” means a process used by the
community board and empowerment area to evaluate progress of collaborative
efforts and the community plan toward reaching desired results.
“Result” means the effect desired for
Iowans.
“Results–oriented” means the focus of the
Iowa board and community boards is on results of the effect and impact the
community plan and community collaboration have on children and their families
for progress toward the desired
results.7/01
“State agency” means a department of the executive
branch including, but not limited to, the departments of education, public
health, human services and human rights.
“State empowerment team” means the central office
of empowerment and identified personnel from the state agencies of education,
public health, human services, and human rights to provide the
day–to–day operational work of local– and state–level
community empowerment and support to the Iowa board.
“Technical assistance” means an ongoing,
systematic and interactive process that is designed to achieve results and that
enables knowledge from research, policy and best practice to be shared in
partnerships through a variety of strategies with specific groups, agencies,
communities and other partners to use within their unique contexts.
“Volunteer” means a citizen who has demonstrated a
voluntary involvement in local activities serving in the interests of the
community.
349—1.5(28) Community empowerment central
office.
1.5(1) Structure. The office of empowerment shall be
established as a division of the department of management to provide a center
for facilitation, communication and coordination for the community empowerment
process, associated activities and funding.
1.5(2) Staff shall include a facilitator who is
appointed by the governor, subject to confirmation by the senate, and who serves
at the pleasure of the governor. A deputy and support staff may be designated.
Staff shall be provided by state agencies represented on the Iowa board and by
additional state agencies which make staff available.
1.5(3) Responsibility. The central office of
empowerment and state empowerment team shall:
a. Provide primary staffing to the Iowa board.
b. Coordinate state technical assistance activities.
c. Implement a technical assistance system. The technical
assistance system:
(1) Utilizes local representatives of state agencies
represented on the Iowa board.
(2) Utilizes other state agencies and individuals involved
with empowerment areas.
d. Communicate and coordinate functions.
e. Increase state– and local–level
collaboration.
f. Move authority and decision–making responsibility
from the state to communities.
g. Compile an annual report to the governor and general
assembly on Iowa board activity and policy development, state–level
indicators toward desired results and the empowerment area’s collaboration
process, local indicators and performance measures. The annual report will
include progress to avoid duplication, enhance efforts, combine planning and
best utilize identified funding to meet the needs of the children and their
families in the empowerment areas.
1.5(4) Technical assistance. Funds will be allocated
to support the central office of empowerment. Regional technical assistance
teams will be established and include staff from community colleges, area
education agencies and the Iowa State University of Science and Technology
cooperative extension service in agriculture and home economics and various
agencies.
a. Technical assistance shall be provided continuously as well
as upon request at the state and community level by the state empowerment team,
regional technical assistance teams, and appropriate local providers.
b. State or regional technical assistance may be provided,
upon request, to assist in the resolution of a disagreement arising in
empowerment areas or community boards.
349—1.6(28) Iowa board.
1.6(1) Membership. The Iowa board shall consist of 17
voting members: 13 citizen members and 4 state agency director members. Six
legislators shall serve as nonvoting members.
a. Four members shall be the directors, not the designees, of
the state agencies of education, human rights, human services and public
health.
b. The 13 citizen members shall be appointed by the governor,
subject to confirmation by the senate.
(1) Appointments of citizen members shall ensure that each of
the state’s congressional districts is represented by two citizen
members.
(2) Citizen members may be reimbursed for actual and necessary
expenses incurred in the performance of their duties, and paid a per diem as
stated in Iowa Code section 7E.6.
(3) Appointments shall reflect the ethnic, cultural, social,
and economic diversity of the state. The governor’s appoint–ees
shall be selected from individuals nominated by community boards.
(4) Appointments shall reflect the community board membership
of one or more members each representing education, health, human services,
business, faith, consumer and public interest.
c. Six legislators shall serve as nonvoting members of the
Iowa board.
(1) Three legislators shall be appointed by the speaker of the
house, with not more than two representing the same political affiliation,
following consultation with the majority and minority leaders.
(2) Three legislators shall be appointed by the majority
leader of the senate, with not more than two representing the same political
affiliation, following consultation with the president of the senate and the
minority leader of the senate.
(3) Legislative members are eligible for per diem and expenses
as provided in Iowa Code section 2.10.
1.6(2) Structure.
a. The Iowa board shall adopt bylaws to establish structure
and function.
(1) The chairperson shall be elected from the citizen
members.
(2) A simple majority of the voting membership shall
constitute a quorum.
(3) Terms of office of all citizen members are three
years.
(4) A vacancy on the board shall be filled in the same manner
as the original appointment for the balance of the term.
b. The Iowa board shall meet a minimum of four times during
the state fiscal year. Additional meetings may be called upon the request of
the chairperson or upon the call of a majority of the voting members.
1.6(3) Iowa board responsibility.
a. The Iowa board may designate an advisory council consisting
of representatives from community boards and persons knowledgeable or interested
in the fields of health, human services, education and early
childhood.
b. The Iowa board shall strive for coordination of services
for children and their families through a state and local community partnership.
c. The Iowa board shall provide for maximum flexibility and
creativity in the designation and administration of the responsibilities and
authority of community boards and empowerment areas.
d. The Iowa board shall adopt guidance for community
empowerment in Iowa. The guidance shall include at a minimum:
(1) The following state–level indicators are adopted and
indirectly quantify the achievement of the desired results.
1. Low birth weight;
2. Rate of immunization by age two;
3. Children entering kindergarten are ready for
school;
4. Incidence of child abuse;
5. Teen birth rate;
6. Serious crime;
7. Poverty level;
8. Employment rate;
9. Child abuse in a child care setting; and
10. Availability of child care.
(2) State–level indicators to be measured and available
each fiscal year as compared with a baseline and prior fiscal years, as data is
available.
(3) A process to request a plan of action from an empowerment
area regarding progress toward desired results.
(4) Guidelines for progress reports by empowerment areas,
including a process to report progress toward achieving results.
(5) Core functions for home visitation, parent support and
preschool services provided through the community plan.
e. The Iowa board shall annually submit results to the
governor and general assembly.
f. The Iowa board shall evaluate and determine empowerment
area requests for approval of revised local structure and boundaries.
g. The Iowa board shall develop guidelines for insurance or
other liability coverage of community boards.
h. The Iowa board shall, with extensive community input,
develop and annually update a five–year and a ten–year plan to
assist empowerment areas to reach collaboration and strive to align local assets
and resources to reach desired results. The annual plan update will be provided
each December to empowerment areas, the governor, and the general assembly.
i. The Iowa board shall identify bodies in state government
providing overlapping and similar purposes to the public in education, health,
and human service and make recommendations to the governor and general assembly
to increase alignment, coordination, consolidation or integration to achieve
desired results.
j. The Iowa board shall coordinate, consolidate, or integrate
community–level committees, coalitions, planning groups, and other bodies
with common purposes and memberships formed in response to state
requirements.
k. The Iowa board shall evaluate and respond to requests from
a community board for consolidation or integration to enhance reaching desired
results. In order to implement a waiver, the community boards will follow the
current waiver process as identified in administrative rules of each state
agency.
l. The Iowa board shall establish a process for
redes–ignation to occur every three fiscal years.
(1) The Iowa board determines the award of redesignation
status to an empowerment area.
(2) The community board evaluates:
1. Community plan;
2. Progress toward local indicators and performance
measures;
3. Collaboration process;
4. Management of empowerment funds; and
5. Local system development.
349—1.7(28) Empowerment area.
1.7(1) Structure. A large enough population and
geographic area exist to efficiently and effectively administer the
responsibilities and authority of the community board to enable citizens to lead
collaborative efforts involving education, health, and human services on behalf
of children, families and other citizens in the empowerment area.
a. A governing board is established to meet criteria for
membership and structure and to assume the responsibility of a community
board.
b. An empowerment area of a county or school district not
meeting required criteria may request an exception to policy from the Iowa
board.
1.7(2) Responsibility. An empowerment area is
established to enable local citizens to be involved and commit to reaching the
desired results for children and their families and to reaching the purpose of
community empowerment.
349—1.8(28) Community board.
1.8(1) Structure. A community board shall function as
the governing board for an empowerment area.
a. Empowerment area functions shall be performed under the
authority of a community board.
b. A community board is a unit of local government for
purposes of Iowa Code chapter 670, which relates to tort liability of
governmental subdivisions.
c. A majority of the members of a community board shall be
elected officials or citizens.
d. A community board shall have members to represent, at a
minimum, education, health, human services, citizens, elected officials, and
business, faith, consumer and public interest.
e. Each community board shall adopt bylaws that will, at a
minimum:
(1) Establish the function and structure for community
boards.
(2) Set the terms of office for three years, and the terms
shall be staggered.
(3) Provide for the election of a chairperson from citizens,
elected officials or volunteers.
f. A community board shall establish an organizational
structure to ensure that the local expertise, public will and continuous input
from the community are requested, reviewed and evaluated.
g. The meetings of a community board or any committee or other
body established by a community board at which public business is discussed or
formal action taken shall comply with the requirements of Iowa Code chapter 21
(open meetings).
h. A community board shall maintain its records in accordance
with Iowa Code chapter 22 (open records).
1.8(2) Responsibility.
a. A community board shall:
(1) Obtain extensive community input to develop a mission and
a vision for the empowerment area.
(2) Designate a fiscal agent from a public agency, a community
action agency, an area education agency or a nonprofit corporation.
(3) Administer, at a minimum, the community empowerment funds
from the state awarded for the empowerment area.
(4) Administer funds as provided by law or from other federal,
state, local, grant, foundation, or private moneys or other funds.
(5) Ensure that interest or earnings on the community
empowerment funds will be used for services in the community plan.
(6) Coordinate with the decategorization governing boards the
community plan and budget for the empower–ment geographic area.
(7) Develop and implement a community plan, with identified
priorities, based on community assessments which address human service,
education and health needs to support children and their families to reach
desired results.
(8) Ensure that an annual report for the empowerment area on
the effectiveness of the community plan is submitted each fiscal year to the
Iowa board and to local governing bodies in the empowerment area.
1. Complete a budget that identifies existing sources of
funding, including in kind and match, and how these funds may be coordinated
with the early childhood and school ready funds to support the community
plan.
2. Identify members of the community board, including each
member’s representation.
3. Identify local empowerment area indicators to assess the
effectiveness of the community plan.
4. Provide measures, data, facts and statistics, including
analysis, on progress of the community collaboration and the community
plan.
5. Include baseline data and the ensuing fiscal year’s
data for local indicators, identify priorities, link local indicators to desired
results, and report performance measures.
(9) Provide for staff to the empowerment area and community
board through the collaborative efforts of public and private organizations
committed to reaching desired results for children and their families.
(10) Develop a plan to sustain community efforts to support
children and their families within the empowerment area.
(11) Function as a coordinating body for collaboration and
alignment of services, which are offered by different entities and directed
toward similar purposes, within the empowerment area.
(12) Assume other responsibilities established by law or
administrative rule.
b. A community board may:
(1) Designate one or more committees for oversight of
empowerment funds awarded to the empowerment area.
(2) Develop, within the empowerment area, neighborhood bodies
for community–level input to the community board and implementation of the
community plan.
(3) Implement the Iowa board’s process to award funds at
the beginning of the fiscal year to service providers.
(4) Establish an advisory council with representatives from
the empowerment area to advocate, make recommendations, provide expertise,
suggest public policy, and provide guidance to the community board. The
community board may appoint an advisory council including members who are
professionals knowledgeable in the fields of health, human services, early care,
and education.
(5) Apply to the Iowa board or state agencies for waivers in
order to administer categorical funds for services provided in the empowerment
area which support the desired results for children and their families.
(6) By mutual written agreement between the community board,
the decategorization board, and the state department of human services, assume
the duties of the decategorization board or the decategorization board may serve
as a committee of the community board.
349—1.9(28) Iowa empowerment fund. An Iowa
empowerment fund is created in the state treasury as specified in Iowa Code
section 28.9. A school ready funding account is created in the Iowa empowerment
fund under the authority of the Iowa board to be administered by the director of
the department of education. Moneys credited to the account shall be
distributed by the department of education to designated empowerment areas
pursuant to criteria established by the Iowa board in accordance with law. An
early childhood funding account is created in the Iowa empowerment fund and
shall be distributed by the department of human services to designated
empowerment areas pursuant to criteria established by the Iowa board in
accordance with law. Interest or earnings on moneys deposited in the Iowa
empowerment fund shall be credited to the fund.
349—1.10(28) Iowa empowerment funds.
1.10(1) Purpose. The purpose of Iowa empowerment
funds is to:
a. Encourage early intellectual stimulation of very young
children;
b. Increase the basic skill levels of students entering
school;
c. Increase the health status of children;
d. Reduce the incidence of child abuse and neglect;
e. Increase the access of children to an adult
mentor;
f. Increase parents’ involvement with their
children;
g. Increase the quality and accessibility of child care and
preschool.
1.10(2) Criteria for the use of early childhood funds.
Use of early childhood funds is defined in department of human services
441—Chapter 169, Iowa Administrative Code.
1.10(3) Criteria for school ready funds. School ready
funds may be provided according to the community plan following community
assessment of assets, resources and needs and identification of
priorities.
a. Services, at a minimum in a community plan, may include,
but are not limited to:
(1) Child development services.
(2) Child care services.
(3) Child care provider training on a child’s early
learning experience.
(4) Children’s health and safety.
(5) Assessment services to identify chemically exposed infants
and children.
(6) Parent support and education.
(7) Preschool services for children at risk.
b. Up to 3 percent, not to exceed $60,000, of annual school
ready funds may be used by the community board for administrative costs and
other implementation expenses.
c. Empowerment areas are encouraged to commit 60 percent of
school ready funds to family home visitation and parent support based upon a
local community needs assessment.
d. Eligibility to receive school ready funds shall be limited
to designated empowerment areas.
e. School ready funds may be adjusted for other federal and
state grant moneys received by the empowerment area.
f. Distribution of school ready funds shall be in accordance
with directives in the current legislative appropriation of these
funds.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter
28.
ARC 1532B
GENERAL SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[401]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 18.3 and 18.4,
the Department of General Services hereby givesNotice of Intended Action to
adopt Chapter 12, “Purchasing Standards for Service Contracts,” Iowa
Administrative Code.
This proposed chapter is intended to establish a system of
uniform standards for purchasing services in state government. The Department
developed these uniform standards in cooperation with other state agencies as
provided for in Iowa Code section 18.3.
The rules in Chapter 12 describe procedures for service
contracting, including sole source procurement and emergency procurement,
previously governed by some portions of Procedures 240.101 and 240.102 of the
Department of Revenue and Finance Policy and Procedure Manual and include
definitions for key terms. The rules address when departments and
establishments must use a competitive bidding process to purchase services and
when they may use a sole source or emergency procurement instead of a
competitive bidding process. The rules include guidance to departments and
establishments about additional requirements and procedures they should follow
when purchasing services. The rules provide a mechanism that allows departments
and establishments to use an informal competitive process for purchases of
services with an annual value of less than $50,000 or an aggregate value of less
than $150,000.
Proposed Chapter 13, published herein as ARC 1531B,
addresses uniform terms and conditions for service contracts. Chapter 13 is
based on Iowa Code Supplement section 8.47, which utilizes the term
“department and establishment” as defined in Iowa Code section 8.2.
For consistency, this same definition is adopted in Chapter 12.
These rules contain a procedure allowing a department or
establishment to seek a waiver or variance from these rules upon a showing of
good cause.
Public comments concerning the proposed rules will be accepted
until 3:30 p.m. on April 24, 2002. Interested persons may submit written, oral
or electronic comments by contacting Patti Schroeder, Department of General
Services, Hoover State Office Building, Level A, Des Moines, Iowa
50319–0104; telephone (515)281–8384; fax (515)242–5974;
E–mail Patti.Schroeder@dgs.state.ia.us.
Also, there will be a public hearing on April 24, 2002, at 11
a.m. in the Director’s Conference Room, Department of General Services,
Hoover State Office Building, Level A, Des Moines, at which time persons may
present their views either orally or in writing. At the hearing, persons will
be asked to give their names and addresses for the record and confine their
remarks to the subject of the rules. Persons with special needs may contact the
Department prior to the hearing if accommodations need to be made.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code sections 18.3
and 18.4.
The following new chapter is proposed.
CHAPTER 12
PURCHASING STANDARDS
FOR SERVICE
CONTRACTS
401—12.1(18) Authority and scope. This chapter
is adopted for the purpose of establishing a system of uniform standards for
purchasing services in state government. The department of general services has
adopted these uniform standards in cooperation with other state agencies as
provided for in Iowa Code section 18.3.
The rules address when departments and establishments must use
competitive bidding to purchase services and when it is acceptable to use a sole
source or emergency procurement instead of a competitive bidding process. The
rules provide a mechanism that allows departments and establishments to use an
informal competitive process for purchases of services when the estimated annual
value of the contract is less than $50,000 and when the estimated value of the
multiyear contract in the aggregate, including renewals, is less than $150,000.
The rules also include guidance to departments and establishments about
additional requirements and procedures they should follow when purchasing
services.
401 IAC Chapter 13 addresses uniform terms and conditions for
service contracts in accordance with Iowa Code section 8.47, which utilizes the
term “department and establishment” as defined in Iowa Code section
8.2. This chapter adopts the same definition of “department and
establishment” for the purpose of consistency between this chapter and 401
IAC Chapter 13.
401—12.2(18) Applicability. This chapter shall
apply to all departments and establishments purchasing services, other than the
state board of regents, unless otherwise provided by law.
401—12.3(18) Definitions. For the purposes of
this chapter, the following definitions shall apply:
“Bidding documents” or “bid documents”
means documents prepared for a competitive selection by a department or
establishment to purchase services. Bidding documents may include requests for
proposal, invitations to bid, invitations to bid with best value considerations,
invitations to qualify, requests for strategy, auctions, reverse auctions,
negotiated bidding, or any other type of document a department or establishment
is authorized to use that is designed to advise service providers that a
department or establishment is interested in procuring services for state
government.
“Competitive selection” means a formal or informal
proc–ess engaged in by a department or establishment to compare prices,
terms, and conditions of equal or similar services in order to meet the
objective of purchasing services based on price, quality, performance, or any
combination thereof.
“Department and establishment” and
“department” or “establishment” mean any executive
department, commission, board, institution, bureau, office, or other agency of
the state government, including the state department of transportation, except
for funds which are required to match federal aid allotted to the state by the
federal government for highway special purposes, and except the courts, by
whatever name called, other than the legislature, that uses, expends or receives
any state funds.
“Duration” means the specific length of a service
contract.
“Emergency” includes, but is not limited
to, a condition:
1. That threatens public health, welfare or safety;
or
2. In which there is a need to protect the health, welfare or
safety of persons occupying or visiting a public improvement or property located
adjacent to the public improvement; or
3. In which the department or establishment must act to
preserve critical services or programs or in which the need is a result of
events or circumstances not reasonably foreseeable.
“Emergency procurement” means an acquisition of a
service or services resulting from an emergency need.
“Formal competition” means a competitive
selectionprocess that employs a request for proposal or other competitive
selection process authorized by applicable law resulting in a service
contract.
“Informal competition” means a streamlined
competitive selection process in which a department or establishment makes an
effort to contact at least three prospective service providers identified by the
purchasing department or establishment as qualified to perform the work
described in the scope of work to provide bids or proposals to provide the
services the department or establishment is seeking.
“Intergovernmental agreement” means an agreement
for services between a department or establishment and any other governmental
entity, department or establishment whether federal, state, or local and any
department, division, unit or subdivision thereof.
“Private agency” or “private agencies”
means an individual or any form of business organization authorized under the
laws of this or any other state or under the laws of any foreign
jurisdiction.
“Service” or “services” means work
performed for a department or establishment or for its clients by a service
provider and includes, but is not limited to:
1. Professional or technical expertise provided by a
consultant, advisor or other technical or service provider to accomplish a
specific study, review, project, task, or other work as described in the scope
of work. By way of example and not by limitation, these services may include
the following: accounting services; appraisal services; analysis and assessment
of processes, programs, fiscal impact compliance, systems and the like; auditing
services; communications services; services of peer reviewers, attorneys,
financial advisors, and expert witnesses for litigation; architectural services;
information technology consulting services; services of investment advisors and
managers; marketing services; policy development and recommendations; program
development; public involvement services and strategies; research services;
scientific and related technical services; software development and system
design; and the services of underwriters, physicians, pharmacists, engineers,
and architects; or
2. Services provided by a vendor to accomplish routine
functions. These services contribute to the day–to–day operations
of state government. By way of example and not by limitation, these services
may include the following: ambulance service; aerial surveys; aerial mapping and
seeding; charter service; boiler testing; bookkeeping service; building alarm
systems service and repair; commercial laundry service; communications systems
installation, servicing and repair; court reporting and transcription services;
engraving service; equipment or machine installation, preventive maintenance,
inspection, calibration and repair; heating ventilation and air conditioning
(HVAC) system maintenance service; janitorial service; painting; pest and weed
control service; grounds maintenance, mowing, parking lot sweeping and snow
removal service; towing service; translation services; and travel
service.
“Service contract” means a contract for a service
or services when the predominant factor, thrust, and purpose of the contract as
reasonably stated is for the provision or rendering of services. When there is
a contract for both goods and services and the predominant factor, thrust, and
purpose of the contract as reasonably stated is for the provision or rendering
of services with goods incidentally involved, a service contract exists and
these rules apply. “Service contract” includes grants when the
predominant factor, thrust, and purpose of the contract formalizing the grant is
for the provision or rendering of services.
“Service provider” means a vendor that enters into
a service contract with a department or establishment.
“Sole source procurement” means a purchase of
services in which the department or establishment selects a service provider
without engaging in a competitive selection proc–ess.
401—12.4(18) Intergovernmental agreements. In
the event another governmental entity has resources available to supply a
service sought by a department or establishment, the department or
establishment, to the extent practicable and when reasonably competitive with
the marketplace, may enter into an intergovernmental agreement with the other
governmental entity and is not required to use competitive selection. For the
purchase of services when the estimated annual value of the service contract is
equal to or greater than $5,000 or when the estimated value of the multiyear
service contract in the aggregate, including any renewals, is equal to or
greater than $15,000, a department or establishment shall include a survey of
pricing and other information in the contract file to establish that the service
was obtained for a price and of a quality that are reasonably competitive with
the marketplace. If the department or establishment determines that services
provided by another governmental entity are not reasonably competitive with the
marketplace, the department or establishment shall use competitive selection to
select a service provider unless another provision of law or an executive order
requires the department or establishment to purchase the services of the other
governmental entity.
401—12.5(18) Use of competitive selection.
Departments and establishments shall use competitive selection to acquire
services from private agencies when the estimated annual value of the service
contract is equal to or greater than $5,000 or when the estimated value of the
multiyear service contract in the aggregate, including any renewals, is equal to
or greater than $15,000 unless there is adequate justification for a sole source
or emergency procurement pursuant to rule 12.7(18) or 12.8(18) or another
provision of law.
12.5(1) When the estimated annual value of the service
contract is equal to or greater than $50,000 or the estimated value of the
multiyear service contract in the aggregate, including any renewals, exceeds
$150,000, a department or establishment shall use a formal competitive selection
process to procure the service.
12.5(2) When the estimated annual value of the service
contract is equal to or greater than $5,000 but less than $50,000 and the
estimated value of the multiyear service contract in the aggregate, including
any renewals, does not exceed $150,000, a department or establishment, in its
sole discretion, shall use either a formal or informal competitive selection
process to engage a service provider.
12.5(3) The requirement to use competitive selection
to select a service provider when the estimated annual value of the service
contract is equal to or greater than $5,000 or when the estimated value of the
multiyear service contract in the aggregate, including renewals, is equal to or
greater than $15,000 applies even when the department or establishment purchases
services from a private entity and designates the contract it enters into with
the private entity as a 28E agreement.
401—12.6 Reserved.
401—12.7(18) Sole source procurements.
12.7(1) When justified. A sole source procurement
shall be avoided unless clearly necessary and justifiable. A department or
establishment may purchase services using a sole source procurement under the
following circumstances:
a. A department or establishment determines that one service
provider is the only one qualified or eligible or is quite obviously the most
qualified or eligible to perform the service; or
b. The services being purchased involve work that is of such a
specialized nature or related to a specific geographic location that only a
single source, by virtue of experience, expertise, proximity to the project, or
ownership of intellectual property rights, could most satisfactorily provide the
service; or
c. A department or establishment is hiring a service provider
to provide peer review services for a professional licensing board pursuant to
Iowa Code chapter 272C; or
d. A department or establishment is hiring the services of
experts, advisors, counsel or consultants to assist in any type of legal
proceeding including but not limited to testifying or assisting in the
preparation of quasi–judicial or judicial proceedings; or
e. The federal government or other provider of funds for the
services being purchased (other than the state of Iowa) has imposed clear and
specific restrictions on the department’s or establishment’s use of
the funds in a way that restricts the department or establishment to only one
service provider; or
f. Applicable law requires, provides for, or permits use of a
sole source procurement.
12.7(2) Special procedures required for sole source
procurements.
a. When the annual value of the service contract exceeds
$5,000 or when the estimated value of the multiyear service contract in the
aggregate, including renewals, is equal to or greater than $15,000, the head of
a department or establishment or designee shall sign the sole source contract or
the amendment. Use of sole source procurement does not relieve a department or
establishment from negotiating a fair and reasonable price and thoroughly
documenting the procurement action.
b. When the annual value of the service contract exceeds
$5,000 or when the estimated value of the multiyear service contract in the
aggregate, including renewals, is equal to or greater than $15,000, a department
or establishment shall be required to complete a sole source justification form.
The director of the department or establishment shall sign the sole source
justification form. The claim for the first payment on a contract requires a
copy of the signed original contract, a copy of the precontract questionnaire, a
copy of the sole source justification form, and an original invoice or original
claimant signature.
c. The contract for the sole source procurement shall comply
with 401 IAC 13.4(8,18), uniform terms and conditions for service contracts, or
401 IAC 13.5(8,18), special terms and conditions.
401—12.8(18) Emergency procurements.
12.8(1) When justified. An emergency procurement
shall be limited in scope and duration to meet the emergency. When considering
the scope and duration of an emergency procurement, the department or
establishment may consider price and availability of the service procured so
that the department or establishment obtains the best value for the funds spent
under the circumstances. Departments or establishments should attempt to
acquire services, with as much competition as practicable under the
circumstances.
12.8(2) Special procedures required for emergency
procurements.
a. The head of a department or establishment shall sign all
emergency contracts and amendments regardless of value or length of term. If
the head of a department or establishment is not available, a designee may sign
an emergency contract or amendment. Use of an emergency procurement does not
relieve a department or establishment from negotiating a fair and reasonable
price and documenting the procurement action.
b. When the annual value of the service contract exceeds
$5,000 or when the estimated value of the multiyear service contract in the
aggregate, including renewals, is equal to or greater than $15,000, a department
or establishment shall be required to complete an emergency justification form.
The director of the department or establishment or the director’s designee
shall sign the emergency justification form.
c. If an emergency procurement results in the extension of an
existing contract that contains performance criteria, the contract extension
shall comply with 401 IAC 13.4(8,18), uniform terms and conditions for service
contracts, or 401 IAC 13.5(8,18), special terms and conditions.
401—12.9(18) Informal competitive
procedures.
12.9(1) When utilizing an informal competition as
defined in rule 12.3(18), the department or establishment may contact the
prospective service providers in person, by telephone, fax, E–mail or
letter. When the department or establishment is not able to locate three
prospective service providers, the department or establishment must justify
contacting fewer than three service providers. The justification shall be
included in the contract file.
12.9(2) A department or establishment may send copies
of the scope of work to service providers that it has identified as qualified to
perform the work described in the scope of work.
401—12.10 Reserved.
401—12.11(18) Duration of service
contracts.
12.11(1) Each service contract signed by a department
or an establishment shall have a specific starting and ending date.
12.11(2) Departments and establishments shall not sign
self–renewing service contracts that do not have a specific ending
date.
12.11(3) A service contract should be competitively
selected on a regular basis so that a department or establishment obtains the
best value for the funds spent, avoids inefficiencies, waste or duplication and
may take advantage of new innovations, ideas and technology. A service
contract, including all optional renewals, shall not exceed a term of six years
unless the department or establishment obtains a waiver of this provision
pursuant to 12.16(18).
401—12.12(18) Additional procedures or
requirements.
12.12(1) Departments and establishments, whether
utilizing informal or formal competition, shall provide a notice of each
procurement for services to the targeted small business Web page located at the
Iowa department of economic development in conformance with Iowa Code section
73.16(2).
12.12(2) Except in an emergency procurement, services
shall not be performed pursuant to a service contract for a department or
establishment until all parties to the contract have signed the
contract.
12.12(3) At the conclusion of the competitive
selection process, all service providers shall be required to sign a service
contract.
12.12(4) Each department or establishment shall
maintain a contracting file for each service contract signed by the department
or establishment.
401—12.13 and 12.14 Reserved.
401—12.15(18) Exclusions and
limitations.
12.15(1) These rules do not apply to contracts for
both goods and services when the predominant factor, thrust, and purpose of the
contract as reasonably stated is for the purchase of goods with service
incidentally involved. However, in no event shall departments and
establishments designate contracts as contracts for goods to avoid the
application of these rules.
12.15(2) Nothing in this chapter is intended to
supplant or supersede the requirements adopted by the department of revenue and
finance relating to the processing of claims. Departments or establishments
entering into personal services contracts should refer to procedure 240.102 of
the department of revenue and finance policy and procedure manual.
401—12.16(18) Waiver procedure.
12.16(1) For the purpose of this chapter, a
“waiver or variance” means an action by the director of the
department of general services that suspends, in whole or in part, the
requirements or provisions of a rule in this chapter as applied to a department
or establishment when the department or establishment establishes good cause for
a waiver or variance of the rule. For simplicity, the term “waiver”
shall include both a “waiver” and a
“variance.”
12.16(2) Requests for waivers. A department or
establishment seeking a waiver shall submit a written request for a waiver to
the director. The written request shall identify the rule for which the
department or establishment seeks a waiver, the contract or class of contracts
for which the department or establishment seeks a waiver, and the reasons that
the department or establishment believes justify granting the waiver.
12.16(3) Criteria for waiver. In response to a
request for a waiver submitted by a department or establishment, the director
may issue an order waiving in whole or in part the requirements of a rule in
this chapter if the director finds that the department or establishment has
established good cause for waiving the requirements of the rule. “Good
cause” includes, but is not limited to, a showing that a requirement or
provision of a rule should be waived because the requirement or provision would
likely result in an unintended, undesirable, or adverse consequence or outcome.
An example of good cause for a waiver is when a contract duration period of
longer than six years is more economically feasible than a six–year
contract in light of the service being purchased by the department or
establishment.
401—12.17(18) Effective date. This chapter
shall apply to service contracts with a starting date on or after October 1,
2002.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code sections 18.3
and 18.4.
ARC 1531B
GENERAL SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[401]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code Supplement section 8.47
and Iowa Code section 18.4, the Department of General Services hereby gives
Notice of Intended Action to adopt Chapter 13, “Uniform Terms and
Conditions for Service Contracts,” Iowa Administrative Code.
The purpose of this new chapter is to comply with Iowa Code
Supplement section 8.47 by providing (1) uniform terms and conditions that must
be included in service contracts entered into by agencies and (2) a mechanism
for agencies to seek approval to use in their service contracts special terms
and conditions that are not included in the rules as provided for in Iowa Code
Supplement section 8.47. The terms and conditions generally require agencies to
include performance criteria when executing service contracts. The rules
include definitions for key terms. Iowa Code Supplement section 8.47, which is
part of the Accountable Government Act relating to service contracts, and these
rules utilize the definition of “department and establishment” that
is found in Iowa Code chapter 8.
A mechanism for using special terms and conditions is included
in Iowa Code Supplement section 8.47(2). Consequently, the Department’s
waiver rule will not be available to departments or establishments seeking
waivers or variances from the provisions of these rules.
Public comments concerning the proposed rules will be accepted
until 3:30 p.m. on April 24, 2002. Interested persons may submit written, oral
or electronic comments by contacting Patti Schroeder, Department of General
Services, Hoover State Office Building, Level A, Des Moines, Iowa
50319–0104; telephone (515)281–8384; fax (515)242– 5974;
E–mail Patti.Schroeder@dgs.state.ia.us.
Also, there will be a public hearing on April 24, 2002,
beginning at 11 a.m. in the DGS Director’s Conference Room, Department of
General Services, Hoover State Office Building, Level A, at which time persons
may present their views either orally or in writing. At the hearing, persons
will be asked to give their names and addresses for the record and confine their
remarks to the subject of the rules. Persons with special needs may contact the
Department of General Services prior to the hearing if accommodations need to be
made.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code Supplement
section 8.47 and Iowa Code section 18.4.
The following new chapter is proposed.
CHAPTER 13
UNIFORM TERMS AND CONDITIONS
FOR SERVICE
CONTRACTS
401—13.1(8,18) Authority and scope. In
accordance with Iowa Code Supplement section 8.47, this chapter is adopted to
provide uniform terms and conditions for departments and establishments to use
in service contracts and to provide a mechanism for departments and
establishments to seek approval to use in their service contracts special terms
and conditions that are not included in this chapter as provided for in Iowa
Code Supplement section 8.47(2).
The terms and conditions generally require departments and
establishments to include performance criteria when executing service contracts.
Iowa Code Supplement section 8.47, which is part of the accountable government
Act relating to service contracts, and these rules utilize the definition of
“department and establishment” that is found in Iowa Code chapter
8.
401—13.2(8,18) Applicability. This chapter
shall apply to all departments and establishments purchasing services, other
than the state board of regents, unless otherwise provided by law.
401—13.3(8,18) Definitions. For the purposes of
this chapter, the following definitions shall apply:
“Department and establishment” and
“department” or “establishment” means any executive
department, commission, board, institution, bureau, office, or other agency of
the state government, including the state department of transportation, except
for funds which are required to match federal aid allotted to the state by the
federal government for highway special purposes, and except the courts, by
whatever name called, other than the legislature, that uses, expends or receives
any state funds.
“Efficiency measures” means unit cost or level of
productivity associated with a given activity, service or product.
“Input measures” means the amount of resources
invested, used or spent for activities, services or products.
“Outcome measures” means the quantifiable
expression of the effect on customers, clients, the environment, or
infrastructure that reflects the purpose of the activity, service or product
produced or provided.
“Output measures” means the number of activities,
services or products produced or provided.
“Performance measures” means measures that assess
an activity, service or product. Performance measures include quality, input,
output, efficiency, and outcome measures.
“Quality measures” means the quantifiable
expression of how well the activity, service or product was delivered, based on
characteristics determined to be important to the customers.
“Service” or “services” means work
performed for a department or establishment or for its clients by a service
provider and includes, but is not limited to:
1. Professional or technical expertise provided by a
consultant, advisor or other technical or service provider to accomplish a
specific study, review, project, task, or other work as described in the scope
of work. By way of example and not by limitation, these services may include
the following: accounting services; appraisal services; analysis and assessment
of processes, programs, fiscal impact compliance, systems and the like; auditing
services; communications services; services of peer reviewers, attorneys,
financial advisors, and expert witnesses for litigation; architectural services;
information technology consulting services; services of investment advisors and
managers; marketing services; policy development and recommendations; program
development; public involvement services and strategies; research services;
scientific and related technical services; software development and system
design; and services of underwriters, physicians, pharmacists, engineers, and
architects; or
2. Services provided by a vendor to accomplish routine
functions. These services contribute to the day–to–day operations
of state government. By way of example and not by limitation, these services
may include the following: ambulance service; aerial surveys; aerial mapping
and seeding; charter service; boiler testing; bookkeeping service; building
alarm systems service and repair; commercial laundry service; communications
systems installation, servicing and repair; court reporting and transcription
services; engraving service; equipment or machine installation, preventive
maintenance, inspection, calibration and repair; heating ventilation and air
conditioning (HVAC) system maintenance service; janitorial service; painting;
pest and weed control service; grounds maintenance, mowing, parking lot sweeping
and snow removal service; towing service; translation services; and travel
service.
“Service contract” means a contract for a service
or services when the predominant factor, thrust, and purpose of the contract as
reasonably stated is for the provision or rendering of services. When there is
a contract for both goods and services and the predominant factor, thrust and
purpose of the contract as reasonably stated is for the provision or rendering
of services with goods incidentally involved, a service contract exists and
these rules apply. “Service contract” includes grants when the
predominant factor, thrust, and purpose of the contract formalizing the grant is
for the provision or rendering of services.
“Service provider” means a vendor that enters into
a service contract with a department or establishment.
401—13.4(8,18) Uniform terms and conditions for
service contracts. All service contracts entered into by a department or
establishment shall include, at a minimum, the following terms:
13.4(1) Payment clause. The contract shall include a
clause or clauses describing the amount or basis for paying consideration to the
party based on the party’s performance under the service contract. The
payment clause(s) should be designed to work in harmony with any monitoring
clauses and any postcontract review procedures. All payment clauses shall be
consistent with Iowa Code section 421.40. The payment clause(s) should also be
designed to work in harmony with the outputs, outcomes or any combination
thereof desired by a department or establishment. Acceptable payment clauses
include the following:
a. A payment clause in which the department or establishment
describes the limit of the total fee to be paid, and the fee is divided between
a base fee and an at–risk fee. The base fee is the amount of fee the
service provider will earn for minimal performance in the completion of the
contract. The at–risk portion of the fee is the incremental fee the
service provider will earn as the service provider meets the performance
criteria identified in the contract. The amount of the fee in both instances
may be stated in terms of a percentage, an amount, or some other term.
Incentives and disincentives may be used to affect the payment of the base fee
and the at–risk portion of the fee. The amount of the incentive or
disincentive may be stated in terms of a percentage, an amount, or some other
term. The payment of the fee shall be based upon the outcomes or outputs
achieved or the performance criteria satisfied.
b. A payment clause based on meeting minimum requirements for
performance criteria, outcomes, or outputs with incentives and disincentives to
achieve other desired outcomes, outputs or performance criteria. The incentives
may be stated in terms of a percentage, a fixed amount, or some other term. Up
to 100 percent of the incentive may be placed at risk in order to meet or exceed
performance criteria or achieve desired outcomes or outputs. Disincentives may
be employed to achieve performance criteria or outcomes. Disincentives may be
stated in terms of a percentage, a fixed amount, or some other term.
Disincentives may include payments to the department or establishment for
performance failures up to 100 percent of the fee the service provider expects
to earn from performance of the contract.
c. A payment clause based on a straight contingency fee with
the entire fee at risk depending on outcomes or outputs achieved or performance
criteria satisfied.
d. A payment clause based on a base fee and an amount retained
by a department or establishment to ensure performance criteria described in the
contract are satisfied or outcomes are achieved or outputs are obtained. If the
vendor meets the performance criteria or outcomes or outputs, then a department
or establishment may pay some or all of the portions of the fee retained as an
incentive or disincentive and as provided for in the contract.
e. A payment clause based on a base fee and a contingency fee
depending on the outcomes achieved, outputs obtained, or performance criteria
satisfied. The base fee may be stated in terms of an hourly fee, a
fixed–price fee, or a not–to–exceed fee. The contingency fee
may be stated in terms of a percentage of a recovery.
f. Any other payment clause determined by the department or
establishment to be suitable and appropriate for the service contract that bases
the amount or basis for paying consideration to the service provider based on
the service provider’s performance under the service contract.
13.4(2) Monitoring clause. The contract shall include
a clause or clauses describing the methods to effectively oversee the
party’s compliance with the service contract by the department or
establishment receiving the services during performance, including the delivery
of invoices itemizing work performed under the service contract prior to
payment. Monitoring should be appropriate to the nature of the contract as
determined by the department or establishment. Acceptable methods of monitoring
may include:
a. One hundred percent inspection.
b. Random sampling.
c. Periodic inspection.
d. Customer input.
e. Invoices itemizing work performed.
f. A monitoring plan determined by the department or
establishment to be appropriate for purposes of the service contract and that
includes methods to effectively oversee the service provider’s compliance
with the service contract by the department or establishment.
13.4(3) Review clause. The contract shall include a
clause or clauses describing the methods to effectively review performance of a
service contract, including but not limited to performance measurements
developed pursuant to Iowa Code chapter 8E. The review clause for performance
may include:
a. Outcome measures.
b. Output measures.
c. Efficiency measures.
d. Quality measures.
e. A review plan determined by the department or establishment
to be appropriate for the purposes of the service contract and that includes
methods to effectively review performance of a service contract.
13.4(4) Other terms. The contract shall
include:
a. Where appropriate, a nonappropriation clause;
b. A clause describing the duration of the contract;
c. Clauses requiring the service provider to comply with all
applicable laws;
d. Where appropriate, an insurance clause;
e. A clause, exhibit, or other document that describes the
scope of services to be performed;
f. A termination clause;
g. A default clause, where appropriate;
h. An independent contractor clause;
i. Other clauses as deemed appropriate by the department or
establishment entering into a service contract.
401—13.5(8,18) Special terms and conditions.
Rule 401—13.4(8,18) does not apply to service contracts containing special
terms and conditions adopted by a department or establishment for use in its
service contracts with the approval of the department of management, in
cooperation with the office of the attorney general, the department of general
services, the department of personnel and the department of revenue and finance
as provided for in Iowa Code Supplement section 8.47(2).
401—13.6(8,18) Exclusions and
limitations.
13.6(1) These rules do not apply to contracts for both
goods and services when the predominant factor, thrust and purpose of the
contract as reasonably stated is for the purchase of goods with service
incidentally involved. However, in no event shall departments and
establishments designate contracts as contracts for goods to avoid the
application of these rules.
13.6(2) These rules do not apply to service contracts
utilizing funds that are required to match federal aid allotted to the state by
the federal government for highway special purposes.
13.6(3) These rules do not apply to service contracts
entered into as the result of an emergency procurement in accordance with 401
IAC 12.8(18), unless the emergency procurement results in the extension of an
existing contract that contains performance criteria.
401—13.7(8,18) Effective date. This chapter
shall apply to service contracts with a starting date on or after October 1,
2002.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code Supplement
section 8.47 and Iowa Code section 18.4.
ARC 1504B
HUMAN SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[441]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 239B.4, the
Department of Human Services proposes to amend Chapter 41, “Granting
Assistance,” and Chapter 93, “PROMISE JOBS Program,” appearing
in the Iowa Administrative Code.
These amendments eliminate “well–being”
visits currently required for families whose Family Investment Program
assistance has been canceled as a result of a participant’s choosing the
limited benefit plan for the second time. 2002 Iowa Acts, House File 2340,
terminates the Department’s contract with the Department of Public Health
for providing visits by qualified social service professionals. The legislation
provides that the Department may conduct these visits only if funding is
available. The Department no longer has the resources to support the cost of
these visits.
These amendments do not provide for waivers in specified
situations because a requirement is being eliminated and because of budget
constraints.
The substance of these amendments is also Adopted and Filed
Emergency and is published herein as ARC 1503B. The purpose of this
Notice is to solicit comment on that submission, the subject matter of which is
incorporated by reference.
Any interested person may make written comments on the
proposed amendments on or before April 24, 2002. Comments should be directed to
the Office of Policy Analysis, Department of Human Services, Hoover State Office
Building, 1305 East Walnut Street, Des Moines, Iowa 50319– 0114. Comments
may be sent by fax to (515) 281–4980 or by E–mail to
policyanalysis@dhs.state.ia.us.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
239B.9.
ARC 1518B
NATURAL RESOURCE
COMMISSION[571]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code subsection 455A.5(6),
the Natural Resource Commission hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to adopt
new Chapter 35, “Fish Habitat Promotion for County Conservation
Boards,” Iowa Administrative Code.
The 2001 General Assembly enacted the fish habitat fee for the
purpose of developing fish habitats. Not less than 50 percent of the revenue
collected is to be used by the Commission to enter into agreements with county
conservation boards. This proposed chapter allows the Department to distribute
fish habitat funds and enter into agreements with county conservation boards.
The rules were developed by a committee composed of Department’s Fisheries
Bureau staff and county conservation board directors.
Any interested person may make written suggestions or comments
on the proposed amendment on or before May 7, 2002. Such written materials
should be directed to Martin Konrad, Department of Natural Resources, Wallace
State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0034; fax (515)
281–6794. Persons who wish to convey their views orally should contact
the Fisheries Bureau at (515)281–6976 orat the Fisheries Bureau offices on
the fourth floor of theWallace State Office Building.
There will be a public hearing on May 7, 2002, at 2 p.m. in
the Fourth Floor East Conference Room of the Wallace State Office Building, at
which time persons may present their views either orally or in writing. At the
hearing, persons will be asked to give their names and addresses for the record
and to confine their remarks to the subject of the amendment.
Any persons who intend to attend the public hearing and have
special requirements such as those related to hearing or mobility impairments
should contact the Department and advise of specific needs.
This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code Supplement
section 483A.3A.
The following new chapter is proposed.
CHAPTER 35
FISH HABITAT PROMOTION
FOR COUNTY
CONSERVATION BOARDS
571—35.1(483A) Purpose and definitions. The
purpose of this chapter is to designate procedures for the allotment of fish
habitat revenue to county conservation boards. These funds shall be used
specifically to acquire from willing sellers whole or partial interest in land
for use as or protection of fish habitats and to develop and enhance fishable
waters and habitat areas. The department shall administer the fish habitat
funds for the purposes as stated in the law at both the state and county
levels.
The following definitions apply in these rules:
“Commission” means the natural resource
commission.
“County” means a county conservation
board.
“Department” means the department of natural
resources.
“Director” means the director of the department of
natural resources.
“District” means a county conservation
district.
571—35.2(483A) Availability of funds. Fish
habitat funds are dependent on sales. Revenues received by the department shall
determine the amount of moneys available at any time.
35.2(1) Local share. Funds available for county
conservation boards shall be specified in the department’s budget in
accordance with legislative appropriations. At least 50 percent of the fish
habitat revenue shall be apportioned to county conservation boards.
35.2(2) Distribution. After deduction of 5 percent to
be held for contingencies, the remaining local share shall be available on an
annual basis. The department shall divide fish habitat funds equally among the
districts. The districts shall have two years to obligate fish habitat funds
once the funds are made available. After two years, the department shall
apportion all unobligated funds equally among the districts.
571—35.3(483A) Program eligibility. All
counties are eligible to participate in this program.
571—35.4(483A) Eligibility for cost–sharing
assistance. A project shall not be eligible for cost sharing unless the
commission specifically approves the project or the applicant has received a
written waiver of retroactivity from the director prior to the project’s
initiation. A project shall not be eligible for cost sharing unless public
fishing is allowed; however, the review and selection committee as described in
35.6(1) may recommend for commission approval projects with restrictions on
boating.
35.4(1) Acquisition projects. A licensed
appraiser shall appraise lands or rights thereto to be acquired, and the
appraisal shall be approved by department staff. The appraisal requirement may
be waived when the staff determines that it is impractical for a specific
project. The cost share shall not be approved for more than 90 percent of the
approved appraised value. Acquisition projects are eligible for cost share
either by direct payment as described in subrule 35.11(6) or by reimbursement to
counties.
35.4(2) Eligible acquisition activities.
a. Acquisition for pond and lake construction.
b. Acquisition of fishable streams, ponds and lakes.
c. Acquisition for watershed protection.
35.4(3) Development projects. Eligible
expenditures for development projects shall include, but not be limited to,
preliminary expenses; contracts; the purchase of materials and supplies;
rentals; and extra labor that is hired only for the specific project. The
purchase of equipment is not an eligible expenditure. Donated labor, materials
and equipment–use and use of a county’s own labor and equipment are
not eligible for cost–share assistance. Development projects are limited
to lands legally controlled by the county for the expected life of the project.
Development projects are eligible only for reimbursement of reasonable costs
actually incurred and paid by the county.
35.4(4) Enhancement projects. For purposes of
this rule, “enhancement” shall be considered to be synonymous with
“development.” Eligible enhancement activities include:
a. Physical placement of fish habitats in ponds, lakes, pits
and streams.
b. Armoring of pond, lake, pit and stream shores.
c. Construction of aeration systems.
d. Dredging of ponds or lakes.
e. Construction of ponds and lakes.
f. Construction of sediment–retaining basins.
g. Repair of lake dam/outlets.
h. Manipulation of fish populations and aquatic
vegetation.
i. Removal of dams.
j. Construction of fish ladders.
k. Construction of fish barriers.
l. Construction of rock–faced jetties.
35.4(5) Project income. When, as a result of a
purchase agreement or other title transfer action involving cost sharing with
fish habitat funds, a county directly or indirectly receives financial income
that would have been paid to the previous landowner, 90 percent of that income
shall be transferred to the department unless the county has identified and
committed to habitat development projects or additional acquisitions on the
project site to be funded from the income received. The project review and
selection committee shall recommend, and the director and commission shall
approve, plans for the expenditure of income received pursuant to this subrule.
In the absence of acceptable fish habitat development or acquisition plans, the
county shall transfer to the department 90 percent of the income received as it
is received. The department shall credit that income to the county’s
apportionment of the fish habitat fund as described in 35.2(1). The schedule of
those reimbursements from a county to the state shall be included in the project
agreement.
571—35.5(483A) Application for assistance.
Applications must contain sufficient detail as to clearly describe the scope of
the project and how the area shall be managed.
35.5(1) Form. Applications must be submitted on forms
provided by the department.
35.5(2) Time of submission. Applications for funds
shall be reviewed and selected for funding during January of each year. The
district designee shall receive an original application and six copies in
acceptable form by the close of business on the last business day of November of
the previous year for consideration. The district shall forward a copy of all
applications to the department’s designee by December 15 of the previous
year. Upon timely notice to eligible recipients, additional selection periods
may be scheduled if necessary to expedite the distribution of funds. In
emergencies, a county may request a waiver so that an acquisition project may be
approved for retroactive payments if funds are available and the project meets
all other criteria.
35.5(3) Joint applications. Joint applications
are permitted. One county shall serve as the primary applicant. A joint
application shall clearly describe the respective share of project costs for
each county named. Any cooperative agreement between the counties named shall
be provided as a part of the application.
35.5(4) County funding. An applicant shall
certify that it has committed its share of project costs and that these funds
are available and shall state the means of providing for the county share. All
necessary approvals for acquisition and financing shall be included with the
application. All financial income received directly or indirectly that would
have been paid to the previous landowner as a result of a purchase agreement or
other title transfer action shall be completely documented in the
application.
35.5(5) Multiple development projects. An
application for development project assistance may include development on more
than one area if the development is of a like nature.
571—35.6(483A) Project review and
selection.
35.6(1) Review and selection committee. Each
district shall have a review and selection committee, hereinafter referred to as
the committee. Each committee shall be composed of least five county directors
or their designees. Each district’s committee shall determine which grant
applications and amendment requests shall be selected for funding. For advisory
purposes only, a department biologist or designee shall be present during review
and selection of grant applications and amendment requests.
35.6(2) Consideration withheld. The committee
shall not consider any application that on the date of the selection session is
incomplete or for which additional pertinent information has been requested but
not received.
35.6(3) Application rating system. The committee
shall apply a rating system to each grant application considered for fund
assistance. The department shall develop the rating system. The rating system
shall be used to rate each application, and those applications receiving the
highest ratings shall be selected for fund assistance to the extent of the
allotment for each annual period. If the amount of grant moneys available
exceeds that requested, applications shall be reviewed only to determine
eligibility.
571—35.7(483A) Commission review. The director
shall present the committees’ recommendations to the commission at its
next meeting following the rating of projects for funding. The commission may
approve or disapprove funding for any project on the list.
571—35.8(483A) Grant amendments. If funds are
available, projects for which grants have been approved may be amended to
increase or decrease project scope or to increase or decrease project costs and
fund assistance. The director shall approve project changes prior to their
inception. Amendments to increase project costs and fund assistance due to cost
overruns shall not be approved if funds have already been committed or the work
has already been performed.
571—35.9(483A) Timely commencement of projects.
Grant recipients are expected to carry out their projects in an expeditious
manner. A project for which a grant is approved shall be commenced within six
months of the date upon which the grantee is notified that the project is
approved, or at another date agreed upon by both parties. Failure to do so may
be cause for termination of the project and cancellation of the grant by the
commission.
571—35.10(483A) Project period. A project
period that is commensurate with the work to be accomplished shall be assigned
to each project. Extensions shall be granted only in case of extenuating
circumstances.
571—35.11(483A) Payments.
35.11(1) Grant amount. Grant recipients shall
be paid 90 percent of all eligible costs incurred on a project up to the amount
of the grant unless otherwise specified in the project agreement.
35.11(2) Project billings. Grant recipients
shall submit billings for reimbursement or cost sharing on forms provided by the
commission.
35.11(3) Project billing frequency. Project billings
shall be submitted on the following basis:
a. Up to $10,000 total project cost—one
billing.
b. Over $10,000 total project cost—no more than two
billings.
35.11(4) Documentation. Grant recipients shall
provide documentation to substantiate all costs incurred on a project as
required by the department.
35.11(5) Development projects. Eighty percent
of the approved local share may be paid to the county when requested, but not
earlier than start–up of the project. The department, pending successful
completion and final inspection of the project, shall withhold 20 percent of the
local share until any irregularities discovered as a result of a final site
inspection have been resolved.
35.11(6) Acquisition projects. The department may
make payment directly to a property seller pursuant to the following
criteria:
a. The county requests direct payment in the project
application and shows good cause for such procedure.
b. The seller provides to the county a marketable fee simple
title, free and clear of all liens and encumbrances or material objections at
the time of payment; and
c. Sufficient program funds are available at the time of
transfer.
571—35.12(483A) Record keeping and retention. A
grant recipient shall keep adequate records relating to its administration of a
project, particularly relating to all incurred costs and direct or indirect
income that normally would have been paid to the previous landowner resulting
from a purchase agreement or other title transfer action. A copy of the
county’s audits showing such income and disbursements for the grant period
shall be submitted to the department’s budget and grant bureau. These
records shall be available for audit by appropriate personnel of the department
and the state auditor’s office. All records shall be retained in
accordance with state law.
571—35.13(483A) Penalties. Whenever any real or
personal property acquired or developed with fish habitat fund assistance passes
from the control of the grantee or is used for other purposes that conflict with
the project purpose, it shall be considered an unlawful use of the funds. The
department shall notify the county of any such violation.
35.13(1) Remedy. Funds thus used unlawfully shall be
returned to the department for inclusion in the fish habitat fund, or local,
non–cost–shared funds shall be used to acquire a replacement
property of equal value at current market prices and with commensurate benefits
to fish. The replacement property must be approved by the commission. The
county shall have a period of two years after notification by the department in
which to correct the unlawful use of funds. The remedies provided by this
subrule are in addition to others provided by law.
35.13(2) Land disposal. Whenever it has been
determined and agreed upon by the grantee and the commission that land acquired
or developed with fish habitat fund assistance is no longer of value for the
project purpose or that the county has other good cause, the commission may
authorize that the land be disposed of and the proceeds thereof used to acquire
or develop an area of equal value or that 90 percent of the proceeds be returned
to the state for inclusion in the fish habitat fund.
35.13(3) Ineligibility. If the department determines
that a county has unlawfully used fish habitat funds, the county shall be
ineligible for further assistance until the matter has been resolved to the
satisfaction of the commission.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code Supplement
section 483A.3A.
ARC 1517B
NATURAL RESOURCE
COMMISSION[571]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code subsection 456A.24(5),
the Natural Resource Commission hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend
Chapter 71, “Nursery Stock Sale to the Public,” Iowa Administrative
Code.
This amendment will increase the price of nursery stock sold
to the public and allow stock to be provided to schools and conservation groups
for special events. The price increase is needed to ensure that nursery stock
sales cover future production costs and promote conservation plantings. Prices
have not been increased since 1999.
Any interested person may make written suggestions or comments
on the proposed amendment on or before April 23, 2002. Such written materials
should be directed to Jerry Kemperman, Department of Natural Resources, Wallace
State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0034; fax
(515)281–6794. Persons who wish to convey their views orally should
contact the Forestry Bureau at (515)281–5441 or at the Forestry Bureau
offices on the fourth floor of the Wallace State Office Building.
There will be a public hearing on April 23, 2002, at 1 p.m. in
the Fourth Floor East Conference Room of the Wallace State Office Building, at
which time persons may present their views either orally or in writing. At the
hearing, persons will be asked to give their names and addresses for the record
and to confine their remarks to the subject of the amendment.
Any persons who intend to attend the public hearing and have
special requirements such as those related to hearing or mobility impairments
should contact the Department of Natural Resources and advise of specific
needs.
This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code sections
456A.20 and 456A.24.
The following amendment is proposed.
Amend rule 571—71.3(456A,461A) as follows:
571—71.3(456A,461A) Nursery stock
prices.
71.3(1) Prices for hardwoods and
shrubs shall be as follows:
a. Hardwoods and shrubs,
17” and
larger—$40 per hundred plants.
b. Hardwoods and shrubs,
10” to
16”—$35
per hundred plants.
a. Oak, hickory, walnut, pecan and basswood,
6” to
16”—$40 per hundred
plants.
b. Oak, hickory, walnut, pecan and basswood,
17” and larger—$45 per
hundred plants.
c. Other hardwood tree species,
6” to
16”—$37 per hundred
plants.
d. Other hardwood tree species,
17” and larger—$42 per
hundred plants.
71.3(2) Prices for shrubs shall be as
follows:
a. Elderberry, buttonbush, dogwood, and Nanking cherry,
6” to
16”—$37 per hundred
plants.
b. Elderberry, buttonbush, dogwood, and Nanking cherry,
17” and larger—$42 per
hundred plants.
c. Other shrub species,
6” to
16”—$40 per hundred
plants.
d. Other shrub species,
17” and larger—$45 per
hun–dred plants.
71.3(2) (3) Prices for
conifers shall be $20 per hundred plants. be as
follows:
a. Conifers,
6” to
16”—$25 per hundred
plants.
b. Conifers,
17” and larger—$30 per
hundred plants.
71.3(3) (4) Prices for
wildlife packets shall be $65 90 each.
71.3(4) (5) Prices for
songbird packets shall be $20 each.
71.3(5) (6) Prices for walnut
seed shall be $3 per pound.
71.3(7) For promotion of conservation
plantings, nursery stock may be provided to schools and conservation and
education groups to use for Arbor Day and other special events.
ARC 1519B
PERSONNEL
DEPARTMENT[581]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of 2001 Iowa Acts, Second
Extraordinary Session, chapter 5, and Iowa Code section 19A.9, the Department of
Personnel hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend Chapter 1,
“Definitions,” and Chapter 4, “Pay,” Iowa Administrative
Code.
The proposed amendments implement the Department’s
mandatory rule–making obligation under Iowa Code section 19A.9(19) to
promulgate rules providing “for the development and operation of programs
to improve the work effectiveness and morale of employees in the executive
branch, excluding employees of the state board of regents, including training,
safety, health, welfare, counseling, recreation, and employee relations.”
A waiver provision is not included in these rules because, pursuant to rule
581—33.12(17A,19A, 97B), numbered paragraph “6,” rules
governing separation shall not be waived. Allowance of a waiver of the rules in
Chapter 4 would not promote a uniform and consistent proc–ess for
separations, nor ensure a uniform and consistent application of these
rules.
A public hearing on these proposed amendments is scheduled for
9 a.m., on April 29, 2002, in the Grimes North Conference Room, Grimes State
Office Building, First Floor, East 14th and Grand, Des Moines, Iowa.
Persons wishing to comment on the proposed amendments may
present their views at the public hearing orally or in writing. At the hearing,
persons wishing to comment will be asked to provide their names and addresses
for the record and to confine their remarks to the subject of the proposed
amendments. Individuals who wish to make oral presentations at the public
hearing may contact the Departmental Rules Coordinator, Iowa Department of
Personnel, Grimes State Office Building, East 14th and Grand, Des Moines, Iowa
50319–0150, or at (515)281–4168, or by E–mail at
mike.prey@idop.state.ia.us prior to the public hearing.
Any interested person may make written comments or suggestions
concerning the proposed amendments before 4:30 p.m. on April 29, 2002. Written
comments or suggestions should be addressed to Michael Prey, Department of
Personnel, Grimes State Office Building, East 14th and Grand, Des Moines, Iowa
50319–0150, or at (515)281–4168, or by E–mail at
mike.prey@idop.state.ia.us.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter
19A.
The following amendments are proposed.
ITEM 1. Amend rule
581—1.1(19A) by adopting the following new definition
in alphabetical order:
“Permanent employment” means any period of
full–time or part–time executive branch service (except board of
regents employment) in a nontemporary position for which the person is eligible
to accrue leave and participate in the health and dental insurance programs
administered by the department pursuant to 581 IAC 15.1(19A) or
15.2(19A).
ITEM 2. Adopt new rule
581—4.12(19A) as follows:
581—4.12(19A) Years of service incentive
program. This termination incentive program is provided for
in 2001 Iowa Acts, Second Extraordinary Session, chapter 5. To be eligible to
participate in this program, an employee must have completed at least ten years
of credited service as of the date of termination of employment.
4.12(1) Definitions. For purposes of this
program:
“Credited service” means service in a retirement
system as defined in Iowa Code sections 97B.1A and 97A.1, including
buy–back or buy–in service. Length of credited service shall be as
calculated by the respective retirement system, pursuant to each system’s
respective rules and regulations.
“Employee” means an employee of the executive
branch of state government, including an employee of a judicial district of the
department of corrections or the department of justice. However,
“employee” does not mean an employee of the state board of regents
or an elected official.
“Employer” means a department, agency, board, or
commission within the executive branch of state government.
“Participant” means an eligible employee selected
by the employer who agrees to participation, who is approved for participation,
and who receives a termination incentive.
“Program” means the years of service incentive
program established in 2001 Iowa Acts, Second Extraordinary Session, chapter 5,
section 1.
“Regular annual salary” means (1) for
full–time employees, an employee’s regular biweekly salary on the
date of termination, multiplied by 26; or (2) for part–time employees, the
cumulative salary received by the employee during the 26 pay periods immediately
prior to submission of the employer’s business plan.
“Termination incentive” means an amount equal to
the lesser of $250 for every quarter year of credited service of the eligible
employee or the regular annual salary of the eligible employee.
4.12(2) As a condition of participation in this
program, participating employees shall, in writing, on forms developed by the
department:
a. Waive all rights to file suit against the state of Iowa,
including all state departments, agencies, and other subdivisions, based on
state or federal claims arising out of the employment relationship;
b. Acknowledge that, as a participant in the program, the
employee waives any right to accept permanent employment with the state of Iowa
other than as an elected official or as an employee of the state board of
regents;
c. Agree to separate from employment with the state by the
date agreed upon by the eligible employee and the employer, consistent with the
approved business plan.
4.12(3) Prior to offering this incentive program to
eligible employees, the employer must receive approval from the department and
from the department of management. The employer shall submit a business plan,
on forms developed by the department, at least 75 days prior to the expected
employment termination date. The business plan must justify the offer of the
incentive to the proposed participants. The business plan must
include:
a. The name(s) of each proposed participant, including the
length of credited service to confirm eligibility;
b. The projected dollar savings to be achieved during the
current fiscal year;
c. The specific resources or programs the employer seeks to
manage differently through the use of the program and how the impacted
resources or programs will be affected; and
d. The proposed date(s) by which the employer expects to fill
the position(s) vacated by the eligible participant(s).
4.12(4) If a business plan is approved, the employer
may offer the eligible participant(s), in writing, the opportunity to
participate in the program. The employer may rescind an offer to participate in
the program at any time prior to an eligible employee’s acceptance of a
written offer to participate in the program. The written notice shall
include:
a. A date by which the offer must be accepted or
rejected;
b. A proposed date for termination of the participant’s
employment; and
c. A written release and acknowledgment signed by the
participant agreeing to participate in the program.
4.12(5) Participants in the program shall receive,
upon termination, a lump sum termination incentive as described in 581 IAC
4.12(1).
ITEM 3. Adopt new rule
581—4.13(19A) as follows:
581—4.13(19A) Appeals. Appeal of the
application of these rules must be filed as a grievance pursuant to 581 IAC
12.1(19A). The appeal procedures for grievance decisions as addressed in 581
IAC 12.2(19A) must be exhausted prior to a petition for judicial
review.
ARC 1491B
PERSONNEL
DEPARTMENT[581]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 97B.15, the
Department of Personnel hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend Chapter
21, “Iowa Public Employees’ Retirement System,” Iowa
Administrative Code.
The proposed amendment is intended to replace rule
581—21.33(17A,97B) regarding the transition benefits advisory committee,
effective July 1, 2001, with a new rule regarding the permanent benefits
advisory committee (BAC), effective July 3, 2002. The BAC shall be an advisory
committee that serves as a channel for employers and employees to help formulate
policies and recommendations regarding the provision of benefits and services to
members of the system.
This amendment is not subject to requests for waivers and is
intended to fully implement the statutory language calling for the creation of a
permanent benefits advisory committee as required in 2001 Iowa Acts, chapter 68,
sections 13, 20 and 24.
Any interested person may make written suggestions or comments
on the proposed amendment on or before April 23, 2002. Such written suggestions
or comments should be directed to the IPERS Administrative Rules
Coordinator,IPERS, 7401 Register Drive, P.O. Box 9117, Des Moines, Iowa
50306–9117. Persons who wish to present their comments orally may contact
the IPERS Administrative Rules Coordinator at (515)281–0089 or
(800)622–3849, ext. 10089. Comments may also be submitted by fax to (515)
281–0045, or by E–mail to www.ipers.info.
There will be a public hearing on April 23, 2002, at 9 a.m. at
IPERS, 7401 Register Drive, Des Moines, Iowa, at which time persons may present
their views either orally or in writing. At the hearing, persons will be asked
to give their names and addresses for the record and to confine their remarks to
the subject of the proposed amendment.
This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code chapter 97B
and 2001 Iowa Acts, chapter 68, sections 13, 20, and 24.
The following amendment is proposed.
Rescind rule 581—21.33(17A,97B) and adopt the following
new rule in lieu thereof:
581—21.33(17A,97B) Benefits advisory
committee.
21.33(1) Scope. This rule shall govern the
conduct of business by the IPERS’ benefits advisory committee
(BAC).
21.33(2) Purpose. The BAC shall be an advisory
committee that serves as a channel for employers and employees to help formulate
policies and recommendations regarding the provision of benefits and services to
members of the system.
21.33(3) Membership.
a. Initial BAC. The initial BAC shall be composed of 14
representatives. Thirteen of these representatives shall be the appointees of
the following organizations forming the transition BAC created July 1, 2001:
the Iowa State Education Association, the Iowa Association of Community College
Trustees, the School Administrators of Iowa, the Iowa Association of School
Boards, the Retired School Personnel Association, the State Police Officers
Council, the department of personnel (which shall be represented by its
director), the IPERS’ Improvement Association, the American Federation of
State, County, and Municipal Employees, the Iowa State Sheriffs’ and
Deputies’ Association, the Iowa State Association of Counties, the Iowa
League of Cities, and the Iowa Association of Chiefs of Police and Peace
Officers.
In addition, there shall be a citizen representative who has
substantial pension benefits experience and who is not a member of
IPERS.
b. Appointment of BAC representatives. Each member
organization shall appoint a representative to serve onthe BAC. The
citizen representative shall be elected by the eight voting representatives who
serve under paragraphs 21.33(5)“a” and “b.” Member
organizations and the citizen representative shall provide in writing to the
chairperson the name, address, and telephone number of and other information
about the representative as required by the chairperson. The BAC shall not
entertain petitions disputing an organization’s choice of its
representative.
c. Attendance. Any representative shall be deemed to have
submitted a resignation from participation in the BAC if either of the following
events occurs:
(1) The representative does not attend three or more
consecutive regularly scheduled meetings.
(2) The representative attends fewer than one–half of
the regularly scheduled meetings of the BAC each fiscal year.
This provision applies only to a period beginning on or after
the date when the person assumes the position of representative. In the event
that a representative is deemed to have resigned under this provision, the
chairperson shall immediately notify the representative’s organization and
require the appointment of a different representative within 30 days.
If a representative is unable to attend a meeting, an
alternate may attend the meeting, but shall not be able to cast a vote.
Attendance by an alternate shall not relieve the regular representative of the
responsibility of attendance at regularly scheduled meetings.
21.33(4) Replacement or expansion of membership
organizations. A membership organization must be a unit of the executive branch
or a formally organized corporation or association representing a viable and
identifiable group of covered employers or covered employees as determined by
the BAC in its sole discretion.
An organization that wishes to replace an existing membership
organization may petition the BAC at any time to do so. If the BAC determines
that there are two organizations that meet the foregoing requirements and
purport to represent the same group of covered employers or employees, the board
seat shall be awarded to the organization representing the largest number of
employer or employee constituents, as applicable.
An organization that would qualify as a membership
organization under this subrule may also, in lieu of replacing an existing
membership organization, petition the BAC to increase the number of membership
organizations listed in subrule 21.33(3) to include that organization.
This subrule shall not be construed to affect the board
positions reserved for the director of the department of personnel or the
position reserved for a citizen who has substantial pension benefits experience
and who is not a member of IPERS.
21.33(5) Voting representatives. The BAC shall have
nine voting representatives. Four shall represent employers, four shall
represent active and retired members of the system, and one shall be a citizen
who has substantial pension benefits experience and who is not a member of
IPERS.
a. Employer constituent group representatives. One
representative shall be the director of the department of personnel. The
remaining representatives of employer constituent groups shall be elected by the
full membership of the BAC as follows: one shall be a representative of a
constituent group representing cities, one shall be a representative of a
constituent group representing counties, and one shall be a representative of a
constituent group representing local school districts.
b. Member constituent group representatives. One
representative shall be elected by the full membership of the BAC as a
representative of a constituent group that represents teachers. The other three
voting representatives of active and retired members shall be elected by the
remaining BAC representatives not automatically selected by virtue of legally
mandated seats or designated as voting members by the full membership of the BAC
under paragraph “a” or this paragraph. No more than one of these
voting members shall be the representative of a constituent group that solely
represents the public safety protection classes.
c. Voting rights. No member organization shall be permitted
to designate a substitute voting representative to cast the vote of a member
organization at a meeting in the event that the named representative cannot
attend the meeting. No member organization shall have more than one vote on a
matter brought before the BAC.
d. Terms of voting representatives. The term of each voting
representative shall be three years, except as otherwise indicated in this
paragraph.
The terms of the voting representatives shall be staggered, so
as to maintain an acceptable level of continuity and experience on the BAC.
Accordingly, the terms of voting representatives chosen to begin July 1, 2002,
shall be set as follows: The voting representatives shall draw lots to
determine the length of their terms of office. Two shall serve for one year,
three shall serve for two years, and two shall serve for three years. This
formula recognizes that two voting representatives, the director of the
department of personnel and the citizen representative, are required by law to
be voting members. At the expiration of the one–, two– or
three–year term, the voting representative elected to fill that position
shall serve for a three–year term.
If a voting representative resigns or is replaced by the
appointing organization, the appointing organization shall appoint a successor
who shall be a voting member for the remainder of the term in
question.
If an organization that is not currently a membership
organization successfully petitions to replace a membership organization that is
represented by a voting representative, the representative of the replacement
membership organization shall complete the remainder of the term of the voting
representative in question.
21.33(6) Duties. The BAC shall review and
advise on the following matters insofar as they impact benefits and services
provided to members and member employers under Iowa Code chapter 97B: overall
plan design, benefits policy and goals, budget, benchmarking and quality
assessment efforts, research and strategic planning. Through its voting
representatives, the BAC shall make recommendations to the system, the governor
and the general assembly about said programs, benefits and services. The BAC
shall also participate in annual performance evaluations of the chief benefits
officer and, when that position becomes vacant, assist the chief executive
officer in the process of defining and selecting a replacement. In addition,
the BAC shall recommend to the governor at least two nominees for each vacant
position on the investment board reserved for active or retired members of the
system. The chairperson of the BAC shall solicit nominations for such vacancies
from the entire BAC membership and, through a meeting of the BAC, select the
names to be forwarded to the governor.
At least every two years, beginning in the 2003 fiscal year,
the BAC shall review the benefits and services provided to members; and the
voting representatives shall make recommendations to the system, the governor,
and the general assembly concerning the benefits and services provided to
members and the system’s benefits policies and benefits goals. All of the
membership of the BAC, including nonvoting representatives, may have input into
formulating such recommendations.
21.33(7) Time and place of meetings. The BAC
shall meet at least bimonthly, at the call of the chairperson, upon the written
request by the chief benefits officer, or upon written request of a majority of
the BAC representatives. The chairperson shall establish the dates of all
regularly scheduled meetings and provide, with reasonable effort, at least one
month’s notice of those meeting dates, locations, and agenda.
a. Call of the chairperson. The chairperson shall notify the
BAC representatives of the date, time, and location of each meeting and state
the agenda.
b. Request for meetings by the chief benefits officer. The
chairperson shall schedule a meeting upon the receipt of a written request from
the chief benefits officer. The request shall state the reason for the meeting
and the proposed agenda.
c. Requests for meetings by the BAC. The chairperson shall
schedule a meeting upon the receipt of a written request from a majority of the
BAC representatives. The request shall state the reason for the meeting and the
proposed agenda.
d. Place of meetings. Meetings of the BAC will generally be
held at the IPERS Building, 7401 Register Drive, Des Moines, Iowa. The BAC may
meet at other locations. The meeting place and time will be specified in the
agenda.
21.33(8) Notice of meetings.
a. Form of notice. Notice of meetings is given by the posting
and distributing of the agenda. The agenda lists the time, date, place, and
topics to be discussed at the meeting.
b. Posting of agenda. The agenda for each meeting will be
posted at IPERS’ main office.
c. Distribution of agenda. An agenda shall be provided to
each BAC representative and to anyone who files a request with the chairperson.
The request should state whether the agenda for a particular meeting is desired
or whether the agendas for all meetings are desired.
d. Amendments to agenda. After an agenda has been posted and
distributed pursuant to 21.33(8)“b” and “c,” any
amendments to the agenda will be posted, but not distributed. The amended
agenda will be posted at least 24 hours prior to the meeting unless, for good
cause, notice is impossible or impractical, in which case, as much notice as is
reasonably possible will be given.
e. Supporting material. Written materials provided to the BAC
with the agenda may be examined and copied. Copies of the materials may be
distributed at the discretion of the chairperson to persons requesting the
materials. The chairperson may require a fee to cover the reasonable cost to
the agency to provide the copies.
21.33(9) Attendance and participation by the
public.
a. Attendance. All meetings of the BAC are open to the public
and shall be held in accordance with Robert’s Rules of Order, Revised
Edition. The BAC may exclude the public from portions of the meeting in
accordance with Iowa Code section 21.5.
b. Participation.
(1) Items on agenda. Persons who wish to address the BAC on a
matter on the agenda should notify the chairperson at least three days before
the meeting. Presentations to the BAC may be made at the discretion of the
chairperson.
(2) Items not on agenda. Iowa Code section 21.4 requires the
BAC to give notice of its proposed agenda. Therefore, the BAC discourages
persons from raising matters not on the agenda. Persons who wish to address the
BAC on a matter not on the agenda should file a request with the chairperson to
place the matter on the agenda of a subsequent meeting.
c. Coverage by press. Cameras and recording devices may be
used during meetings provided they do not interfere with the orderly conduct of
the meeting. The chairperson may order that the use of these devices be
discontinued if they cause interference and may exclude those persons who fail
to comply with that order.
21.33(10) Quorum and voting requirements.
a. Quorum. A majority of the voting representatives of the
BAC constitutes a quorum.
b. Majority voting. A quorum of the BAC must be present at
the time any vote is taken. In order for a motion to pass or for the BAC to
conduct business, a majority of the full voting membership must vote in favor of
the motion or other business matter.
c. Voting procedures. The chairperson shall rule as to
whether the vote will be by voice or roll call. A roll call vote shall be taken
anytime a voice vote is not unanimous. Minutes of the BAC shall indicate the
vote of each voting member if a roll call is taken.
21.33(11) Minutes, transcripts and recording of
meetings.
a. Recordings. The chairperson shall record by mechanized
means each meeting and shall retain the recording for at least one year.
Recordings of closed sessions shall be sealed and retained at least one
year.
b. Transcripts. Transcripts of meetings will not routinely be
prepared. The chairperson will have transcripts prepared upon receipt of a
request for a transcript and payment of a fee to cover its cost.
c. Minutes. The chairperson shall record minutes of each
meeting. Minutes shall be reviewed, approved, and maintained by the BAC. The
chairperson shall sign the approved minutes.
21.33(12) Officers and election.
a. Officers. The officers of the BAC are the chairperson and
vice chairperson and shall be elected by a vote of the full membership of the
BAC.
b. Elections. Election of officers shall take place at
the first BAC meeting held on or after July 1, 2002. If an officer does not
serve out the elected term, a special election shall be held at the first
meeting after notice is provided to the BAC to elect a representative to serve
out the remainder of the term.
21.33(13) Expenses. Expenses of BAC
representatives shall be reimbursed in accordance with 2001 Iowa Acts, chapter
68, section 13.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code chapter 97B and
2001 Iowa Acts, chapter 68, sections 13, 20, and 24.
ARC 1510B
PROFESSIONAL LICENSURE
DIVISION[645]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 147.76, the
Board of Dietetic Examiners hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to
rescind Chapter 79, “Board of Dietetic Examiners”; renumber Chapter
80, “Licensure of Dietitians,” as Chapter 81 and adopt new Chapter
80, “Administrative and Regulatory Authority for the Board of Dietetic
Examiners”; renumber Chapter 81, “Continuing Education for
Dietitians,” as Chapter 82; amend renumbered Chapters 81 and 82; and
renumber Chapter 82, “Discipline for Dietitians,” and Chapter 83,
“Fees,” as Chapters 83 and 84, Iowa Administrative Code.
The proposed amendments rescind the current rules about the
organization and purpose of the Board and adopt new rules about the purpose of
the Board, organization and proceedings of the Board, official communication,
office hours, and public meetings. The amendments also move definitions
specific to the practice of dietetics and rules concerning nutrition care and
the professional principles of dietetic practitioners from rescinded Chapter 79
to renumbered Chapter 81 and change the biennial continuing education compliance
period to begin on the sixteenth day of the licensee’s birth
month.
Any interested person may make written comments on the
proposed amendments no later than April 23, 2002, addressed to Ella Mae Baird,
Professional Licensure Division, Department of Public Health, Lucas State Office
Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0075.
These rules were revised in accordance with Executive Order
Number 8. Staff and Board members had input on these rules. Decisions were
made based on need, clarity, intent and statutory authority, cost and
fairness.
A public hearing will be held on April 23, 2002, from 9 to 11
a.m. in the Fifth Floor Board Conference Room, Lucas State Office Building, at
which time persons may present their views either orally or in writing. At the
hearing, persons will be asked to give their names and addresses for the record
and to confine their remarks to the subject of the proposed
amendments.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
147.76 and chapters 17A, 152A and 272C.
The following amendments are proposed.
ITEM 1. Rescind and reserve
645—Chapter 79.
ITEM 2. Renumber 645—Chapter
80 to 645—Chapter 83 as 645—Chapter 81 to
645—Chapter 84 and adopt the following new
chapter:
CHAPTER 80
ADMINISTRATIVE AND REGULATORY AUTHORITY
FOR
THE BOARD OF DIETETIC EXAMINERS
645—80.1(17A,152A) Definitions.
“Board” means the board of dietetic
examiners.
“Board office” means the office of the
administrative staff.
“Department” means the department of public
health.
“Disciplinary proceeding” means any proceeding
under the authority of the board pursuant to which licensee discipline may be
imposed.
“License” means a license to practice
dietetics.
“Licensee” means a person licensed to practice as
a dietitian.
645—80.2(17A) Purpose of board. The purpose of
the board is to administer and enforce the provisions of Iowa Code chapters 17A,
147, 152A, and 272C with regard to the practice of dietetics. The mission of
the board is to protect the public health, safety and welfare by licensing
qualified individuals who provide services to consumers and by fair and
consistent enforcement of the statutes and the rules of the licensure board.
Responsibilities include, but are not limited to:
80.2(1) Licensing of qualified applicants to practice
dietetics, through examination, renewal, endorsement, and reciprocity.
80.2(2) Developing and administering a program of
continuing education to ensure continued competency of individuals licensed by
the board.
80.2(3) Imposing discipline on licensees as provided
by statute or rule.
645—80.3(17A,152A,272C) Organization of board and
proceedings.
80.3(1) The board is composed of five members
appointed by the governor and confirmed by the senate.
80.3(2) The members of the board shall include one
licensed dietitian representing the approved or accredited dietetic education
programs, one licensed dietitian representing clinical dietetics in hospitals,
one licensed dietitian representing community nutrition services and two members
who are not licensed dietitians and who shall represent the general
public.
80.3(3) The board shall elect a chairperson, vice
chairperson and a secretary from its membership at the first meeting after April
30 of each year.
80.3(4) The board shall hold at least one meeting
annually.
80.3(5) A majority of the members of the board shall
constitute a quorum.
80.3(6) Board meetings shall be governed in accordance
with Iowa Code chapter 21, and the board’s proceedings shall be conducted
in accordance with Robert’s Rules of Order, Revised.
80.3(7) The division of professional licensure shall
furnish the board with the necessary facilities and employees to perform the
duties required by this chapter, but shall be reimbursed for all costs incurred
from funds appropriated to the board.
80.3(8) The board has the authority
to:
a. Develop and implement a program of continuing education to
ensure continued competency of individuals licensed by the board.
b. Establish fees.
c. Establish committees of the board, the members of which
shall be appointed by the board chairperson and shall not constitute a quorum of
the board. The board chairperson shall appoint committee
chairpersons.
d. Hold a closed session if the board votes to do so in a
public roll–call vote with an affirmative vote of at least
two–thirds if the total board is present or a unanimous vote if fewer are
present. The board will recognize the appropriate statute allowing for a closed
session when voting to go into closed session. The board shall keep minutes of
all discussion, persons present, and action occurring at a closed session and
shall tape–record the proceedings. The records shall be stored securely
in the board office and shall not be made available for public
inspection.
e. Investigate alleged violations of statutes or rules that
relate to the practice of dietetics upon receipt of a complaint or upon the
board’s own initiation. The investigation will be based on information or
evidence received by the board.
f. Initiate and impose licensee discipline.
g. Monitor licenses that are restricted by a board
order.
645—80.4(17A) Official communications.
80.4(1) All official communications, including
submissions and requests, may be addressed to the Board of Dietetic Examiners,
Professional Licensure Division, Fifth Floor, Lucas State Office Building, Des
Moines, Iowa 50319–0075.
80.4(2) Notice of change of address. Each licensee
shall notify the board in writing of a change of the licensee’s current
mailing address within 30 days after the change of address occurs.
645—80.5(17A) Office hours. The board office is
open for public business from 8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday to Friday of each
week, except holidays.
645—80.6(17A) Public meetings. Members of the
public may be present during board meetings unless the board votes to hold a
closed session. Dates and location of board meetings may be obtained from the
board’s Web site (http://www. idph.state.ia.us/licensure) or
directly from the board office.
80.6(1) At every regularly scheduled board meeting,
time will be designated for public comment. During the public comment period,
any person may speak for up to two minutes. Requests to speak for two minutes
per person later in the meeting when a particular topic comes before the board
should be made at the time of the public comment period and will be granted at
the discretion of the chairperson. No more than ten minutes will be allotted
for public comment at any one time unless the chairperson indicates
otherwise.
80.6(2) Persons who have not asked to address the
board during the public comment period may raise their hands to be recognized by
the chairperson. Acknowledgment and an opportunity to speak will be at the
discretion of the chairperson.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code chapters 17A,
152A and 272C.
ITEM 3. Amend renumbered rule
645—81.1(152A) by adopting the following new
definitions in alphabetical order:
“Dietetics” means the integration and application
of principles derived from the sciences of nutrition, biochemistry, physiology,
food management and from behavioral and social sciences to achieve and maintain
people’s health.
“Nutrition assessment” means the evaluation of the
nutrition needs of individuals and groups based upon appropriate biochemical,
anthropometric, physical, and dietary data to determine nutrient needs and to
recommend appropriate nutrition intake, including enteral and parenteral
nutrition.
“Nutrition counseling” means advising and
assisting individuals or groups about appropriate nutrition intake by
integrating information from the nutrition assessment with information about
food and other sources of nutrients and meal preparation consistent with
cultural background and socioeconomic status.
“Registered dietitian” means a dietitian who has
met the standards and qualifications of the Commission on Dietetic Registration,
a member of the National Commission for Health Certifying Agencies.
ITEM 4. Amend renumbered
645—Chapter 81 by renumbering rules 645—81.2(152A) to
645—81.11(272C) as 645—81.4(152A) to 645—81.13(272C) and adopt
the following new rules:
645—81.2(152A) Nutrition care. The primary
function of dietetic practice is the provision of nutrition care services that
shall include:
1. Assessing the nutrition needs of individuals and groups and
determining resources and constraints in the practice setting.
2. Establishing priorities, goals, and objectives that meet
nutrition needs and are consistent with available resources and
constraints.
3. Providing nutrition counseling concerning health and
disease.
4. Developing, implementing, and managing nutrition care
systems.
5. Evaluating, making changes in, and maintaining appropriate
standards of quality in food and nutrition services.
645—81.3(152A,272C) Principles. The dietetic
practitioner shall:
1. Provide professional services with objectivity and with
respect for the unique needs and values of individuals.
2. Avoid discrimination against other individuals on the basis
of race, creed, religion, sex, age, and national origin.
3. Fulfill professional commitments in good faith.
4. Conduct oneself with honesty, integrity, and
fairness.
5. Remain free of conflict of interest while fulfilling the
objectives and maintaining the integrity of the dietetic profession.
6. Maintain confidentiality of information.
7. Practice dietetics based on scientific principles and
current information.
8. Assume responsibility and accountability for personal
competence in practice.
9. Recognize and exercise professional judgment within the
limits of qualifications and seek counsel or make referrals as
appropriate.
10. Provide sufficient information to enable clients to make
their own informed decisions.
11. Inform the public and colleagues by using factual
information and shall not advertise in a false or misleading manner.
12. Promote or endorse products in a manner that is neither
false nor misleading.
13. Permit the use of the practitioner’s name for the
purpose of certifying that dietetic services have been rendered only after
having provided those services or supervised the provision of those
services.
14. Accurately present professional qualifications and
credentials.
15. Present substantiated information and interpret
controversial information without personal bias, recognizing that legitimate
differences of opinion exist.
16. Make all reasonable efforts to avoid bias in any kind of
professional evaluation and provide objective evaluation of candidates for
professional association membership, awards, scholarships, or job
advancements.
ITEM 5. Amend renumbered subrule 82.2(1)
as follows:
82.2(1) The biennial continuing education compliance
period shall extend for a two–year period beginning on the
fifteenth sixteenth day of the licensee’s birth
month and ending on the fifteenth day of the birth month two years later. Each
biennium, each person who is licensed to practice as a dietitian in this state
shall be required to complete a minimum of 30 hours of continuing education
approved by the board.
ARC 1509B
PROFESSIONAL LICENSURE
DIVISION[645]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 147.76, the
Board of Examiners for Speech Pathologists and Audiologists hereby gives
Notice of Intended Action to rescind Chapter 299, “Board of Speech
Pathology and Audiology Examiners,” and adopt new Chapter 299,
“Administrative and Regulatory Authority for the Board of Speech
Pathologists and Audiologists”; amend Chapter 300, “Licensure of
Speech Pathologists and Audiologists”; rescind Chapter 301,
“Disciplinary Procedures for Speech Pathologists and Audiologists”;
and amend Chapter 303, “Continuing Education for Speech Pathologists and
Audiologists,” Iowa Administrative Code.
The proposed amendments rescind the current rules about the
organization and purpose of the Board and adopt new rules on the purpose of the
Board, organization and proceedings of the Board, official communication, office
hours, and public meetings; add definitions for “audiologist” and
“speech pathologist” to the licensure chapter; and amend subrule
303.2(1) to allow continuing education credit earned between September 1, 2001,
and December 31, 2001, to be used for either the compliance period ending
December 31, 2001, or the following biennial compliance period.
Any interested person may make written comments on the
proposed amendments no later than April 23, 2002, addressed to Ella Mae Baird,
Professional Licensure Division, Department of Public Health, Lucas State Office
Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0075.
These rules were revised in accordance with Executive Order
Number 8. Staff and board members had input on these rules. Decisions were
made based on need, clarity, intent and statutory authority, cost and
fairness.
A public hearing will be held on April 23, 2002, from 9 to 11
a.m. in the Fifth Floor Board Conference Room, Lucas State Office Building, at
which time persons may present their views either orally or in writing. At the
hearing, persons will be asked to give their names and addresses for the record
and to confine their remarks to the subject of the proposed
amendments.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
147.76 and chapters 17A, 147 and 272C.
The following amendments are proposed.
ITEM 1. Rescind 645—Chapter 299 and
adopt the following new chapter in lieu thereof:
CHAPTER 299
ADMINISTRATIVE AND REGULATORY AUTHORITY FOR
THE BOARD OF SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY EXAMINERS
645—299.1(17A,147) Definitions.
“Board” means the board of speech pathology and
audiology examiners.
“Board office” means the office of the
administrative staff.
“Department” means the department of public
health.
“Disciplinary proceeding” means any proceeding
under the authority of the board pursuant to which licensee discipline may be
imposed.
“License” means a license to practice as a speech
pathologist or audiologist.
“Licensee” means a person licensed to practice as
a speech pathologist or audiologist in the state of Iowa.
645—299.2(17A) Purpose of board. The purpose of
the board is to administer and enforce the provisions of Iowa Code chapters 17A,
147, and 272C with regard to the practice of speech pathology and audiology.
The mission of the board is to protect the public health, safety and welfare by
licensing qualified individuals who provide services to consumers and by fair
and consistent enforcement of the statutes and rules of the licensure board.
Responsibilities include, but are not limited to:
1. Licensing qualified applicants by examination, renewal,
endorsement, and reciprocity to practice speech pathology or
audiology.
2. Developing and administering a program of continuing
education to ensure continued competency of individuals licensed by the
board.
3. Imposing discipline on licensees as provided by statute or
rule.
645—299.3(17A,272C) Organization of board and
proceedings.
299.3(1) The board is composed of seven members
appointed by the governor and confirmed by the senate.
299.3(2) The members of the board shall include five
members licensed to practice speech pathology or audiology, at least two of whom
shall be licensed to practice speech pathology and at least two of whom shall be
licensed to practice audiology, and two members who are not licensed to practice
speech pathology or audiology and who shall represent the general
public.
299.3(3) The board shall elect a chairperson, vice
chairperson and secretary from its membership at the first meeting after April
30 of each year.
299.3(4) The board shall hold at least four meetings
annually.
299.3(5) A majority of the members of the board shall
constitute a quorum.
299.3(6) Board meetings shall be governed in
accordance with Iowa Code chapter 21, and the board’s proceedings shall be
conducted in accordance with Robert’s Rules of Order, Revised.
299.3(7) The professional licensure division shall
furnish the board with the necessary facilities and employees to perform the
duties required by this chapter, but shall be reimbursed for all costs incurred
from funds appropriated to the board.
299.3(8) The board has the authority to:
a. Develop and implement a program of continuing education to
ensure continued competency of individuals licensed by the board.
b. Establish fees.
c. Establish committees of the board, the members of which
shall be appointed by the board chairperson and shall not constitute a quorum of
the board. The board chairperson shall appoint committee
chairpersons.
d. Hold a closed session if the board votes to do so in a
public roll–call vote with an affirmative vote of at least
two–thirds if the total board is present or a unanimous vote if fewer are
present. The board will recognize the appropriate statute allowing for a closed
session when voting to go into closed session. The board shall keep minutes of
all discussion, persons present, and action occurring at a closed session and
shall tape–record the proceedings. The records shall be stored securely
in the board office and shall not be made available for public
inspection.
e. Investigate alleged violations of statutes or rules that
relate to the practice of speech pathology and audiology upon receipt of a
complaint or upon the board’s own initiative. The investigation will be
based on information or evidence received by the board.
f. Initiate and impose licensee discipline.
g. Monitor licenses that are restricted by a board
order.
645—299.4(17A) Official communication.
299.4(1) All official communication, including
submissions and requests, may be addressed to the Board of Speech Pathology and
Audiology Examiners, Professional Licensure Division, Fifth Floor, Lucas State
Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0075.
299.4(2) Notice of change of address. Each licensee
shall notify the board in writing of a change of the licensee’s current
mailing address within 30 days after the change of address occurs.
645—299.5(17A) Office hours. The board office
is open for public business from 8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday of
each week, except holidays.
645—299.6(17A) Public meetings. Members of the
public may be present during board meetings unless the board votes to hold a
closed session. Dates and location of board meetings may be obtained from the
board’s Web site (http://www. idph.state.ia.us/licensure) or
directly from the board office.
299.6(1) At every regularly scheduled board meeting,
time will be designated for public comment. During the public comment period,
any person may speak for up to two minutes. Requests to speak for two minutes
per person later in the meeting when a particular topic comes before the board
should be made at the time of the public comment period and will be granted at
the discretion of the chairperson. No more than ten minutes will be allotted to
public comment at any one time unless the chairperson indicates
otherwise.
299.6(2) Persons who have not asked to address the
board during the public comment period may raise their hands to be recognized by
the chairperson. Acknowledgment and an opportunity to speak will be at the
discretion of the chairperson.
645—299.7(147) Hearing tests supervised by a
physician. For those persons conducting hearing tests under the direct
supervision of a licensed physician and surgeon or licensed osteopathic
physician and surgeon and functioning under Iowa Code section 147.152(1),
“direct supervision” means the physician must order the hearing test
performed on each individual patient and maintain control over the reading of
the results. The person working under direct supervision of a physician must be
able to show that the person did so at the direction of the physician and did
nothing more than perform the hearing test. Direct supervision by a physician
means the person conducting the hearing test does so in the usual
location in which the physician performs medical services and sees patients.
The physician must be readily available to respond to a request by a patient or
the person conducting the hearing test.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code chapters 17A
and 147.
ITEM 2. Amend rule
645—300.1(147) by adopting the following new
definitions in alphabetical order:
“Audiologist” means a person who engages in
the application of principles, methods and procedures for measurement, testing,
evaluation, prediction, consultation, counseling, instruction, habilitation,
rehabilitation, or remediation related to disorders of hearing and associated
communication disorders for the purpose of nonmedically evaluating, identifying,
preventing, ameliorating, modifying, or remediating such disorders and
conditions in individuals or groups of individuals, including the determination
and use of appropriate amplification.
“Speech pathologist” means a person who engages in
the application of principles, methods, and procedures for the measurement,
testing, evaluation, prediction, consultation, counseling, instruction,
habilitation, rehabilitation, or remediation related to the development and
disorders of speech, fluency, voice, or language for the purpose of nonmedically
evaluating, preventing, ameliorating, modifying, or remediating such disorders
and conditions in individuals or groups of individuals.
ITEM 3. Rescind and reserve
645—Chapter 301.
ITEM 4. Amend subrule 303.2(1) as
follows:
303.2(1) The biennial continuing education compliance
period shall extend for a two–year period between January 1 of each
even–numbered year and December 31 of each odd–numbered year. Each
biennium, each person who is licensed to practice as a speech pathology or
audiology licensee in this state shall be required to complete a minimum of 30
hours of continuing education approved by the board. Continuing education
credit earned from September 1, 2001, through December 31, 2001, may be used for
either the compliance period ending December 31, 2001, or the following biennial
compliance period. The licensee may use the earned continuing education credit
hours only once. Credit may not be duplicated for both compliance periods.
A person holding licensure in both speech pathology and audiology must meet the
requirements for each profession.
ARC 1495B
PROFESSIONAL LICENSURE
DIVISION[645]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 147.76, the
Board of Physician Assistant Examiners hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to
rescind Chapter 325, “Physician Assistants,” and adopt new Chapter
325, “Board of Physician Assistant Examiners,” Chapter 326,
“Licensure of Physician Assistants,” and Chapter 327,
“Practice of Physician Assistants”; amend Chapter 328,
“Continuing Education for Physician Assistants”; and adopt new
Chapter 329, “Discipline for Physician Assistants,” and Chapter 330,
“Fees,” Iowa Administrative Code.
The proposed amendments rescind the current rules regarding
licensing and fees and adopt new chapters for Board administration, licensure,
practice, discipline and fees.
The Division revised these rules in accordance with Executive
Order Number 8. The Physician Assistants Review Group, required by Iowa Code
section 148C.7 and consisting of members from the Board of Physician Assistant
Examiners and the Medical Examiners Board, met and approved these
rules.
Any interested person may make written comments on the
proposed amendments no later than April 23, 2002, addressed to Ella Mae Baird,
Professional Licensure Division, Department of Public Health, Lucas State Office
Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0075.
A public hearing will be held April 23, 2002, from 9 to 11
a.m. in the Fifth Floor Board Conference Room, Lucas State Office Building, at
which time persons may present their views either orally or in writing. At the
hearing, persons will be asked to give their names and addresses for the record
and to confine their remarks to the subject of the proposed
amendments.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
147.76 and chapters 148C and 272C.
The following amendments are proposed.
ITEM 1. Rescind 645—Chapter 325 and
adopt the following new chapter in lieu thereof:
CHAPTER 325
BOARD OF PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT
EXAMINERS
645—325.1(148C) General definitions.
“Board” means the board of physician assistant
examiners.
“Department” means the department of public
health.
645—325.2(148C) Availability of
information.
325.2(1) All information regarding rules, forms, time
and place of meetings, minutes of meetings, record of hearings, and examination
results are available to the public between the hours of 8 a.m. and 4:30 p.m.,
Monday through Friday, except holidays.
325.2(2) Information may be obtained by writing to the
Board of Physician Assistant Examiners, Iowa Department of Public Health, Lucas
State Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319–0075. All official
correspondence shall be in writing and directed to the board at this
address.
645—325.3(148C) Organization and
proceedings.
325.3(1) The purpose of the board of physician
assistant examiners is to administer and enforce the provisions of Iowa Code
chapters 147 and 148C, with regard to the registration and licensure of
physician assistants to practice under the supervision of a physician or
physicians, granting licensure for physician assistants including approval of
the plan for supervision of the physician assistant by the physician and the
description of how the physician assistant is to function within the
physician’s scope of practice, investigating violations and infractions
involving the practice of physician assistants, and revoking, suspending or
otherwise disciplining a physician assistant who has violated the provisions of
the practice of physician assistants.
325.3(2) The board is comprised of three members
licensed to practice as physician assistants, one member licensed to practice
medicine and surgery who supervises a physician assistant, one member licensed
to practice osteopathic medicine and surgery who supervises a physician
assistant, and two members from the general public. The members are appointed
by the governor and confirmed by the senate. The term of office is for three
years. A member may not serve more than three terms or nine years.
325.3(3) Duties of the board include:
a. The board is a policy–making body relative to matters
involving physician assistant education.
b. The board conducts business according to established policy
as approved by the members.
c. The board organizes annually and elects a chairperson, vice
chairperson and secretary from its membership. These members comprise the
executive committee of the board.
d. The chairperson, with direction from the executive
committee, shall appoint members to the review group and other organizational
committees that are necessary to assist in accomplishing the board’s
duties.
e. The board governs its proceedings by Robert’s Rules
of Order, Revised. A majority of the members of the board shall constitute a
quorum. Official action requires a majority vote of the quorum.
325.3(4) The board has statutory authority
to:
a. Administer and enforce the laws and administrative rules
relating to the registration and licensure to practice as a physician
assistant;
b. Review or investigate, or both, upon written complaint or
upon its own motion pursuant to other evidence received by the board, alleged
acts or omissions which the board reasonably believes constitute cause under
applicable law or administrative rule for licensee discipline;
c. Determine in any case whether an investigation, or further
investigation, or a disciplinary proceeding is warranted;
d. Initiate and prosecute disciplinary proceedings;
e. Impose licensee discipline;
f. Petition the district court for enforcement of its
authority with respect to licensees or with respect to other persons violating
the laws which the board is charged with administering;
g. Establish and register peer review committees;
h. Refer to a registered peer review committee for
investigation, review, and report to the board any complaint or other evidence
of an act or omission which the board reasonably believes constitutes cause for
licensee discipline;
i. Determine and administer registration and licensure
renewals;
j. Establish and administer rules for continuing education
requirements as a condition for renewal of licenses.
325.3(5) Meetings. The board will meet as
often as necessary to carry out statutory responsibilities. Information
concerning the dates and locations for meetings may be obtained from the board
office.
325.3(6) Public meetings. All meetings of the
board shall be open and public, and all citizens of Iowa shall be permitted to
attend any meeting, except as otherwise provided by statute.
325.3(7) Promulgation of administrative
rules.
a. The board is responsible for the promulgation, amendment
and repeal of administrative rules relating to the practice of physician
assistants, in accordance with Iowa Code chapter 17A.
b. The review group as specified in Iowa Code section 148C.7
shall review and approve or disapprove rules proposed for adoption by the board
of physician assistant examiners. A rule shall not become effective without the
approval of a simple majority of the review group.
c. Proposed rules shall be designed to encourage the
utilization of physician assistants in a manner that is consistent with the
provision of quality health care and medical services for the citizens of Iowa
through better utilization of available physicians and the development of sound
programs for the education and training of skilled physician assistants well
qualified to assist physicians in providing health care and medical
services.
325.3(8) Petition to promulgate, amend, or repeal a
rule.
a. An interested person or other legal entity may petition the
board requesting the promulgation, amendment or repeal of a rule.
b. The petition shall be in writing, signed by or on
behalf of the petitioner and shall contain a detailed statement of:
(1) The rule that the petitioner is requesting that the board
promulgate, amend or repeal. When amendment of an existing rule is sought, the
rule shall be set forth in full with the matter proposed to be deleted enclosed
in brackets and proposed additions shown by underlining or boldface.
(2) Facts in sufficient detail to show the reasons for the
proposed action.
(3) All propositions of law to be asserted by
petitioner.
c. The petition shall be in typewritten or printed form,
captioned “BEFORE THE IOWA BOARD OF PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT EXAMINERS”
and shall be deemed filed when received by the board office.
d. Upon receipt of the petition, the board staff
shall:
(1) Within 20 days, mail a copy of the petition to any parties
named therein. The petition shall be deemed served on the date of mailing to
the last–known address of the party being served.
(2) Advise the petitioner that the petitioner has 30 days to
submit written views. At the board chairperson’s direction, the board
staff may schedule oral presentation of petitioner’s view.
e. The review group shall review and approve or
disapprove the proposed rules or amendments prior to the board’s final
decision to deny the petition or to initiate rule–making
proceedings.
f. The petitioner will be notified, within 60 days after the
date of submission of the petition, of the board’s decision to deny the
petition or to initiate rule–making proceedings in accordance with Iowa
Code chapter 17A.
325.3(9) Declaratory rulings. Upon petition
filed by any individual, partnership, corporation, association, governmental
subdivision, private or public organization or state agency, the board may issue
a declaratory ruling as to the applicability of statutes and rules, policy
statements, decisions and orders under its jurisdiction.
a. A petition for a declaratory ruling shall be typewritten or
printed and at the top of the first page the words “PETITION FOR
DECLARATORY RULING BEFORE THE BOARD OF PHYSICIAN ASSISTANT EXAMINERS”
shall appear.
b. The petition shall include the name and official title, if
any, address and telephone number of each petitioner. If the request is at the
request of an entity mentioned in this subrule, it shall name the
entity.
c. The body of the petition shall contain:
(1) A detailed statement of facts upon which petitioner
requests that the board issue a declaratory ruling;
(2) The statute, rule, policy statement, decision or order for
which a ruling is sought;
(3) The exact words, passages, sentences or paragraphs which
are the subject of inquiry;
(4) The specific questions presented for declaratory ruling;
and
(5) A consecutive numbering of each multiple issue presented
for declaratory ruling.
d. The petition shall be filed either by serving it personally
at the board office or by mailing it to the Board of Physician Assistant
Examiners, Professional Licensure Division, Lucas State Office Building, Des
Moines, Iowa 50319–0075.
e. The board chairperson shall acknowledge receipt of
petitions or, at the direction of the board, return petitions not in substantial
conformity with these rules.
f. The board may decline to issue a declaratory ruling for any
of the following reasons:
(1) A lack of jurisdiction;
(2) A lack of clarity of the issue presented;
(3) The issue or issues presented are pending resolution by a
court of Iowa or by the attorney general;
(4) The issues presented have been resolved by a change in
circumstances or by other reasons;
(5) The issues are under investigation for the purpose of
formal adjudication;
(6) The petition does not comply with the requirements imposed
by 325.3(9)“c”; or
(7) When a ruling would necessarily determine the legal rights
of other parties not represented in the proceeding.
g. In the event the board declines to make a ruling, the board
chairperson shall notify the petitioner(s) of this fact and the reasons for the
refusal.
h. When the petition is in proper form and has not been
declined, the board shall issue a ruling disposing of the petition within a
reasonable time after its filing.
i. Rulings shall be mailed to petitioners and to other parties
at the discretion of the board chairperson.
j. Rulings shall be indexed and available for public
inspection.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code chapters 17A
and 148C.
ITEM 2. Adopt new
645—Chapter 326 as follows:
CHAPTER 326
LICENSURE OF PHYSICIAN ASSISTANTS
645—326.1(148C) Definitions.
“Approved program” means a program for the
education of physician assistants which has been accredited by the Committee on
Allied Health Education and Accreditation, the Commission on Accreditation of
Allied Health Education Programs, the Accreditation Review Commission on
Education for the Physician Assistant, or its successor agency.
“Board” means the board of physician assistant
examiners.
“CME” means continuing medical
education.
“Department” means the department of public
health.
“Direction” means authoritative policy or
procedural guidance for the accomplishment of a function or activity.
“Licensee” means a person licensed by the board as
a physician assistant to provide medical services under the supervision of one
or more physicians.
“Locum tenens” means the temporary substitution of
one licensed physician assistant for another.
“Mandatory training” means training on identifying
and reporting child abuse or dependent adult abuse required of physician
assistants who are mandatory reporters. The full requirements on mandatory
reporting of child abuse and the training requirements are found in Iowa Code
section 232.69. The full requirements on mandatory reporting of dependent adult
abuse and the training requirements are found in Iowa Code section
235B.16.
“NCCPA” means the National Commission on
Certification of Physician Assistants.
“Physician” means a person who is licensed in Iowa
to practice medicine and surgery, osteopathic medicine and surgery, or
osteopathy.
“Physician assistant” means a person registered or
licensed as a physician assistant by the board.
“Registration” means that an individual has
fulfilled all requirements for licensure but is not under the supervision of an
Iowa–licensed physician who has been deemed eligible to supervise and the
individual shall not practice as a physician assistant.
“Remote medical site” means a medical clinic for
ambulatory patients which is away from the main practice location of a
supervising physician and in which a supervising physician is present less than
50 percent of the time the site is open. “Remote medical site” will
not apply to nursing homes, patient homes, hospital outpatient departments or
any location at which medical care is incidentally provided (e.g., diet center,
free clinic, site for athletic physicals, jail facility).
“Supervising physician” means a physician who has
been deemed eligible to supervise the medical services provided by the physician
assistant and who accepts ultimate responsibility for the medical care provided
by the physician/physician assistant team.
“Supervision” means that a supervising physician
retains ultimate responsibility for patient care, although a physician need not
be physically present at each activity of the physician assistant or be
specifically consulted before each delegated task is performed. Supervision
shall not be construed as requiring the personal presence of a supervising
physician at the place where such services are rendered except insofar as the
personal presence is expressly required by these rules or by Iowa Code chapter
148C.
“Supply prescription drugs” means to deliver to a
patient or the patient’s representative a quantity of prescription drugs
or devices that are properly packaged and labeled.
645—326.2(148C) Requirements for
registration.
326.2(1) The applicant shall:
a. Apply to the board on an application provided by the
board;
b. Submit a notarized copy of the certificate or diploma from
an approved program for physician assistants;
c. Submit the registration fee;
d. Submit a notarized copy of the examination scores from the
NCCPA initial certification examination or successor examination and a notarized
copy of initial certification from the NCCPA or successor agency; and
e. Submit a notarized copy of the current NCCPA or successor
agency certificate, or proof of completion of 100 CME hours for each biennium
since initial certification.
326.2(2) The registration shall be valid for at least
one year and shall expire on September 30 following the first anniversary of the
initial registration.
326.2(3) Temporary registration.
a. A temporary registration may be issued for an applicant who
has not taken the NCCPA initial certification examination or successor agency
examination.
b. The applicant must comply with 326.2(1)“a” to
“c.”
c. The temporary registration shall be valid for one year from
the date of issuance.
d. The temporary registration shall be renewed only once upon
showing proof that, through no fault of the applicant, the applicant was unable
to take the certification examination recognized by the board. Proof of
inability to take the certification examination shall be submitted to the board
office with a written request for renewal of a temporary registration,
accompanied by the registration renewal fee.
e. If the temporary registrant fails the certification
examination, the temporary registrant must cease practice immediately and
surrender the temporary license by the next business day.
f. There is no additional fee for converting temporary
registration to permanent registration.
326.2(4) Registration by endorsement. An applicant
who has been registered under the laws and jurisdiction of another state or
district shall file with the board office an application for registration by
endorsement. The applicant shall:
a. Apply to the board on an application provided by the
board;
b. Submit a notarized copy of the certificate or diploma from
an approved program for physician assistants;
c. Submit the registration fee;
d. Submit a notarized copy of the examination scores from the
NCCPA initial certification examination or successor examination and a notarized
copy of initial certification from the NCCPA or successor agency;
e. Submit a notarized copy of the current NCCPA or successor
agency certification, or submit proof of completion of 100 CME hours for each
biennium since initial certification;
f. Submit registration verification(s) from all states where
the applicant is currently registered or was previously registered;
and
g. Submit licensure verification(s) from all states where the
applicant is currently licensed or was previously licensed.
645—326.3(148C) Licensure.
326.3(1) The applicant shall:
a. Comply with subrule 326.2(1) for registration. Application
for registration may be done simultaneously with application for
licensure.
b. Apply to the board on an application provided by the board,
which includes:
(1) The supervising physician’s background, specialty,
and scope of practice;
(2) A description of how the physician assistant is to
function within the scope of practice as referenced in 645— 326.7(148C)
and 645—327.4(148C), including a plan for supervision of the physician
assistant.
c. Submit the license fee.
d. Submit evidence for each proposed supervising physician
that the physician is eligible to supervise a physician assistant. Pursuant to
653—subrule 21.3(2), submission of the following is proof of
eligibility:
(1) A copy of the license or renewal card that shows the
proposed supervising physician holds a current active permanent, special or
temporary license to practice in Iowa; and
(2) A signed attestation from the proposed supervising
physician that:
1. The physician is actively practicing medicine in Iowa;
and
2. The physician is not subject to a disciplinary order of the
board of medical examiners restricting the physician from supervising a
physician assistant.
Determination of physician eligibility or ineligibility to
supervise a physician assistant is made by the board of medical examiners.
Nothing in these rules should be read as implying that the board of physician
assistant examiners will be making determinations of physician eligibility or
ineligibility.
326.3(2) An initial license shall be valid for at
least one year and shall expire on September 30 following the first anniversary
of initial licensure.
326.3(3) Temporary licensure.
a. The applicant shall comply with the requirements for
temporary registrations in subrule 326.2(3).
b. A temporary license shall be valid for one year from date
of issuance and is issued to applicants who have graduated from an approved
program and have not taken the NCCPA initial certification or successor agency
examination.
c. There is no additional fee for converting temporary
licensure to permanent licensure.
d. During the temporary licensure period, if the temporarily
licensed physician assistant fails the certifying examination, the temporarily
licensed physician assistant must cease practicing as a physician assistant
immediately and surrender the temporary license by the next business
day.
e. The temporary license shall be renewed only once upon
showing proof that, through no fault of the applicant, the applicant was unable
to take the certifying examination recognized by the board. Proof of inability
to take the certifying examination shall be submitted to the board office with a
written request for renewal of a temporary registration accompanied by the
registration renewal fee.
326.3(4) Licensure by endorsement. An applicant who
has been licensed under the laws and jurisdiction of another state or district
shall file with the board office an application for licensure by endorsement.
An applicant shall:
a. Comply with subrule 326.2(4) for registration.
b. Apply to the board on an application provided by the
board, which includes:
(1) The supervising physician’s background, specialty,
and scope of practice; and
(2) A description of how the physician assistant is to
function within the scope of practice as referenced in 645— 326.7(148C)
and 645—327.4(148C) including a plan for supervision of the physician
assistant.
c. Submit the license fee.
d. Submit evidence for each proposed supervising physician
that the physician is eligible to supervise a physician assistant. Pursuant to
653—subrule 21.3(2), submission of the following is proof of
eligibility:
(1) A copy of the license or renewal card that shows the
proposed supervising physician holds a current active permanent, special or
temporary license to practice in Iowa; and
(2) A signed attestation from the proposed supervising
physician that:
1. The physician is actively practicing medicine in Iowa;
and
2. The physician is not subject to a disciplinary order of the
board of medical examiners restricting the physician from supervising a
physician assistant.
Determination of physician eligibility or ineligibility to
supervise a physician assistant is made by the board of medical examiners.
Nothing in these rules should be read as implying that the board of physician
assistant examiners will be making determinations of physician eligibility or
ineligibility.
e. Submit registration verification(s) from all states in
which the applicant is currently registered or was previously
registered.
f. Submit licensure verification(s) from all states in which
the applicant is currently licensed or was previously licensed.
326.3(5) An applicant must be both registered and
licensed before beginning practice in Iowa as a physician assistant.
Application for registration may be completed with the licensure
application.
326.3(6) Licensure by reciprocal agreement. The board
may enter into a reciprocal agreement with the District of Columbia or any
state, territory, province or foreign country with equal or similar requirements
for licensure of physician assistants.
645—326.4(148C) Examination requirements. The
applicant for licensure as a physician assistant shall successfully pass the
certifying examination for physician assistants conducted by the National
Commission on Certification of Physician Assistants or a successor examination
approved by the board.
645—326.5(148C) Educational qualifications. An
applicant for licensure as a physician assistant shall submit a notarized copy
of a diploma from an approved program for education of physician
assistants.
645—326.6(148C) Foreign–trained physician
assistants. Foreign–trained physician assistants shall provide an
equivalency evaluation of their educational credentials by International
Educational Research Foundations, Inc., Credentials Evaluation Service, P.O. Box
3665, Culver City, California 90231–3665, or its successor agency. The
professional curriculum must be equivalent to that stated in these rules. A
candidate shall bear the expense of the curriculum evaluation. The applicant
shall:
1. Provide a notarized copy of the certificate or diploma
awarded to the applicant from a physician assistant program in the country in
which the applicant was educated.
2. Receive a final determination from the board regarding the
application for licensure.
645—326.7(148C) Supervision
requirements.
326.7(1) General supervision requirements are as
follows:
a. The physician assistant shall maintain documentation of
currently approved supervising physicians which shall be made available to the
board if requested.
b. No more than two physician assistants shall be supervised
by a physician at the same time.
c. A physician assistant may provide medical services under
the supervision of one or more physicians for whom the physician assistant has
been licensed.
326.7(2) Once the physician is approved by the board
of medical examiners, the board of physician assistant examiners will consider
the physician eligible to supervise a physician assistant until the board
receives written notification from the board of medical examiners stating
otherwise.
326.7(3) In the event that the physician assistant has
no supervisory relationship with any physician, the physician assistant shall
automatically revert to registration status, shall cease practice immediately
and shall notify the board office in writing within ten days.
326.7(4) If a physician assistant with a valid license
discontinues working with one physician or group of physicians and chooses to
work with a different physician or group of physicians, the licensee shall
submit an updated Physician Supervision Form that contains all the requirements
in subrule 326.3(1), paragraphs “b” and “d.”
326.7(5) It shall be the responsibility of the
physician assistant with a supervising physician to ensure that the physician
assistant is adequately supervised.
a. Patient care provided by the physician assistant shall be
reviewed with a supervising physician on an ongoing basis as indicated by the
clinical condition of the patient. Although every chart need not be signed nor
every visit reviewed, nor does the physician need to be physically present at
each activity of the physician assistant, it is the responsibility of the
supervising physician and physician assistant to ensure that each patient has
received the appropriate medical care.
b. Patient care provided by the physician assistant may be
reviewed with a supervising physician in person, by telephone or by other
telecommunicative means.
c. When signatures are required, electronic signatures are
allowed if:
(1) The signature is transcribed by the signer into an
electronic record and is not the result of electronic regeneration;
and
(2) A mechanism exists allowing confirmation of the signature
and protection from unauthorized reproduction.
d. If the physician assistant is being trained to perform new
medical procedures, the training may be carried out only under the direct,
personal supervision of a supervising physician or another qualified
individual.
e. The physician assistant and a supervising physician are
responsible for ensuring that a supervising physician must be readily available
in person, by telephone, or by telecommunication to respond to a request of the
physician assistant.
326.7(6) The physician assistant may treat a patient
in consultation with a physician(s) in a recognized medical residency program
who holds a permanent license. The ultimate responsibility for supervision of
the physician assistant remains with the supervising physicians.
326.7(7) An application shall be submitted to the
board of physician assistant examiners for addition of any supervising physician
after initial licensure.
645—326.8(148C) License renewal.
326.8(1) The initial license renewal period for a
licensed physician assistant shall begin on October 1 and end on September 30 of
each year. Each subsequent renewal shall be valid for a period of two years and
shall expire on September 30 two years following the date of licensure
renewal.
326.8(2) A renewal of license application and
continuing education report form to practice as a physician assistant licensee
shall be mailed to the licensee at least 60 days prior to the expiration of the
license. Failure to receive the renewal application shall not relieve the
licensee of the obligation to pay biennial renewal fees on or before the renewal
date.
a. The licensee shall submit the completed application and
continuing education report form with the renewal fee(s) to the board office
before the license expiration date.
b. A licensee who regularly examines, attends, counsels or
treats children in Iowa shall indicate on the renewal application completion of
two hours of training in child abuse identification and reporting in the
previous five years or condition(s) for waiver of this requirement as identified
in paragraph “f.”
c. A licensee who regularly examines, attends, counsels or
treats dependent adults in Iowa shall indicate on the renewal application
completion of two hours of training in dependent adult abuse identification and
reporting in the previous five years or condition(s) for waiver of this
requirement as identified in paragraph “f.”
d. A licensee who regularly examines, attends, counsels or
treats both dependent adults and children in Iowa shall indicate on the renewal
application completion of training in abuse identification and reporting for
dependent adults and children in the previous five years or condition(s) for
waiver of this requirement as identified in paragraph “f.”
Training may be completed through separate courses as
identified in paragraphs “b” and “c” or in one combined
two–hour course that includes curricula for identifying and reporting
child abuse and dependent adult abuse.
e. The licensee shall maintain written documentation for five
years after mandatory training as identified in paragraphs “b” to
“d,” including program date(s), content, duration, and proof of
participation.
f. The requirement for mandatory training for identifying and
reporting child and dependent adult abuse shall be suspended if the board
determines that suspension is in the public interest or that a person at the
time of license renewal:
(1) Is engaged in active duty in the military service of this
state or the United States.
(2) Holds a current waiver by the board based on evidence of
significant hardship in complying with training requirements, including an
exemption of continuing education requirements or extension of time in which to
fulfill requirements due to a physical or mental disability or illness as
identified in 645—Chapter 328.
g. The board may select licensees for audit of compliance with
the requirements in paragraphs “b” to “f.”
h. Persons licensed to practice as physician assistants shall
keep their renewal licenses displayed in a conspicuous public place at the
primary site of practice.
326.8(3) Late renewal. If the renewal fee(s),
continuing education report and renewal application are received within 30 days
after the license expiration date, the late fee for failure to renew before
expiration shall be charged.
326.8(4) When all requirements for license renewal are
met, the licensee shall be sent a license renewal card by regular
mail.
645—326.9(272C) Lapsed license.
326.9(1) If the renewal fee and continuing education
report are received more than 30 days after the license renewal expiration date,
the license is lapsed. An application for reinstatement accompanied by the
reinstatement fee, the renewal fee(s) for each biennium the license is lapsed
and the late fee for failure to renew before expiration must be filed with the
board. The licensee may be subject to an audit of the licensee’s
continuing education report.
326.9(2) Licensees who have not fulfilled the
requirements for license renewal or for an exemption in the required time frame
will have a lapsed license and shall not engage in practice as a physician
assistant. Practicing without a license may be cause for disciplinary
action.
326.9(3) In order to reinstate a lapsed license,
licensees shall comply with all requirements for reinstatement as outlined in
645—328.5(148C).
326.9(4) After the reinstatement of a lapsed license,
the licensee shall renew at the next scheduled renewal cycle and complete the
continuing education required for that biennium.
326.9(5) Verifications of license(s) are required from
any state in which the licensee has practiced since the Iowa license
lapsed.
326.9(6) Reinstatement of a lapsed license. The
following chart illustrates the requirements for reinstatement based on the
length of time a license has lapsed.
An applicant shall satisfy the following
requirements:
|
30 days after expiration date up to 1 renewal
|
2 or more renewals
|
Submit written application for reinstatement to the
board
|
Required
|
Required
|
Pay the current renewal fee(s)
|
$100
|
$200
|
Pay the late fee
|
$100
|
$100
|
Pay the reinstatement fee
|
$50
|
$50
|
Submit verification(s) from every state in which the licensee
has practiced since the Iowa license lapsed
|
Required
|
Required
|
Complete continuing education requirements
OR
Submit notarized copy of NCCPA or successor agency
certification
|
100 CME hours, of which at least 40 percent shall
be in Category I
OR Notarized copy of NCCPA certification
|
200 CME hours, of which at least 40 percent shall
be in Category I
OR Notarized copy of NCCPA certification
|
Total fees and continuing education hours required for
reinstatement:
|
$250 and 100 CME hours or NCCPA or successor agency
certification
|
$350 and 200 CME hours or NCCPA or successor agency
certification
|
645—326.10(272C) License denial.
326.10(1) An applicant who has been denied licensure
by the board may appeal the denial and request a hearing on the issues related
to the licensure denial by serving a notice of appeal and request for hearing
upon the board not more than 30 days following the date of mailing of the
notification of licensure denial to the applicant. The request for hearing as
outlined in these rules shall specifically describe the facts to be contested
and determined at the hearing.
326.10(2) If an applicant who has been denied
licensure by the board appeals the licensure denial and requests a hearing
pursuant to this rule, the hearing and subsequent procedures shall be held
pursuant to the process outlined in Iowa Code chapters 17A and 272C.
645—326.11(148C) Use of title. A physician
assistant registered or licensed under Iowa Code chapter 148C may use the words
“physician assistant” after the person’s name or signify the
same by the use of the letters “PA.”
645—326.12(148C) Address change. The physician
assistant shall notify the board of any change in permanent address within 30
days of its occurrence.
645—326.13(148C) Student physician
assistant.
326.13(1) Any person who is enrolled as a student
(trainee) in an approved program shall comply with the rules set forth in this
chapter. A student is exempted from licensure requirements.
326.13(2) Notwithstanding any other provisions of
these rules, a student (trainee) may perform medical services when they are
rendered within the scope of an approved program.
645—326.14(148C) Application for program approval.
Application for recognition of an approved program for the education and
training of physician assistants shall be provided to the board on an
application provided by the board that includes:
1. The signature of the medical director or the program
director;
2. All supporting documents required by the application;
and
3. The application fee.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code chapters 17A,
147, 148C, and 272C.
ITEM 3. Adopt new
645—Chapter 327 as follows:
CHAPTER 327
PRACTICE FOR PHYSICIAN ASSISTANTS
645—327.1(148C) Duties.
327.1(1) The medical services to be provided by the
physician assistant are those delegated by a supervising physician. The
ultimate role of the physician assistant cannot be rigidly defined because of
the variations in practice requirements due to geographic, economic, and
sociologic factors. The high degree of responsibility a physician assistant may
assume requires that, at the conclusion of the formal education, the physician
assistant possesses the knowledge, skills and abilities necessary to provide
those services appropriate to the practice setting. The physician
assistant’s services may be utilized in any clinical settings including,
but not limited to, the office, the ambulatory clinic, the hospital, the
patient’s home, extended care facilities and nursing homes. Diagnostic and
therapeutic medical tasks common to the physician’s practice may be
assigned to the physician assistant by a supervising physician after
demonstration of proficiency and competence. The medical services to be
provided by the physician assistant include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. The initial approach to a patient of any age group in any
setting to elicit a medical history and perform a physical
examination.
b. Assessment, diagnosis and treatment of medical or surgical
problems and recording the findings.
c. Order, interpret, or perform laboratory tests, X–rays
or other medical procedures or studies.
d. Performance of therapeutic procedures such as injections,
immunizations, suturing and care of wounds, removal of foreign bodies, ear and
eye irrigation and other clinical procedures.
e. Performance of office surgical procedures including, but
not limited to, skin biopsy, mole or wart removal, toenail removal, removal of a
foreign body, arthrocentesis, incision and drainage of abscesses.
f. Assisting in surgery.
g. Prenatal and postnatal care and assisting a physician in
obstetrical care.
h. Care of orthopedic problems.
i. Performing and screening the results of special medical
examinations including, but not limited to, electrocardiogram or Holter
monitoring, radiography, audiometric and vision screening, tonometry, and
pulmonary function screening tests.
j. Instruction and counseling of patients regarding physical
and mental health on matters such as diets, disease, therapy, and normal growth
and development.
k. Assisting a physician in the hospital setting by performing
medical histories and physical examinations, making patient rounds, recording
patient progress notes and other appropriate medical records, assisting in
surgery, performing or assisting with medical procedures, providing emergency
medical services and issuing, transmitting and executing patient care orders of
the supervising physician.
l. Providing services to patients requiring continuing care
(i.e., home, nursing home, extended care facilities).
m. Referring patients to specialty or subspecialty physicians,
medical facilities or social agencies as indicated by the patients’
problems.
n. Immediate evaluation, treatment and institution of
procedures essential to providing an appropriate response to emergency medical
problems.
o. Order drugs and supplies in the office, and assist in
keeping records and in the upkeep of equipment.
p. Admit patients to a hospital or health care
facility.
q. Order diets, physical therapy, inhalation therapy, or other
rehabilitative services as indicated by the patient’s problems.
r. Administer any drug (a single dose).
s. Prescribe drugs and medical devices under the following
conditions:
(1) The physician assistant shall have passed the national
certifying examination conducted by the National Commission on the Certification
of Physician Assistants or its successor examination approved by the board.
Physician assistants with a temporary license may order drugs and medical
devices only with the prior approval and direction of a supervising physician.
Prior approval may include discussion of the specific medical problems with a
supervising physician prior to the patient’s being seen by the physician
assistant.
(2) The physician assistant may not prescribe Schedule II
controlled substances which are listed as stimulants or depressants in Iowa Code
chapter 124. The physician assistant may order Schedule II controlled
substances which are listed as stimulants or depressants in Iowa Code chapter
124 only with the prior approval and direction of a physician. Prior approval
may include discussion of the specific medical problems with a supervising
physician prior to the patient’s being seen by the physician
assistant.
(3) The physician assistant shall inform the board of any
limitation on the prescriptive authority of the physician assistant in addition
to the limitations set out in 327.1(1)“s”(2).
(4) A physician assistant shall not prescribe substances that
the supervising physician does not have the authority to prescribe except as
allowed in 327.1(1)“n.”
(5) The physician assistant may prescribe, supply and
administer drugs and medical devices in all settings including, but not limited
to, hospitals, health care facilities, health care institutions, clinics,
offices, health maintenance organizations, and outpatient and emergency care
settings except as limited by 327.1(1)“s”(2).
(6) A physician assistant who is an authorized prescriber may
request, receive, and supply sample drugs and medical devices except as limited
by 327.1(1)“s”(2).
(7) The board of physician assistant examiners shall be the
only board to regulate the practice of physician assistants relating to
prescribing and supplying prescription drugs, controlled substances and medical
devices.
t. Supply properly packaged and labeled prescription drugs,
controlled substances or medical devices when pharmacist services are not
reasonably available or when it is in the best interests of the patient as
delegated by a supervising physician.
(1) When the physician assistant is the prescriber of the
medications under 327.1(1)“s,” these medications shall be
supplied for the purpose of accommodating the patient and shall not be sold for
more than the cost of the drug and reasonable overhead costs as they relate to
supplying prescription drugs to the patient and not at a profit to the physician
or physician assistant.
(2) When a physician assistant supplies medication on the
direct order of a physician, subparagraph (1) does not apply.
(3) A nurse or staff assistant may assist the physician
assistant in supplying medications when prescriptive drug supplying authority is
delegated by a supervising physician to the physician assistant under
327.1(1)“s.”
u. When a physician assistant supplies medications as
delegated by a supervising physician in a remote site, the physician assistant
shall secure the regular advice and consultation of a pharmacist regarding the
distribution, storage and appropriate use of prescription drugs, controlled
substances, and medical devices.
v. May, at the request of the peace officer, withdraw a
specimen of blood from a patient for the purpose of determining the alcohol
concentration or the presence of drugs.
w. Direct medical personnel, health professionals and others
involved in caring for patients in the execution of patient care.
x. May authenticate medical forms by signing the form and
including a supervising physician’s name.
y. Perform other duties appropriate to a physician’s
practice.
z. Health care providers shall consider the instructions of
the physician assistant to be instructions of a supervising physician if the
instructions concern duties delegated to the physician assistant by the
supervising physician.
327.1(2) Emergency medicine duties.
a. A physician assistant may be a member of the staff of an
ambulance or rescue squad pursuant to Iowa Code chapter 147A.
b. A physician assistant shall document skills, training and
education equivalent to that required of a certified advanced emergency medical
technician or a paramedic.
c. A physician assistant must apply for approval of advanced
care training equivalency on forms supplied by the board of physician assistant
examiners.
d. Exceptions to this subrule include:
(1) A physician assistant who accompanies and is responsible
for a transfer patient;
(2) A physician assistant who serves on a basic ambulance or
rescue squad service; or
(3) Physician assistants who render aid within their skills
during an emergency.
645—327.2(148C) Prohibition. No physician
assistant shall be permitted to prescribe lenses, prisms or contact lenses for
the aid, relief or correction of human vision. No physician assistant shall be
permitted to measure the visual power and visual efficiency of the human eye, as
distinguished from routine visual screening, except in the personal presence of
a supervising physician at the place where these services are
rendered.
645—327.3(148C) Free medical clinic.
327.3(1) A licensed physician assistant shall be
supervised at a free medical clinic by a qualified practicing physician. The
physician assistant shall ensure that the qualified practicing physician is
informed of that physician’s supervisory responsibilities for the
physician assistant.
327.3(2) A qualified practicing physician means a
physician with a valid permanent license to practice medicine in Iowa and who
provides medical services to the free medical clinic.
327.3(3) No new application or prior approval is
required for work in a free clinic. All requirements for licensees in
645—326.2(148C) and 645—326.3(148C) apply to licensees practicing in
free medical clinics.
645—327.4(148C) Remote medical site.
327.4(1) A physician assistant may provide medical
services in a remote medical site if:
a. The physician assistant has a permanent license and at
least one year of practice as a physician assistant.
b. The physician assistant may request a waiver of the one
year of practice experience if all of the following conditions are
met:
(1) The physician assistant has a permanent license and at
least six months of practice as a physician assistant;
(2) The supervising physician and physician assistant have
worked together at the same location for a period of at least three months prior
to the date the physician assistant is to begin practicing in the remote site;
and
(3) Patient care provided by the physician assistant is
reviewed by the supervising physician at least weekly and the supervising
physician signs all charts on patient care rendered without documented direct
consultation with the physician during the first year of the physician
assistant’s practice.
c. The physician assistant and supervising physician comply
with the supervision requirements outlined in 645—subrule
326.7(1).
327.4(2) A supervising physician must visit a remote
site to provide additional medical direction, medical services and consultation
at least every two weeks or less frequently as specified in special
circumstances. When visits are less frequent than every two weeks in unusual or
emergency circumstances, the board shall be notified in writing of these
circumstances.
645—327.5(147) Identification as a physician
assistant. The physician assistant shall be identified as a physician
assistant to patients and to the public.
645—327.6(147) Prescription
requirements.
327.6(1) Each written prescription drug order issued
by a physician assistant shall contain the following:
a. The date of issuance.
b. The name and address of the patient for whom the drug is
prescribed.
c. The name, strength, and quantity of the drug, medicine, or
device prescribed and directions for use.
d. A supervising physician’s name, the physician
assistant’s name and the practice address.
e. The signature of the physician assistant followed by the
initials “PA.”
f. Any prescription for controlled substances prescribed by
the physician assistant shall contain the Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA)
number of the physician assistant.
327.6(2) Each oral prescription drug order issued by a
physician assistant shall include the same information required for a written
prescription, except for the written signature and address of the
practitioners.
645—327.7(147) Supplying—requirements for
containers, labeling, and records.
327.7(1) Containers. A prescription drug shall be
supplied in a container which meets the requirements of the Poison Prevention
Packaging Act of 1970, 15 U.S.C. §§ 1471– 1476 (1976), which
relate to childproof closure, unless otherwise requested by the patient. The
container must also meet the requirements of Section 502G of the Federal Food,
Drug and Cosmetic Act, 21 U.S.C. §§ 301 et seq. (1976), which pertain
to light resistance and moisture resistance needs of the drug
supplied.
327.7(2) Labeling. A label bearing the following
information shall be affixed to a container in which a prescription drug is
supplied:
a. The name and practice address of the supervising physician
and physician assistant.
b. The name of the patient.
c. The date supplied.
d. The directions for administering the prescription drug and
any cautionary statement deemed appropriate by the physician
assistant.
e. The name, strength and quantity of the prescription drug in
the container.
f. When supplying Schedule II, III, or IV controlled
substances, the federal transfer warning statement must appear on the label as
follows: “Caution: Federal law prohibits the transfer of this drug to any
person other than the patient for whom it was prescribed.”
327.7(3) Samples. Prescription sample drugs
will be provided without additional charge to the patient. Prescription sample
drugs supplied in the original container or package shall be deemed to conform
to labeling and packaging requirements.
327.7(4) Records. A record of prescription
drugs supplied by the physician assistant to a patient shall be kept which
contains the label information required by paragraphs 327.7(2)“b”
to “e.” Noting such information on the patient’s chart or
record is sufficient.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code section
147.107 and chapters 148C and 272C.
ITEM 4. Rescind rule
645—328.5(148C) and adopt the following new rule in lieu
thereof:
645—328.5(148C) Reinstatement of lapsed license.
Failure of the licensee to renew the license within 30 days after the
expiration date shall cause the license to lapse. A person who allows the
license to lapse cannot engage in practice in Iowa without first complying with
all regulations governing reinstatement as outlined in the board rules. A
person who allows the license to lapse must apply to the board for reinstatement
of the license. Reinstatement of the license may be granted by the board
if the applicant:
1. Submits a written application for reinstatement;
2. Submits the renewal fee(s), late fee, and reinstatement
fee;
3. Provides verification of license(s) from every state in
which the licensee has practiced since the Iowa license lapsed;
4. Provides evidence of satisfactory completion of continuing
education requirements during the period since the license lapsed. The total
number of continuing education hours required for license reinstatement is
computed by multiplying 100 by the number of bienniums since the license lapsed
to a maximum of two bienniums or 200 hours of continuing education credit, of
which at least 40 percent of the hours completed shall be in Category I;
and
5. For a license that has lapsed for one year or more, submits
information on each supervising physician.
ITEM 5. Amend rule 645—328.7(148C)
as follows:
645—328.7(148C) Continuing education
waiver exemption for disability or illness. The
board may, in individual cases involving disability or illness, grant
waivers exemptions of the minimum
educational continuing education requirements or
extension of time within which to fulfill the same or make the required reports.
No waiver exemption or extension of time shall be
granted unless written application therefor is made on forms provided by the
board and signed by the licensee and appropriate licensed health care
practitioners. The board may grant a waiver an
exemption of the minimum educational continuing
education requirements for any period of time not to exceed one calendar
year from the onset of disability or illness. In the event that the disability
or illness upon which a waiver an exemption has
been granted continues beyond the period of waiver
exemption, the licensee must reapply for an extension of the
waiver exemption. The board may, as a condition of any
waiver granted, require the applicant to make up a certain portion or all of the
minimum educational continuing education requirements
waived exempted by such methods as may be prescribed by
the board.
ITEM 6. Adopt new
645—Chapter 329 as follows:
CHAPTER 329
DISCIPLINE FOR PHYSICIAN ASSISTANTS
645—329.1(272C) Discipline.
329.1(1) Grounds for disciplinary action. The board
may impose any of the discipline set forth in rule 645— 13.1(272C) when
the board determines the licensee is guilty of the following:
a. The use of presigned prescriptions, or the use of a rubber
stamp to affix a signature to a prescription. A person who is unable, due to a
physical handicap, to make a written signature or mark, however, may substitute
in lieu of a signature a rubber stamp which is adopted by the handicapped person
for all purposes requiring a signature and which is affixed by the handicapped
person or affixed by another person upon the request of the handicapped person
and in that person’s presence.
b. Fraud in procuring registration or licensure to practice as
a physician assistant.
c. Knowingly making misleading, deceptive, untrue or
fraudulent representations in the practice of the profession or engaging in
unethical conduct or practice harmful or detrimental to the public. Proof of
actual injury need not be established.
d. Failure to possess and exercise that degree of skill,
learning, and care expected of a reasonably prudent physician assistant acting
in the same or similar circumstances.
e. The excessive use of alcohol, drugs, narcotics, chemicals,
or other substances which may impair a physician assistant’s ability to
practice the profession with reasonable skill and safety.
f. Conviction of a felony related to the profession or the
conviction of a felony that would affect the ability to practice within this
profession. A copy of the record of conviction or plea of guilty shall be clear
and convincing evidence.
g. Willful or repeated violations of the provisions of these
rules and Iowa Code chapter 148C.
h. Failure to report a licensure, registration or
certification revocation, suspension, or other disciplinary action taken by a
licensing authority of another state, territory, or country.
i. Inability to practice as a physician assistant with a
reasonable degree of skill and safety due to a mental or physical impairment or
substance abuse.
j. Willful or repeated violation of a lawful rule promulgated
by the board.
k. Violating a lawful order of the board previously entered by
the board in a disciplinary hearing.
l. Being adjudged mentally incompetent by a court of competent
jurisdiction.
m. Making suggestive, lewd, lascivious or improper remarks or
sexual advances to a patient.
n. Knowingly submitting a false report of continuing ed–
ucation.
o. Failure to notify the board within 30 days after occurrence
of any judgment or settlement of a malpractice claim or action.
p. Failure to file a report concerning acts or omissions
committed by another physician assistant. No licensee shall be required to
report information which is deemed to be confidential communication as the
result of a physician–patient relationship or which is prohibited by state
or federal statute. The report shall include the name and address of the
licensee and the date, time and place of the incident.
q. Willful or repeated gross malpractice.
r. Willful or gross negligence.
s. Obtaining any fee by fraud or misrepresentation.
t. The performance of medical functions without approved
supervision except in cases requiring performance of evaluation and treatment
procedures essential to providing an appropriate response to emergency
situations.
u. Knowingly or willingly performing a medical function or
task prohibited by the board or for which the assistant is not qualified by
training to perform.
v. Violating a statute or law of the state, another state, or
the United States, without regard to its designation as either felony or
misdemeanor, which statute or law related to the practice of a physician
assistant.
w. Habitual intoxication or addiction to drugs.
x. Failure to comply with the recommendations issued by the
Centers for Disease Control of the United States Department of Health and Human
Services for preventing transmission of human immunodeficiency virus and
hepatitis B virus to patients during exposure–prone invasive procedures,
or with the recommendations of the expert review panel established pursuant to
Iowa Code section 139A.22(3), and applicable hospital protocols established
pursuant to Iowa Code section 139A.22(1).
329.1(2) The board may refuse to grant licensure to
practice as a physician assistant for any of the grounds set out in subrule
329.1(1).
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code sections 148C.5A
and 148C.6A.
ITEM 7. Adopt new
645—Chapter 330 as follows:
CHAPTER 330
FEES
645—330.1(148C) Fees. All fees are
nonrefundable.
330.1(1) Application fee for a license is
$100.
330.1(2) Application fee for temporary or permanent
registration is $50.
330.1(3) Application fee for recognition of an
approved program is $50.
330.1(4) Renewal of license fee is $100.
330.1(5) Renewal of registration fee only is
$5.
330.1(6) Late fee for a lapsed license/registration is
$100.
330.1(7) Reinstatement fee is $50.
330.1(8) Fee for a temporary license is
$100.
330.1(9) Duplicate license fee is $10.
330.1(10) Fee for verification of license or
registration is $10.
330.1(11) Returned check fee is $15.
330.1(12) Disciplinary hearing fee is a maximum of
$75.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section 147.8 and
chapters 17A, 148C and 272C.
ARC 1512B
RACING AND GAMING
COMMISSION[491]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 99D.7 and
99F.4, the Racing and Gaming Commission hereby gives Notice of Intended Action
to amend Chapter 4, “Contested Cases and Other Proceedings,” Chapter
7, “Greyhound Racing,” and Chapter 11, “Gambling Games,”
Iowa Administrative Code.
Item 1 changes the definition of
“steward.”
Items 2 and 3 require more than one steward to initiate a
suspension of an occupational license.
Item 4 corrects an incorrect rule reference.
Item 5 adds a subrule for gambling games of chance involving
prizes awarded to participants through promotional activities at a
facility.
Any person may make written suggestions or comments on the
proposed amendments on or before April 23, 2002. Written material should be
directed to the Racing and Gaming Commission, 717 E. Court, Suite B, Des Moines,
Iowa 50309. Persons who wish to convey their views orally should contact the
Commission office at (515)281–7352.
Also, there will be a public hearing on April 23, 2002, at9
a.m. in the office of the Racing and Gaming Commission, 717 E. Court, Suite B,
Des Moines, Iowa. Persons may pre–sent their views at the public hearing
either orally or in writing.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapters
99D and 99F.
The following amendments are proposed.
ITEM 1. Amend rule
491—4.2(17A), definition of “steward,” as
follows:
“Steward” means an employee of the
commission assigned by the administrator to a licensed pari–mutuel
racetrack a racing official appointed or approved by the
commission to perform the supervisory and regulatory duties of the
commission relating to pari–mutuel racing.
ITEM 2. Rescind subrule 4.6(3) and adopt
in lieu thereof the following new subrule:
4.6(3) The stewards shall summarily suspend an
occupational license when a licensee has been formally arrested or charged with
a crime that would disqualify the person from holding a license if convicted.
Upon proof of resolution of a disqualifying criminal charge or formal arrest,
regardless of summary suspension of a license, the stewards shall take one of
the following courses of action:
a. If the license was summarily suspended and the charges are
dismissed or the licensee is acquitted of the charges, the stewards shall
reinstate the license.
b. If the licensee is convicted of the charges, the stewards
shall deny the license.
c. If the licensee is convicted of a lesser charge, it is at
the discretion of the stewards whether to reinstate or deny the license pursuant
to 491—Chapter 6.
d. If the licensee receives a deferred judgment, the stewards
shall evaluate the qualifications of the individual to hold an occupational
license pursuant to 491—Chapter 6.
ITEM 3. Amend subrule 4.6(4) as
follows:
4.6(4) A steward The stewards
may summarily suspend an occupational licensee in accordance with rule
491— 4.47(17A).
ITEM 4. Amend subrule 7.5(2),
paragraph “j,” as follows:
j. Promptly reporting the death of any greyhound in the
trainer’s care on facility grounds to the stewards, owner, and the
commission veterinarian and complying with the rules on postmortem examination
set forth in paragraph 7.3(3)“h.”
7.3(3)“g.”
ITEM 5. Amend rule 491—11.5(99F) by
adopting the following new subrule:
11.5(4) Gambling games of chance involving prizes
awarded to participants through promotional activities at a facility.
a. Proposals. Gambling games of chance involving prizes
awarded to participants through promotional activities occurring at a facility
shall be authorized and approved by the commission. Before a facility may
conduct such gambling game, all proposals for terms, game rules, prizes, dates
of operation and procedures for any gambling games of chance involving prizes
awarded through promotional activities occurring at a facility shall be
submitted in writing to a commission representative for approval. The written
submission shall be submitted to the commission representative at least 14 days
in advance of the planned activity. Any changes to an approved gambling game of
chance involving prizes awarded to participants through promotional activities
shall also require the approval of the commission representative. Gambling games
of chance involving prizes awarded to participants through promotional
activities occurring at a facility shall meet the following
requirements:
(1) All rules of play shall be in writing and posted for
public inspection;
(2) Such games shall be limited to participants 21 years of
age or older;
(3) All games shall be conducted in a fair and honest manner,
and all prizes advertised shall be awarded in accordance with the posted rules
of play;
(4) All such games shall be conducted within the regulated
area of the facility and shall be conducted in accordance with the submission
approved by the commission representative;
(5) No entry fees shall be permitted; and
(6) All employees of the facility shall be prohibited from
participation.
b. Limits. Gambling games of chance involving prizes awarded
to participants through promotional activities conducted at a facility shall be
subject to the wagering tax pursuant to Iowa Code section 99F.11. However, in
determining the adjusted gross receipts, the facility may consider all
nonmonetary consideration expended by a participant and shall certify to the
commission that the nonmonetary consideration is at least equal to the value of
the prizes awarded.
ARC 1534B
REGENTS BOARD[681]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 262.9(3), the
Board of Regents hereby gives Notice of Intended Action to amend Chapter 3,
“Personnel Administration,” Iowa Administrative Code.
The rules in Chapter 3 describe the administration of the
Regent Merit System with amendments as necessitated by collective bargaining and
Iowa Code chapter 19A.
Any interested person may make written suggestions or comments
on this proposed amendment on or before April 23, 2002. Such written materials
should be directed to the Board of Regents, State of Iowa, 11260 Aurora
Avenue,Urbandale, Iowa 50322–7905, or via fax at (515)281–6420.
Persons who wish to convey their views orally should contact the Board of
Regents, State of Iowa, at (515)281–3934.
Also, there will be a public hearing on April 23, 2002, from
10 to 11 a.m. in the Conference Room, Board of Regents, State of Iowa, 11260
Aurora Avenue, Urbandale, Iowa, at which time persons may present their views
either orally or in writing. At the hearing, persons will be asked to give
their names and addresses for the record and to confine their remarks to the
subject of the rules.
Any persons who intend to attend a public hearing and have
special requirements, such as hearing or mobility impairments, should contact
the Board of Regents, State of Iowa, and advise of specific needs.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter
19A.
The following amendments are proposed.
ITEM 1. Amend rule 681—3.2(19A) as
follows:
681—3.2(19A) Covered employees. All employees
of the board of regents, except those exempted by the state merit
employment Act Iowa Code section 19A.3, will be covered under
the rules of this system. Employees hired into permanent positions one
year or more prior to the date of implementation of these rules will be given
permanent status and full rights hereunder. Employees hired less than one year
prior to the date of implementation of these rules will be required to complete
a probationary period in accordance with 3.90(19A). Service immediately prior
to the date these rules are implemented will count as probationary
time.
ITEM 2. Amend rule 681—3.3(19A),
introductory paragraph, as follows:
681—3.3(19A) Administration. Under authority of
the board of regents and the supervision of its executive director, a merit
system director will be appointed who will be responsible for the development,
operation and evaluation of the system in compliance with the objectives and
intent of the state merit employment Act
Iowa Code chapter 19A and regents regent merit
rules. At each board of regents institution the head thereof will designate an
administrator to serve as resident director of the system. The resident
director will be responsible through the chief executive at the institution for
conducting a program of personnel administration in accordance with these rules.
The merit system director shall review the operation of the merit
system at each of the institutions and will be responsible for the direction of
the merit system and have the authority to ensure the uniform administration of
the merit system under provision of these rules.
ITEM 3. Amend rule
681—3.14(19A) as follows:
Amend the following definitions:
“Advanced starting rate” is a rate or step
of on the pay grade which is greater than the minimum rate
(Step 1) of the pay grade for a specific class as provided for
in the approved pay plan.
“Certification” is the determination, in
accordance with the rules, by the resident director of the people from which an
employing department may select to fill a vacancy means the referral
of qualified applicants from an eligibility register to a department for the
purpose of making a selection in accordance with these rules.
“Class” or “class of
position” means one or more positions, which are sufficiently
similar in duties and responsibilities, that each position in the group can be
given the same job title, and require the same minimum
qualifications as to education and experience, can be filled by
substantially the same test of ability or fitness, and that the same
schedule of pay can be applied with equity to all positions in the class under
the same or substantially the same employment conditions.
“Classify” or
“allocate” means to make the original assignment of a
position to an appropriate class on the basis of the duties and responsibilities
assigned and to be performed.
“Eligibility lists” are lists of names of
qualified applicants who have passed the examination prescribed
for a particular class of position.
“Eligibility register” consists of the names of
the applicants on from the appropriate eligibility list
who received the highest six scores who are certified for a
specific vacancy.
“Examination” is a test of fitness that is
applied to determine the eligibility of an applicant for a class the
screening of applicants.
“Lateral transfer” means a change from a position
in one class to a different position in the same class in another
department or institution, or to a position in a different class having the same
last two–digit pay grade designation or another class in the
same pay grade.
“Maximum rate” is the final step
value of the pay grade to which a classification is assigned. A
“red–circled” rate is above the maximum.
“Minimum rate” is Step 1 the
minimum value of the pay grade to which a classification is assigned. It is
less than an “Advanced advanced starting
rate.”
“Pay grade” or “grade”
means is the numerical designation of a
on the pay schedule having a minimum and maximum with
intermediate steps establishing rates of pay. The last two digits of a pay
grade shall govern the level of a grade and determine whether a class is lower,
higher, or the same as another class to determine demotion, promotion, or
transfer. to which individual classes are assigned.
“Permanent employee” is an employee who has
completed the initial probationary period and thereby acquired permanent
status in accordance with the rules of the system.
“Probationary period” is a work
test six–month period that is a part of the
examination process following an original appointment. A subsequent
probationary period is required for a promotion, voluntary demotion out of
series, or lateral transfer out of class to determine an
employee’s fitness for the position. A probationary period is required
for an original appointment, reinstatement, reemployment to a class not
previously held, promotion, voluntary demotion out of series or lateral transfer
out of class.
“Reclassify” or
“reallocate” means to make a reassignment
or change in the allocation classification of a
position by raising it to a higher, reducing it to a lower, or moving it to
another class of the same level on the basis of significant changes in the kind
or difficulty of the tasks, duties, and responsibilities in such position, or
because of an amendment to the classification plan, and officially assigning to
that position the class title for such appropriate class of
position.
“Reemployment” is the reappointment of an employee
from a reemployment list register. An employee may be
placed on a reemployment list as a result of (1) layoff or voluntary demotion in
lieu of layoff, or (2) medically related disability leave and exhaustion of
vacation and medically related disability leave credits, or (3) failure to pass
a subsequent probationary period on a promotion, lateral transfer out of class,
or demotion out of series.
“Suspension” is a an
enforced leave of absence with or without pay enforced
as for purposes of conducting an investigation or as a
disciplinary measure.
Adopt the following new definition:
“Step” is the value established through the
collective bargaining process or by the merit system director for the purposes
of applying the rules on compensation and the setting of advanced starting
rates.
Rescind the following definition:
“Rate of pay” or “rate” means
the dollar amount of salary or wage prescribed at each step of each pay grade in
the approved pay plans (matrices).
ITEM 4. Amend rules 681—3.25(19A)
and 681— 3.26(19A) as follows:
681—3.25(19A) Preparation and maintenance of the
classification plan. The merit system director, in consultation with the
resident directors and subject to the approval of the board of regents, shall
develop and maintain a classification plan so that all positions that are
substantially similar and comparable in regard to the kind and difficulty of
work and the level of responsibility are included in the same class, so that the
same minimum qualifications are required for all positions in the same class
(except as provided in 3.69(2)), so that the same examination may be
used in filling all positions in a class, and so that the same pay
schedule may be equitably applied (except for geographical differences) to all
positions in the class. For each class of position the plan
will include a class title, a definition of the job, examples of the kind of
work performed, statements of knowledges, skills and abilities, and the
minimum qualifications for the class including special requirements when
applicable.
681—3.26(19A) Administration of the classification
plan. The merit system director will direct the uniform administration of
the classification plan. Resident directors may recommend classifications and
reclassifications. Employing departments and employees may appeal
classification and reclassification in accordance with 3.127(19A) of these
rules.
The merit system director, in consultation with the resident
directors and subject to the approval of the board of regents, may establish new
classes and change or abolish existing classes which affect the merit system pay
plan in order to meet the needs of the institutions and to properly reflect
changes in work and the organization thereof. When the changes do not affect
the pay plan of the merit system, the merit system director may, in
consultation with the resident directors, change existing classes and report
such changes annually to the board of regents. When the classification of a
position is changed, the incumbent will be entitled to continue service in the
position provided the incumbent meets the minimum qualifications or provided the
duties have not changed appreciably. If the incumbent is not eligible to
continue, the incumbent may be transferred, promoted, demoted or laid off in
accordance with the rules. Changes in classification will not be used to avoid
other provisions of these rules relating to layoffs, promotions, demotions and
dismissal.
A review of the allocation of positions to
classifications individual classifications, class series, or
group of classes may be initiated by the merit system director on a systemwide
basis. The administrative review shall preempt the classification appeal
procedure provided in 3.127(19A) of these rules. Changes in the classification
of positions resulting from a systemwide review shall be effective at the
beginning of the next fiscal year unless the merit system director establishes
an earlier date for implementation.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code sections 19A.3(5)
and 19A.9.
ITEM 5. Amend rule 681—3.37(19A) as
follows:
681—3.37(19A) Preparation, content and adoption of
the pay plan. The board of regents will adopt a pay plan for all the
classes established in the classification plan. The pay plan will consist of a
schedule or schedules of numbered grades with minimum, maximum and
intermediate steps minimums and maximums for each
grade. Each class will be assigned to a pay grade. The plan will be developed
to reflect the relative difficulty and responsibility of the work involved in
the various classes, what is paid for similar work by other employers in the
pertinent labor market, and the availability of funds with due regard to the
results of a collective bargaining agreement negotiated under the provisions of
Iowa Code chapter 20. The plan will be uniformly applicable to all regents
institutions except for variances approved on the basis of geographical
differences. Prior to final approval by the board of regents, the plan will be
the subject of a public hearing conducted after reasonable and adequate notice
at each board of regents institution. After approval by the board of regents,
the plan will be submitted for approval to such other authority as required by
law.
ITEM 6. Amend rule 681—3.39(19A) as
follows:
681—3.39(19A) Administration of the pay plan.
Within the provisions of these rules, the pay plan will be uniformly
administered by the resident directors under the direction of the merit system
director for all classes in the system. Except as otherwise provided in these
rules and in the pay plan, all employees will be paid at one of the
steps of between the minimum and maximum of the pay grade to
which the employee’s class is assigned and such pay will constitute the
total cash remuneration the employee receives for the employee’s work in
that position. Perquisites such as subsistence and maintenance allowances will
be considered a part of pay and the value of such will be deducted from an
employee’s rate of pay. Any employee who is approved for participation in
a phased retirement program as provided for by state law and regent policy shall
have the salary provided under these rules adjusted as specified by such law and
regent policy.
3.39(1) Entrance salaries. The entrance salary for an
employee in any position under this system will be the minimum salary of the pay
grade to which that class of position is assigned or in
accordance with the approved pay plan, except as provided by the
following:
a. No change.
b. Appointment based on exceptional qualifications. Employees
whose qualifications substantially exceed the minimum required for the
class, or who possess outstanding experience relative to the
demands of the position may, at the request of an employing department,
be appointed at a rate higher than the minimum, provided that the pay of all
other employees with similar qualifications working under the same conditions at
the same institution are raised to that higher rate. Such appointments must be
approved by the resident director and reported to the merit system director.
Such appointments which necessitate the adjustment of the salaries of employees
other than the appointee will, in addition, require prior approval
of be reported to the merit system director.
Increases authorized and granted to other employees as the
result of appointments based on the scarcity of qualified applicants,
3.39(1)“a,” or appointments based on exceptional qualifications,
3.39(1)“b,” will establish new merit review dates for affected
employees.
c. No change.
3.39(2) Merit increases.
Nonbargaining Permanent and probationary employees
on Step 1 in a pay grade will be eligible for a
step merit increase upon completion of six
months following one year of satisfactory performance in their
assigned classification at the same step with the exception
that permanent and probationary employees paid at the minimum of a pay grade
will be eligible for a merit increase upon completion of 6 months of
satisfactory service in their assigned classifications and every 12 months
thereafter. Permanent and probationary employees on Step 2 or above
in a pay grade will be eligible for a step merit increase upon completion of one
year of satisfactory performance in their assigned classification at the same
rate of pay step except that no No merit increase will be
granted above the last step in maximum of the pay grade.
The period of satisfactory per–formance will be measured from the last
merit review date if such date has been established. Merit increases in pay
will not be made retroactively, but may be denied or deferred by the employing
department on the basis of work performance. Employees whose merit increases
are denied or deferred will, prior to the scheduled effective date of increase,
be informed of such action by written statement from their employing department
which specifies the reason for the denial or deferral. Denials or deferrals of
a merit increase for six months or less for reason of unsatisfactory work
performance will not result in the establishment of a revised merit review
date.
Deferrals resulting from leaves of absence without pay or
layoff exceeding 30 calendar days will cause a change of the merit review date
equal to the time away from work. Pay for exceptional performance, not to
exceed 5 percent of an employee’s current annual salary, may be given to
an employee at the written request of the employee’s department head with
appropriate administrative approval and the prior approval of the resident
director. The request will describe the nature of the exceptional job
performance for which additional pay is requested, indicate the amount proposed,
and specify the source of funds. The award may be based on sustained superior
performance or an exceptional achievement or contribution during the period
since the employee’s last performance review.
To qualify for an exceptional performance award, an employee
must have a cumulative performance evaluation exceeding standards and have no
individual rating below satisfactory. Payment will be made as a lump sum award
and will not change the employee’s established salary rate. No employee
will be eligible for more than one award a year.
3.39(3) Pay on promotion. An employee who is promoted
will be moved to the minimum rate of the new grade, or to the
next a higher rate on the new grade which provides an adjustment
that is the salary equivalent of not less than the value of a
one step higher than the employee’s present base pay. In no event
will the adjustment result in pay above the maximum of the new grade.
If the promotion involves movement to a new grade that is
three or more grades higher than the employee’s present grade, the
resident director may approve, on written request from the employing department,
an increase that is equivalent to the value of two steps higher than the
employee’s present base pay.
For the purpose of calculating the promotional increase, any
extra pay such as shift differential pay, pay for special assignment,
on–call pay, pay for overtime, or pay for call back shall be excluded as
part of the employee’s present base pay. The merit review date will be
computed from the effective date of promotion and in accordance with 3.39(2).
Pay on promotion in accordance with the provisions of subrule 3.39(1), paragraph
“b,” may be authorized by a resident director and will be
reported to with the approval of the merit system
director.
3.39(4) Pay on demotion. Upon recommendation by the
department head, and with the prior approval of the resident director, the pay
of an employee who is demoted will be set at any step
rate within the new pay grade that does not exceed the rate at which the
employee was paid in the position from which the employee was demoted. Merit
review date will not change.
If the salary of an employee who is demoted as the result of
reclassification of the employee’s position exceeds the maximum salary of
the pay range to which the new classification is assigned, at the discretion of
the employing department and with the approval of the resident director, the
salary may be “red–circled” for a period not to exceed one
year. An extension not to exceed one additional year may be approved by the
merit system director.
If an employee accepts voluntary demotion in lieu of layoff,
the salary shall be retained providing funding is available. In no event will
the salary exceed the maximum of the new pay grade.
3.39(5) Pay on reinstatement, reemployment or return
from leave.
a. An employee who is reinstated to the
previously occupied class or a class in the same pay grade as the previously
occupied class will be paid at a rate no less
greater than what the employee was last paid and between the minimum
and maximum of the pay grade and no higher than that provided at the
step of the pay grade at which the employee was last paid with the prior
approval of the resident director. An employee who is
reinstated to a lower class, or who is returned to a merit
system position from a professional position, will be paid in accordance with
subrule 3.39(4), pay on demotion. The date of reinstatement will be the merit
review date.
b. An employee who is reemployed to the previously
occupied class, will be paid at a rate no less
greater than what the employee was last paid and no higher
than and between the minimum and maximum of the pay grade
that provided at the step of the pay grade at which the employee was
last paid with the prior approval of the resident director. When a
merit increase has been granted to an employee in a position taken through
voluntary demotion in lieu of layoff and the merit increase results in a higher
rate of pay than last paid to the employee prior to the voluntary demotion in
lieu of layoff, the employee may be reemployed to the previously occupied class
with the higher rate of pay. Reemployment to the previously occupied position
or class of position from a position taken as a voluntary
demotion in lieu of layoff will not be considered a promotion. The merit review
date will not change as a result of the voluntary demotion in lieu of layoff,
nor as a result of reemployment to the previously occupied class from a position
taken as a voluntary demotion in lieu of layoff.
c. An employee who is reappointed to the previously
occupied position or a position in the same class on conclusion of a
leave without pay will be paid in accordance with the provisions concerning pay
on reemployment as provided above.
3.39(6) No change.
3.39(7) Pay on lateral transfer.
Employees who are transferred from:
a. One Employees who are transferred from
one position to another position in the same class shall receive no
adjustment in base pay;
b. One class Employees who are transferred
from one position to another class position
in a different class but in the same pay plan (matrix)
grade shall receive no adjustment in base pay except as set forth in
“c” and “d” and “f”
below;
c. One class to another class not in the same pay plan
(matrix) shall receive an adjustment to the closest rate that provides no
reduction in base pay except as set forth in “d” and “f”
below;
d c. One Employees
who are transferred from one class with a lower or no advanced starting rate
to a class with a higher advanced starting rate shall receive:
(1) An adjustment to the higher advanced starting rate if the
base pay prior to lateral transfer is less than the higher advanced
starting rate, and if the minimum qualifications are met for the
class. When the base pay adjustment is the salary equivalent of the
value of a step or greater, an adjustment in merit review date will
result, and be computed from the effective date of
lateral transfer and in accordance with 3.39(2); or
(2) No There will be no adjustment in
base pay if the employee’s base pay prior to lateral transfer is
not less than the higher advanced starting rate. , and if the
minimum qualifications are met for the class and the classes are in the same pay
plan (matrix); or
(3) An adjustment to the closest rate that provides no
reduction in base pay if the employee’s base pay prior to transfer is not
less than the higher advanced starting rate, and if the minimum qualifications
are met for the class and the classes are not in the same pay plan
(matrix).
e d. One Employees
who are transferred from one position in a class with a higher advanced
starting rate to a position in a class in the same pay grade but
with a lower or no advanced starting rate shall be paid in accordance with
subrule 3.39(4), “pay on demotion.” in the same plan
(matrix) shall receive, with prior approval of the resident
director:
(1) No adjustment in base pay; or
(2) An adjustment to any rate that is below the base
pay prior to transfer.
f e. One class with a higher
advanced starting rate to a class with a lower or no advanced starting rate not
in the same grade pay plan (matrix) shall receive, with prior approval of the
resident director:
(1) An adjustment to the closest rate that provides no
reduction in base pay; or
(2) An adjustment to any rate that is below the base
pay prior to transfer.
The above provisions notwithstanding, no employee will
receive base pay above the maximum step of the class following transfer. If the
base pay is adjusted to Step 1, the merit review date shall be changed in
accordance with 3.39(2) if scheduled more than six months from the effective
date of transfer; otherwise it shall remain unchanged In no case may
an employee be paid below the minimum or above the maximum for a
classification.
3.39(8) Pay on reassignment of a revised class
of position to a different pay grade upon change in pay grade of
class. If the class of position is revised and reassigned
to a higher pay grade, subrule 3.39(3), Pay pay on
promotion, will apply.
If the class of position is
revised, and reassigned to a lower pay grade, subrule
3.39(4), Pay pay on demotion, will apply.
3.39(9) No change.
3.39(10) Pay for exceptional performance. An
employee may be given pay for exceptional performance, not to exceed 5 percent
of an employee’s current annual salary, at the written request of the
employee’s department head with appropriate administrative approval and
the prior approval of the resident director. The request will describe the
nature of the exceptional job performance for which additional pay is requested,
indicate the amount proposed, and specify the source of funds. The award may be
based on sustained superior performance or an exceptional achievement or
contribution during the period since the employee’s last performance
review. To qualify for an exceptional performance award, an employee must have
a cumulative performance evaluation exceeding standards and have no individual
rating below satisfactory. Payment will be made as a lump sum award and will
not change the employee’s established salary rate. No employee will be
eligible for more than one award a year.
3.39(11) No change.
3.39(12) Lead Pay for lead
worker status. On request of an employing department and with approval of
the resident director, an employee who is assigned and performs limited
supervisory duties (such as distributing work assignments, maintaining a
balanced workload within a group, and keeping attendance and work records) in
addition to regular duties, may be designated as lead worker in the
classification assigned, and paid during the period of such designation
a salary equivalent to a one–step increase the
employee’s base salary plus the equivalent of one step.
3.39(13) Pay for trainees and apprentices.
The schedule of wages for trainees and apprentices will consist of a
step in the pay matrix for every year of training required. Each
employee whose performance is satisfactory as determined by the employing
department will progress one–half of the value of a step every six
months from the first step minimum of the
schedule pay grade to the entrance rate established for
the journey class at the completion of time established for training or
apprenticeship.
3.39(14) Pay for returning veterans. Veterans who
return from military leave will have their rate of pay set at
the appropriate merit step rate they would have attained
had they continued in service at the regents institution from which they took
military leave.
3.39(15) and 3.39(16) No change.
3.39(17) Pay for time on–call. At the
request of an institution, the board of regents may authorize the compensation
of employees for time spent on–call. At the request of the
employer, employees who are off duty and free to engage in their own pursuits
shall be considered on–call, provided (a) that they leave word with the
employer where to be reached if needed, and (b) that they are able to report
ready for work within a specified time after being contacted by the employer.
The rate for on–call pay shall be determined by the merit system
director.
3.39(18) No change.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section
19A.9.
ITEM 7. Amend rules 681—3.50(19A)
through 681— 3.52(19A) as follows:
681—3.50(19A) Applications. Applications for
employment will contain no question so formed as to elicit any
information prohibited by state or federal statutes, and the truth of
statements made on the application will be certified by the signature of the
applicant. Public announcement of vacancies will be made for ten calendar
days in classifications for which applications are not accepted on a continuous
basis. Persons with disabilities may request specific examination
accommodations. Reasonable accommodations will be granted in accordance with
policies established by the institution. Applications will be kept on file at
the institution for a period of time to be designated by the resident
director.
681—3.51(19A) Examinations. Entrance to
the service will be conducted on an open competitive basis. Examinations must
be approved by the merit system director. Examinations may, at the designation
of the resident director, be conducted on a continuous basis, or they may be
offered periodically as need or anticipated need for employees arises.
Examinations will be practical in nature, constructed to reveal the capacity to
successfully perform the job for which the applicant is competing, and will be
rated objectively. They will be structured for necessary minimum levels
of competence.
681—3.52(19A) Character of examinations.
Examinations may be assembled or unassembled and may be
include written, or
oral, and may include physical, or
performance tests, or any combination of these. They
Examinations may take into consideration screen
for such factors as education, experience, aptitude, knowledge, character,
physical fitness, or other qualifications or attributes which enter into the
determination of the relative fitness of applicants. The examination process
must be approved by each institution’s resident director.
Persons with disabilities may request specific examination
accommodations. Reasonable accommodations will be granted in accordance with
policies established by the institution.
Veterans preference shall be applied as provided by
law.
3.52(1) Assembled
examinations. Assembled examinations will be conducted for those classes for
which written tests are practical. Such examinations may include one or more of
the following in addition to the written tests: skill demonstration tests,
physical tests, oral interviews and evaluations of training and
experience.
3.52(2) Unassembled
examinations. For those classes of a craft nature or where peculiar and
exceptional qualifications are required and competition through an assembled
examination is impractical, an unassembled examination may be held. Such
examinations will consist of an evaluation of a statement of training and
experience and such other materials as the applicants may be required to submit
as evidence of fitness for a position, and may include oral interviews for
evaluation of personal and technical qualifications and evaluations of other
factors which enter into the determination of the relative fitness of
applicants.
3.52(3) Simplified
examination procedure. For positions involving unskilled work, where the
character or conditions of employment make it impractical to supply the needs of
the institution through procedures prescribed above, the merit system director
may authorize the use of such other procedures as the merit system director
determines to be appropriate which will assure the selection of such employees
on the basis of merit and fitness. Examinations so given will conform with and
utilize such methods, forms, and techniques as the director may
require.
3.52(4) Special examination
procedure for applicants with disabilities. When the merit system
director determines that an examination procedure has the effect of screening
out otherwise qualified persons with disabilities on the basis of their
disability, the merit system director may authorize the use of a modified
procedure which will appropriately measure the applicants’ ability to
perform the essential functions of the position.
ITEM 8. Rescind and reserve rules
681—3.53(19A) and 681—3.54(19A).
ITEM 9. Amend rule 681—3.55(19A) as
follows:
681—3.55(19A) Rejection or disqualification of
applicants. The resident director may reject any applicant or, after
examination, may refuse to certify any candidate if it is found that the
person:
1. Does not meet the minimum required qualifications for the
class;
2. Cannot perform the essential functions of the position
due to a disability with or without a reasonable
accommodation;
3. Habitually uses narcotics or uses intoxicating beverages to
excess;
4. Has made a false statement of material fact in the
application;
5. Has information concerning the examination to which the
person is not entitled;
6. Has been convicted of a felony
crime which makes the person unsuitable for employment in a particular
class or position;
7. Has been dismissed from private or public service for a
cause that would be detrimental to the regents institution employing the
applicant.
A disqualified applicant or eligible will
promptly be notified in writing of such action at the last–known address.
A disqualified applicant or eligible may request review of the
reason for disqualification. Such request will be in writing and upon
the receipt, the resident director will give full consideration
to the request, and notify the applicant of the resident
director’s decision in writing.
ITEM 10. Rescind and reserve rule
681—3.56(19A).
ITEM 11. Amend rules 681—3.67(19A)
to 681— 3.70(19A) as follows:
681—3.67(19A) Eligibility lists.
Insofar as possible, eligibility lists will be established and
maintained by the resident director to fill the employment needs of the
institution. Three kinds of eligibility lists are
provided will be established: reemployment, employment, and
promotional, each of which will be maintained by class of
position.
Reemployment lists will consist of the names of permanent
employees who have been laid off or demoted in lieu of layoff or who are able
and qualified to return to work following a medically related disability leave,
in accordance with 3.104(4)“j” and 3.143(19A) or in accordance
with 3.90(4). These lists will be maintained in order by retention points
calculated in accordance with the approved formula rules
for reduction in force, beginning with the person with the highest number of
points. Reemployment rights apply only to classes for which the employee is
eligible in accordance with these rules.
Employment lists will be established as the result of
competitive examinations and will consist of include the names
of all applicants who have qualified by passing examinations and who
have not been disqualified in accordance with these rules meet the
qualifications for a classification. Employment lists will be maintained
in order of test score achievement beginning with the highest
for specific classifications designated for continuous acceptance of
applications in accordance with rule 3.50(19A).
Promotional eligibility lists will consist of
the names of all permanent employees who are qualified and have requested
consideration for promotion unless an employing department requests that the
promotional list be limited to permanent employees of that department.
3.67(1) Removal of names from eligibility lists. In
addition to the causes for rejection or disqualification set forth under
3.55(19A), the resident director may permanently or temporarily remove names
from eligibility lists for the following reasons:
a. On Upon receipt of a
written statement notification from eligibles
applicants that they no longer desire consideration for a position in the
class.
b. Appointment through certification from such eligibility
list to fill a permanent position.
c. Failure to respond within five working days to the written
inquiry of the resident director relative to availability for
appointment.
d. Declination of appointment without good cause or under
conditions which the eligibles applicants previously
indicated they would accept.
e. Failure to appear for a scheduled employment interview or
to report for duty within a reasonable time specified by the employing
department.
f. Failure to maintain a record of their current address with
the resident director as evidenced by the return of a properly addressed
unclaimed letter or other evidence.
g. Willful violation of any of the provisions of these
rules.
h. If a department passes over the name of an
applicant certified to fill a vacancy in the same class and employs applicants
with lower scores on three separate occasions, the department may request that
the resident director not refer the applicant to that department for future
vacancies in that class for a period not to exceed two years.
3.67(2) Duration of eligibility lists.
Employment and promotional eligibility lists will exist for a period of
time no less than one year and no more than three years as designated by the
resident director. Eligibility lists may be continuous or closed
after a vacancy is filled. Reemployment eligibility lists will
exist for a period of two years. Names may be added to or deleted from
eligibility lists in accordance with these rules. The names of applicants who
have not been appointed or otherwise removed from lists will be removed at the
termination of the designated period of time designated by
the resident director.
3.67(3) Notification of
removal from eligibility lists. Applicants whose names are removed from
eligibility lists for any reason other than 3.67(1)“a,”
3.67(1)“b,” 3.67(1)“c,” or 3.67(1)“f,” will
be immediately notified of such removal in writing by the resident
director.
3.67( 4 3) Precedence of
eligibility lists. For appointment to permanent positions, eligibility
lists will be used as follows:
Reemployment lists will supersede employment and promotional
lists.
681—3.68(19A) Personnel requisitions. Requests
to fill vacancies in permanent positions will be initiated in
writing by the requesting department and forwarded to the resident
director. The request will include the class of the position to be filled, the
number of vacancies and the date of need.
681—3.69(19A) Certification from eligibility lists.
The resident director will certify the names of eligible candidates in the
following manner:
From a reemployment list the resident director will certify
for appointment in the following order:
1. If the vacancy occurs in a college or operating division in
which employees on the reemployment list for that class were last employed, the
resident director will certify the one employee highest with
the greatest number of retention points on the list who was laid off,
demoted or took a medically related disability leave from that college or
division; or
2. If the vacancy occurs in a college or operating division
other than the one in which any employee on the reemployment list for that class
was last employed, the resident director will certify the names of the
six employees standing highest on the reemployment list.
When the reemployment list for a class has been exhausted,
employing departments may request either the employment list or promotional
list or both, and the resident director will certify the registers.
for employment candidates on the eligibility register of the employment
list for the appropriate class or names of candidates on the promotional lists
for the appropriate class. Employing departments may request the names of
candidates from either or both lists.
3.69(1) Eligibility registers. An eligibility
register will consist of the names of the certified applicants for a
specific vacancy. on the appropriate employment eligibility
list who received the highest six scores.
In the interest of speed and efficiency in the
selection process, candidates may be certified and referred to more than one
vacancy at the same time. However, with reasonable regard for candidates
standing highest on eligibility lists, a resident director will not be required
to make simultaneous certification of the same name on different certifications
made concurrently for the same class of position. If more than one vacancy in
the same class exists at the same time in one department, the resident director
may certify and refer to that department the names of applicants on the
eligibility list who received the next score below those included on the
register. Such an additional certification may be made for each vacancy in
excess of one.
For positions in traditionally segregated job classes
in which there is a manifest imbalance reflecting substantial
underrepresentation of women or minorities, the resident director shall, if
possible, certify for inclusion on the eligibility register the names of female
or minority applicants receiving the highest score on the competitive
examination if women or minorities are not already included in the highest six
scores.
Traditionally segregated job classes in which there is
a manifest imbalance reflecting substantial underrepresentation of women or
minorities shall be identified as problem areas in the most recent affirmative
action plan of the regent institution in which the position is
available.
3.69(2) Special qualifications. An employing
department may request in writing that the resident director certify for
appointment candidates applicants who have special
qualifications in addition to the minimum qualifications prescribed in the class
specifications. If, in the judgment of the resident director, such a request is
validly related to job performance, the resident director may certify,
in the order of their standing on the eligibility list, only the names
of eligibles applicants who have such special
qualifications.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section
19A.9(7).
681—3.70(19A) Selection of employees.
Employing departments will notify the resident director of all vacancies
in permanent positions as far in advance of the date of need as possible. The
resident director will certify as approved for appointment names of candidates
in accordance with these rules. Final selection will be made by the
employing department. Nothing in these rules will require the hiring of any
candidate applicant. When a properly certified
candidate applicant is selected by a department, the
department will so notify the resident director.
ITEM 12. Amend rule 681—3.82(19A)
as follows:
681—3.82(19A) Temporary appointments. Temporary
appointments may be made and approved by the resident director to provide for
services needed on a periodic basis. Appointments may be made without
reference to the provision of these rules regarding minimum qualifications,
certification, and selection. Employees appointed on this basis will not
work more than 960 780 hours in any fiscal year,
but may, at the request of the employing department, be returned to duty in
successive years.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section
19A.9.
ITEM 13. Rescind and reserve rule
681—3.83(19A).
ITEM 14. Amend rule 681—3.85(19A)
as follows:
681—3.85(19A) Project appointment. When it is
known that a particular job, project, grant or contract will require the
services of an employee for a limited duration, a project appointment may be
made. Such an appointment will not be made for more than one year. While an
extension beyond one year may be approved by the merit system director on the
basis of a limited need that could not otherwise be efficiently and effectively
filled, successive project appointments will not be allowed.
Such appointments will not confer to the individual any right
of position, transfer, demotion, or promotion, but incumbents shall be eligible
for vacation and sick leave, except that a project appointment made for less
than 120 days or 960 780 hours will be considered a
temporary appointment under rule 3.82(19A) without conferring rights or
eligibility for vacation or sick leave.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code sections 19A.9
and 70A.1.
ITEM 15. Rescind and reserve rule
681—3.86(19A).
ITEM 16. Amend rule 681—3.87(19A)
as follows:
681—3.87(19A) Permanent appointments. A
candidate An applicant who is certified from an eligibility
register and appointed with the approval of the resident director to a permanent
position, and who successfully completes a probationary period in accordance
with these rules, will have permanent status.
ITEM 17. Rescind and reserve rule
681—3.88(19A).
ITEM 18. Amend rule 681—3.89(19A)
as follows:
681—3.89(19A) Reinstatement. A permanent
employee who has resigned in good standing may be reappointed without
certification from an eligibility list to a position in the same class
or pay grade from which the employee resigned or a lower class for which
qualified, provided that such reappointment is made within a period of
time no greater than the period of the employee’s previous employment and
in no case more than two years after the date of the employee’s
resignation and provided there is no reemployment list for that
class.
With approval of the resident director, an employee
who achieved permanent status in a merit system classification and was promoted
subsequently to a professional position at a regent institution may be returned
during the employee’s current continuous employment to a vacant position
in the employee’s previous classification or to a vacant position in a
lower classification provided the employee meets current minimum requirements
and there is no reemployment register for the class.
ITEM 19. Amend rule 681—3.90(19A)
as follows:
681—3.90(19A) Probationary period.
3.90(1) No change.
3.90(2) Duration of probation. A
candidate An employee on original appointment or who is
certified from an employment list and appointed to a permanent
position reinstated or reemployed to a class not previously held
will be on probation until the person completes six months of active service in
the position to which appointed. If a probationary employee is not dismissed
during this time, the person will, at the conclusion of the probationary period,
have permanent status in that class. A period of temporary employment
immediately preceding a permanent appointment to the same class may, at the
request of the employing department, be counted as probationary
service.
Employees Permanent employees who are
promoted from one class to another, or who transfer out of class, or who
demote will serve a period of probation for either three or
of six months in the position to which appointed. If the employee is
not dismissed during this time, the employee will, at the conclusion of the
probationary period, have permanent status in the class. during
which time they will retain all of their rights under the merit system except
that of permanency in the new class. The duration of said probation shall be
three months unless prior to the promotion the employee’s department head
requests and receives approval of the resident director to provide a
six–month probationary period, and so informs the employee. Employees who
voluntarily demote out of a classification series will serve a period of
probation for three months during which time they will retain all of their
rights under the merit system except that of permanency in the new
class.
3.90(3) Layoffs during probation. Certified
employees Employees who are laid off without
prejudice during their probationary period will, upon written request
to the resident director, be returned to placed on the
appropriate eligibility list from which they were
certified.
3.90(4) Dismissal during probation. Certified
employees who are rejected Employees on original
appointment or who have been reinstated or reemployed and dismissed during
their probationary period may be returned to the eligibility list from which
they were appointed or placed on the reemployment list for a previously
held classification in the case of a promotional probationary if, in
the judgment of the resident director, they may be able to perform
satisfactorily in another position. Employees who are promoted from one
class to another or who transfer out of class or who demote out of class series
and are dismissed during their probationary period may be placed on the
reemployment list for a previously held classification if, in the judgment of
the resident director, they may be able to perform satisfactorily in another
position.
ITEM 20. Amend subrule 3.104(4) as
follows:
3.104(4) Reduction in force. Nothing herein shall be
construed as a guarantee of hours of work per day or per work period. An
institution may lay off an employee when it deems necessary because of shortage
of funds or work, a material change in duties or organization or abolishment of
one or more positions. The individual whose position is eliminated or
reduced in hours will be reassigned to a vacant position in the same
classification provided the individual can perform the essential functions of
the position and possesses any required special qualifications. If there is no
vacant position to which the individual can be reassigned, When
individual(s) directly affected is identified the individual(s) may
request and accept layoff with reemployment rights as provided in
3.104(4)“j.” If an individual(s) directly affected does not request
layoff with reemployment rights, the reduction in force procedures which follow
shall be implemented. Reduction in force will be accomplished in a systematic
manner and will be made in accordance with formula
developed by the institution and reviewed and approved by the merit system
director for its conformance to these rules; however, the layoff rules
established in this subrule shall not apply to temporary layoffs of less than 20
workdays or 160 hours of work per calendar year:
a. Reduction in force will be made by class of
position.
b. Reduction in force may be made by organizational unit
within an institution or institutionwide, as designated by the institution,
provided such designation is reported to the merit system director before the
effective date of the reduction.
c. The order of reduction in force will be by type of
appointment as follows: emergency, temporary, provisional, trainee, initial
probationary, permanent.
d. Each permanent employee affected by a reduction in
force will be notified in writing of the layoff and the reasons for it at least
20 working days prior to the effective date of the layoff unless
budgetary limitations require a lesser period of notice.
e. There will be competition among all employees in the class
of position or positions affected by the layoff based on a
retention points system that will consist of points for length of service and
performance evaluation of all employees in the class within the organizational
unit or units affected. Retention points will be calculated as
follows:
(1) Length of service credit will be allowed at the rate of
one point for each month of service. For the purpose of computing length of
service credits, the institution will include all continuous periods of
employment between the date of the original appointment and the date of layoff
or as provided otherwise by law. Periods of leave without pay
exceeding 30 days will not be counted. Approved leaves of absence
without pay, suspensions and layoffs for periods exceeding 15 consecutive days
will not be counted; however the periods of service immediately preceding and
following such periods will be counted. An employee who is returned to duty
following approved military service will have all such time counted as
continuous service. When employees are off the payroll of the institution for
more than 15 consecutive days for a reason other than an approved leave of
absence, suspension, layoff or military service, the date that they return to
duty will be considered the date of original appointment for purposes of
computing retention points.
(2) Performance evaluation credit will be allowed at the rate
of one point for each month of satisfactory service rated as
satisfactory under a performance evaluation plan approved by the institutions
and the merit system director. An additional point will be added for each month
of service during which performance is rated one or more levels above
satisfactory. No credit will be allowed for service rated less than
satisfactory. No performance evaluations which are made less than three
months prior to a reduction in force will be used in determining performance
evaluation credits. In the absence of a performance evaluation review, service
will be considered as satisfactory and one point will be given for each month
thereof. If there is no record of performance evaluation for a
specific time period, it shall be presumed that the employee’s performance
is satisfactory.
(3) Length of service and performance evaluation
points for service less than full–time will be prorated in accordance with
the percent of fractional employment. Reduction in force retention
points will be the total of length of service and performance evaluation
points in accordance with the approved formula.
f. Employees will be placed on the layoff list beginning with
the employee with the greatest number of retention points at top. Layoffs will
be made from the list in reverse order unless the employee with the least
retention points has special skills and abilities. Copies of the
computation of retention points will be made available to affected employees.
One copy will be retained by the resident director and one copy will be
forwarded to the merit system director at least ten days prior to the effective
date of the layoff.
g. When two or more employees have the same total of retention
points, the order of termination will be determined by giving preference for
retention to the employee who has the highest total earnings in the
class of position affected by the layoff excluding pay for special assignment,
overtime, call back, lead worker status, shift differential, and
on–call with the longest time in the class.
h. The reduction in force formula plan
approved by the merit system director will be posted made
available by the resident director so that all employees will have access to
it.
i. An affected employee may appeal a reduction in force by
filing, within five days after notification as provided in paragraph
“d” of this subrule, a written grievance with the resident director
(at Step 3 of the grievance procedure provided in 3.129(19A) or at a comparable
step of a procedure approved under 3.129(1)). If not satisfied with the
decision rendered at that step, the employees may pursue their appeal in
accordance with the grievance procedure.
j. A permanent employee in a class of
position in which layoffs are to be effected may, in lieu of layoff,
elect voluntary demotion to a position in the next lower class of
position in the same series utilized at the
institution, or, in the absence of a lower class in the
same series, to a class of position which the employee has
formerly occupied while in the continuous employment of the institution. The
employee must possess any special qualifications required and have the ability
to perform the essential functions of the position. Such demotion or the
occupying of a formerly held position will not be permitted,
however, if the result thereof would be to cause the layoff of a
permanent employee with a greater combined total of retention
points. To exercise the right of voluntary demotion or to occupy a formerly
held position classification in lieu of layoff, the
employee must notify the resident director in writing of such election not later
than five calendar days after receiving notice of layoff. Any permanent
employee displaced under these provisions will have the right of election as
provided herein.
Employees who are laid off or who accept voluntary demotion
in a series or assignment to a previously held position in lieu of layoff
will, at their request, have their names placed on the reemployment eligibility
list(s) for the class from which they were laid off
for a period of up to two years from the date of layoff, either the
lower class(es) in the same series or a class formerly occupied in accordance
with 3.67(19A) to 3.70(19A), or both.
Employees who are laid off will, at their request, have
their names placed on the reemployment eligibility list for the class from which
they were laid off and lower class(es) in the same series from which they were
laid off and class(es) formerly occupied in accordance with 3.67(19A) to
3.70(19A) for a period of up to two years from the date of layoff. Acceptance
of reemployment in a lower or previously held class will not affect the
employee’s standing on the reemployment list for the class that the
employee formerly occupied.
ITEM 21. Amend subrules 3.116(1) to
3.116(4) as follows:
3.116(1) Suspension. A department head may, for cause
in accordance with 3.115(19A), suspend any employee for such length of time as
it the department head considers appropriate but not to
exceed 10 days at any one time or 20 days in any 12–month period. The
department head will inform the affected employee of the suspension and the
reasons therefor in writing within 24 hours of the time the action is taken. A
copy of the suspension will be sent by the department to the resident director
and will be maintained in the employee’s personal
personnel file. Employees may appeal the action directly to Step 2 of
the grievance procedure specified in 3.129(19A) or to a comparable step in the
grievance procedure approved in accordance with 3.129(1). If not satisfied with
the decision rendered at that step, employees may pursue their appeal in
accordance with the grievance procedure.
3.116(2) Reduction of pay within grade. A department
head may, for cause in accordance with 3.115(19A), reduce the pay of an employee
to a lower step rate of pay within the pay grade
assigned to the class of position. The department head will
notify the affected employee of the reduction, the reasons therefor and the
duration thereof, in writing within 24 hours of the time the action is taken. A
copy of the reduction notice will be sent by the department to the resident
director and will be maintained in the employee’s
personal personnel file. Employees may appeal the
action directly to Step 2 of the grievance procedure specified in 3.129(19A) or
a comparable step in a grievance procedure approved in accordance with 3.129(1).
If not satisfied with the decision rendered at that step, the employees may
pursue their appeal in accordance with the grievance procedure.
3.116(3) Demotion. A department head may, for cause
in accordance with 3.115(19A), demote an employee to a vacant position in a
lower class provided the employee meets the qualifications for that lower class.
The department head will notify the affected employee of the demotion and the
reasons therefor in writing within 24 hours of the time the action is taken. A
copy of the notice of demotion will be sent by the department to the resident
director and will be maintained in the employee’s
personal personnel file. Employees may appeal the
action directly to Step 2 of the grievance procedure specified in 3.129(19A) or
a comparable step in a grievance procedure approved in accordance with 3.129(1).
If not satisfied with the decision rendered at that step, the employees may
pursue their appeal in accordance with the grievance procedure.
3.116(4) Discharge. A department head may, for cause
in accordance with 3.115(19A), discharge any employee. The department head will
notify the affected employee of thedischarge and reasons therefor in writing
within 24 hours of the time the action is taken. A copy of the notice of
discharge will be sent by the department to the resident director andwill be
maintained in the employee’s personal personnel
file. Employees may appeal the action directly to Step 2 of the grievance
procedure specified in 3.129(19A) or a comparable step in a grievance procedure
approved in accordance with 3.129(1). If not satisfied with the decision
rendered at that step, employees may pursue their appeal in accordance with the
grievance procedure.
ITEM 22. Amend rule 681—3.143(19A)
as follows:
681—3.143(19A) Medically related
disability Sick leave. Permanent and probationary employees
will accrue medically related disability sick leave as
provided by law and will be entitled to such leave on presentation of
satisfactory evidence of medically related disability. Permanent
part–time employees will accrue medically related
disability sick leave in an amount equivalent to their
fractional employment, and no employees will be granted medically
related disability sick leave in excess of their
accumulation.
An employee who is transferred, promoted or demoted from one
position to another position under this system will not lose any accumulated
medically related disability sick leave as a result
thereof.
Permanent employees who are still
incapacitated have recovered after exhausting all accumulated
medically related disability sick leave and vacation
time and have medical release to return to work will, at their request,
be placed on the reemployment lists for the class of position
they previously occupied and on reemployment lists for lower level classes for
which qualified, when employees are able and qualified to return to
work. Such employee acceptance of reemployment in a lower class will
not affect their the employee’s standing on the
reemployment list for the class that the employee formerly occupied.
ITEM 23. Amend rule 681—3.144(19A)
as follows:
681—3.144(19A) Military leave. Permanent and
probationary employees will be granted military leave as provided by law, with
pay not to exceed 30 calendar days in any 12–month period
a calendar year.
ITEM 24. Amend rules 681—3.147(19A)
and 681— 3.148(19A) as follows:
681—3.147(19A) Voting leave.
Any If an employee’s working hours do not allow a
three–hour period outside of working hours during which the polls are
open, any person entitled to vote in a public election is entitled to time
off from work with pay on any public election day for a period not to exceed two
hours in length. Application for time off for voting should be made to the
employee’s supervisor prior to election day. The time to be taken off may
be designated by the supervisor. Time off for voting may be granted
only if the employee’s working hours do not allow a three–hour
period outside of working hours during which the polls are
open.
681—3.148(19A) Emergency and funeral leave. An
employing department will, when satisfied by evidence presented, grant an
employee time off with pay:
1. Not to exceed three days for each occurrence in the case of
death in the employee’s immediate family.
2. Not to exceed one day for each occurrence for service as a
pallbearer at the funeral of a person not a member of the employee’s
immediate family; and
3. Not to exceed five days a year for the temporary emergency
care of ill or injured members of the employee’s immediate family for the
time necessary to permit the employee to make other arrangements.
All such time off will be charged to the employee’s
accrued medically related disability sick leave and will
not be granted in excess of the employee’s accrued leave. For the purpose
of this rule, immediate family is defined as and limited to spouse,
children (and their spouses), parents, grandparents, grandchildren, foster
children (and their spouses), brothers (and their spouses), sisters (and their
spouses) of the employee or spouse; aunts and uncles of the employee; or other
relatives residing in the employee’s immediate household the
employee’s spouse, children, grandchildren, foster children, stepchildren,
legal wards, parents, grandparents, foster parents, stepparents, brothers,
foster brothers, stepbrothers, sons–in–law,
brothers–in–law, sisters, foster sisters, stepsisters,
daughters–in–law, sisters–in–law, aunts, uncles, nieces,
nephews, first cousins, corresponding relatives of the employee’s spouse,
and other persons who are members of the employee’s
household.
ARC 1530B
SOIL CONSERVATION
DIVISION[27]
Notice of Intended Action
Twenty–five interested persons, a
governmental subdivision, an agency or association of 25 or more persons may
demand an oral presentation hereon as provided in Iowa Code section
17A.4(1)“b.”
Notice is also
given to the public that the Administrative Rules Review Committee may, on its
own motion or on written request by any individual or group, review this
proposed action under section 17A.8(6) at a regular or special meeting where the
public or interested persons may be heard.
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 161A.4(1), the
Division of Soil Conservation gives Notice of Intended Action to amend Chapter
10, “Iowa Financial Incentive Program for Soil Erosion Control,”
Iowa Administrative Code.
These proposed amendments allow soil and water conservation
districts to utilize other public funds in combination with state
cost–share funds. These amendments also establish two new permanent
practices, tree planting and conservation cover.
Any interested person may make written suggestions or comments
on these proposed amendments prior to 4:30 p.m. on April 24, 2002. Such written
material should be directed to William McGill or Kenneth Tow, Division of Soil
Conservation, Department of Agriculture and Land Stewardship, Wallace State
Office Building, Des Moines, Iowa 50319. Comments may also be submitted by fax
to (515)281–6170 or sent by E–mail to
Ken.Tow@idals.state.ia.us.
A public hearing will be held on Wednesday, April 24, 2002, at
10 a.m. in the south half of the Second Floor Conference Room of the Wallace
State Office Building, East Ninth and Grand Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa. Comments
at the hearing may be presented either orally or in writing.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter
161A.
The following amendments are proposed.
ITEM 1. Amend subrule 10.41(9) as
follows:
10.41(9) Funds distributed to annual programs and
provided to districts may be used in combination with other public funds on
grade stabilization structures permanent practices, in
accordance with the following:
a. The maximum cost–share rate realized by the landowner
shall not exceed 75 percent when state cost–share funds appropriated to
the division and districts are utilized in combination with other public
funds.
b. Funds utilized by districts in conjunction with such
projects shall come from the district’s regular allocation.
c. Only grade stabilization structures established in
accordance with procedures pursuant to the rules shall be eligible for financial
incentive programs.
d c. The recipient will be required to
sign an a maintenance agreement as stated in subrule
10.74(5).
ITEM 2. Amend subrule 10.60(1) as
follows:
10.60(1) Voluntary.
a. The state will cost–share 50 percent of the cost
certified by the certifying technician as being reasonable, proper, and incurred
by the applicant in voluntarily installing approved, permanent soil conservation
practices, except for tree planting. Eligible costs include machine hire
or use of the applicant’s equipment, needed materials delivered to and
used at the site, and labor required to install the practice.
b. For tree planting, the following criteria shall
apply:
(1) Fifty percent of the actual cost, not to exceed $365
per acre, including the following:
1. Establishing ground cover;
2. Trees and tree planting operations;
3. Weed and pest control;
4. Mowing, disking, and spraying.
(2) Fifty percent of actual cost, not to exceed $120 per
acre, for wood plant control.
(3) Actual cost, not to exceed the lesser of $8 per rod or
$45 per acre protected, for permanent fences that protect planted acres from
grazing, excluding boundary and road fencing.
b c. For currently funded fiscal
years, the division will make one–time payments of up to $10 per acre for
no–tillage, ridge–till and strip–till; $6 per acre for
contouring; and 50 percent of the cost up to $25 per acre for
strip–cropping, field borders and filter strips.
c d. Funding for the restoration of
permanent practices damaged or destroyed because of a disaster (see 10.41(1))
does not have to be allocated on a cost–share basis.
ITEM 3. Amend subrule 10.82(3) by
adopting new paragraphs “l” and
“m” as follows:
l. Conservation cover. An established and maintained
permanent vegetation cover on land.
m. Tree planting. The establishment of a stand of trees for
timber producing and environmental improvement. The minimum eligible area is
three acres.
ITEM 4. Amend rule
27—10.84(161A,312), introductory paragraph, as follows:
27—10.84(161A,312) Specifications. These
specifications and the general conditions, rule 27—10.81(161A,312), shall
be met in all cases. In each specification the listed
USDA–Natural Resources Conservation Service specification in force on the
date indicated in these rules or the Department of Natural Resources Forestry
Technical Guide shall be used. To the extent of any inconsistency
between the general conditions and the specifications, the general conditions
shall control.
ITEM 5. Amend rule
27—10.84(161A,312) by adopting the following new
subrules:
10.84(20) Conservation cover.
USDA–NRCS–IOWA, Field Office Technical Guide, Section IV, Code No.
327, May 2001.
10.84(21) Tree planting. Department of natural
resources’s Forestry Technical Guide.
FILED EMERGENCY
ARC 1503B
HUMAN SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[441]
Adopted and Filed Emergency
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 239B.4 and 2002
Iowa Acts, House File 2340, the Department of Human Services hereby amends
Chapter 41, “Granting Assistance,” and Chapter 93, “PROMISE
JOBS Program,” appearing in the Iowa Administrative Code.
These amendments eliminate “well–being”
visits currently required for families whose Family Investment Program (FIP)
assistance has been canceled as a result of a participant’s choosing the
limited benefit plan for the second time. 2002 Iowa Acts, House File 2340,
terminates the Department’s contract with the Department of Public Health
for providing visits by qualified social service professionals. The legislation
provides that the Department may conduct these visits only if funding is
available. The Department no longer has the resources to support the cost of
these visits.
These amendments do not provide for waivers in specified
situations because a requirement is being eliminated and because of budget
constraints.
The Department of Human Services finds that notice and public
participation are impracticable and contrary to the public interest at this
time. The Department is statutorily and constitutionally required to reduce
spending obligations to the level of constitutionally authorized appropriations.
Therefore, these amendments are filed pursuant to Iowa Code section
17A.4(2).
The Department finds that these amendments remove a
restriction on former FIP participants and are required by statute to be
implemented by emergency rules. Therefore, these amendments are filed pursuant
to Iowa Code section 17A.5(2)“b”(2).
The Department also finds, pursuant to Iowa Code section
17A.5(2)“b”(1), that the normal effective date of these amendments
should be waived and these amendments made effective April 1, 2002, as
authorized by 2002 Iowa Acts, House File 2340, section 3.
These amendments are also published herein under Notice of
Intended Action as ARC 1504B to allow for public comment.
The Council on Human Services adopted these amendments March
13, 2002.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
239B.9.
These amendments became effective April 1, 2002.
The following amendments are adopted.
ITEM 1. Amend subrule 41.24(8) by
rescinding and reserving paragraph “e.”
ITEM 2. Amend subrule 93.138(3) by
rescinding and reserving paragraph “f.”
ITEM 3. Rescind and reserve subrule
93.138(4).
[Filed Emergency 3/14/02, effective 4/1/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/3/02.
ARC 1498B
HUMAN SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[441]
Adopted and Filed Emergency After Notice
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 217.6, the
Department of Human Services hereby amends Chapter 61, “Refugee Services
Program,” Iowa Administrative Code.
These amendments establish a pilot services program through
September 30, 2003, to make recredentialing services available for refugees who
have graduated from a foreign school as registered nurses or licensed practical
nurses. Eligible applicants may receive:
• Employability services
from the Bureau of Refugee Services.
• Practical assistance in
securing documents and services needed to achieve evaluation of credentials
earned outside the United States through appropriate United States professional
credentials–evaluation organizations.
• Payment of the initial fee
for services of professional credentials–evaluation
organizations.
• Payment for education or
training services to enable participants to achieve Iowa certification or
licensure, to a maximum of $5,000 per eligible refugee.
These amendments also clarify the relationship between the
Department’s Bureau of Refugee Services and counties awarded targeted
assistance grant funding from the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services
(HHS). HHS awards targeted assistance grants from formula allocation funds for
assistance to counties where a specific need for supplementation of available
resources for refugee services can be demonstrated. Factors considered include
unusually large refugee populations (including secondary migration), high
refugee concentrations, and high use of public assistance by refugees.
Polk County is currently the only county in Iowa eligible for
these funds. The amount of the most recent Polk County grant is $467,000. Polk
County supervisors have chosen to have the Bureau of Refugee Services administer
the grant.
Federal regulations require targeted assistance grants to be
used for employment–related services. The past and current Polk County
targeted assistance grants have been used to fund services and training that are
allowable under the Bureau’s rules. Current funding is used
for:
• Two job development/job
placement specialists.
• One medical translation
specialist.
• Sudanese Women’s
Employment Preparation Project.
• Certified nursing
assistant training.
• English as a second
language classes.
• Mental health
services.
• Truck driving
training.
• Driver’s license
classes.
• Pilot recredentialing
services for foreign–trained nurses.
The rule for the pilot recredentialing services for
foreign–trained nurses is adopted because of the limited and unique nature
of the pilot program.
The Council on Human Services adopted these amendments March
13, 2002. Notice of Intended Action regarding these amendments was published in
the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on February 6, 2002, as ARC
1330B.
The Department received no comments on these amendments. The
amendments are identical to those published under Notice of Intended
Action.
These amendments do not provide for waivers in specified
situations because these amendments either confer a benefit or clarify
administration of targeted assistance grants. Individuals may request a waiver
of eligibility conditions under the Department’s general rule on
exceptions at rule 441— 1.8(17A,217).
The Department finds that these amendments confer a benefit to
refugees who need this service. Therefore, these amendments are filed pursuant
to Iowa Code section 17A.5(2)“b”(2).
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
217.6.
These amendments became effective April 1, 2002.
EDITOR’S NOTE:
Pursuant to recommendation of the Administrative Rules Review Committee
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin, September 10, 1986, the text of
these amendments [61.16, 61.17] is being omitted. These amendments are
identical to those published under Notice as ARC 1330B, IAB
2/6/02.
[Filed Emergency After Notice 3/13/02, effective
4/1/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
[For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement
4/3/02.]
ARC 1524B
SECRETARY OF STATE[721]
Adopted and Filed Emergency
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 47.1, the
Secretary of State hereby adopts an amendment to Chapter 21, “Election
Forms and Instructions,” Iowa Administrative Code.
New rule 21.602(43) provides a process for determining whether
some political party write–in candidates have enough votes to be nominated
at the primary election. The Code of Iowa requires a minimum level of support
for candidates to be nominated at the primary election. For offices in which
there are candidates’ names printed on the ballot, a winning candidate
must receive at least 35 percent of the votes cast at the primary election. For
offices in which there are no candidates’ names printed on the primary
election ballot, the Iowa Code requires a minimum of 35 percent of the number of
votes cast for that office the last time the party had candidates on the ballot
in the primary election. There are also formulas for determining the minimum
number of write–in votes for candidates for township offices, and for
candidates for the Iowa House and Senate, even if there were no candidates for a
given political party in previous primary elections. However, there is no
guidance for other offices when a political party had no candidates on the
ballot in any previous primary election, as is the case with a new political
party.
This year the Iowa Green Party will appear on the primary
election ballot for the first time. This new rule sets the minimum number of
write–in votes needed for nomination to an office not already covered in
the Iowa Code at 35 percent of the number of votes cast in the county or
district for the party’s candidate for president or for governor, as the
case may be, in the preceding general election. This office appears on the
ballot in all precincts and thus will provide a basis for calculation for all
other offices.
In compliance with Iowa Code section 17A.4(2), the agency
finds that notice and public participation are unnecessary. The rule uses the
only election results available in each county of the state as the source for
calculation of primary election winners. The leadership of each of the three
political parties has been consulted and agrees with the proc–ess included
in this new rule.
Pursuant to Iowa Code section 17A.5(2)“b”(2) and
(3), this new rule shall become effective upon filing with the Administrative
Rules Coordinator. The Secretary of State finds that this amendment confers a
benefit upon the public by providing a necessary procedure for determining
whether candidates have received enough write–in votes for nomination at
the primary election. Copies of the proposed rule have been distributed to all
political parties for their comments. Only supportive comments have been
received.
This rule became effective March 15, 2002.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section
43.66.
The following new rule is adopted.
721—21.602(43) Primary election—nominations by
write–in votes for certain offices.
21.602(1) The process described in subrule 21.602(2)
shall be used to determine whether the primary election is conclusive and a
candidate was nominated for partisan offices that are:
a. Not mentioned in Iowa Code section 43.53 (township offices)
or 43.66 (state representative and state senator), and
b. For which no candidate’s name was printed on the
primary election ballot, and
c. For which no candidate’s name was printed on the
primary election ballot in any previous primary election.
21.602(2) To be nominated by write–in votes, the
person must receive at least 35 percent of the number of votes cast in the
previous general election for that party’s candidate for president of the
United States or for governor, as the case may be, as follows:
a. Statewide office: 35 percent of votes cast
statewide.
b. Congressional district: 35 percent of votes cast within
the current boundaries of the Congressional district.
c. County office, including plan II supervisors: 35 percent
of the votes cast within the county.
d. Plan III county supervisor: 35 percent of the votes cast
within the supervisor district. If the boundaries of the supervisor district
have changed since the previous general election, the number of votes cast
within the county for the party candidate for president or for governor, as the
case may be, shall be divided by the number of supervisor districts in the
county; then the quotient shall be multiplied by 0.35.
21.602(3) If a write–in candidate is declared
nominated at the canvass of votes, Iowa Code section 43.67, which requires the
appropriate election commissioner to notify the candidate, shall
apply.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section
43.66.
[Filed Emergency 3/15/02, effective 3/15/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/3/02.
FILED
ARC 1526B
EDUCATION
DEPARTMENT[281]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 256.7(5), the
State Board of Education hereby adopts amendments to Chapter 68,
“Conservation Education,” Iowa Administrative Code.
These amendments update the Department’s administration
of the conservation education program established in Iowa Code section 256.34.
These rules were last amended in 1991. A regulatory review of this chapter by
the Conservation Education Board found that several areas in the chapter
required updating.
Notice of Intended Action for these amendments was published
in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on December 26, 2001, as ARC
1194B.
A public hearing was held on January 15, 2002. Two written
informational inquires were received. One change was made from the Notice of
Intended Action due to the incorporation by reference of the program guidelines.
The introductory paragraph of rule 68.8(256) now reads as follows:
“281—68.8(256) Criteria. Preference will
be given, in formal and informal education programs, to materials capable of
being infused in multiple curricular areas. Also, preference will be given to
projects that encourage conservation stewardship. Proposals shall include, but
not be limited to, the following types of information that can be found in the
REAP/conservation education program applications and procedures
manual.”
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
256.34.
These amendments will become effective May 8, 2002.
EDITOR’S NOTE:
Pursuant to recommendation of the Administrative Rules Review Committee
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin, September 10, 1986, the text of
these amendments [68.1 to 68.4, 68.6(2), 68.6(3), 68.8, 68.9(1) to 68.9(3),
68.10, 68.11] is being omitted. With the exception of the change noted above,
these amendments are identical to those published under Notice as ARC
1194B, IAB 12/26/01.
[Filed 3/15/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published
4/3/02]
[For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement
4/3/02.]
ARC 1527B
EDUCATION
DEPARTMENT[281]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 256.7(5), the
State Board of Education hereby rescinds Chapter 77, “Standards for
Practitioner Preparation Programs,” Iowa Administrative Code.
The requirements of this chapter were incorporated into
281—Chapter 79, “Standards for Practitioner and Administrator
Preparation Programs,” in November 1999.
A waiver provision is not included. The State Board has
adopted a uniform waiver rule.
Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa
Administrative Bulletin on February 6, 2002, as ARC 1366B. No public
hearing was held. This amendment is identical to the Notice, as
published.
This amendment will become effective May 8, 2002.
This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code sections
256.7, 256.16 and 272.25(1).
The following amendment is adopted.
Rescind and reserve 281—Chapter 77.
[Filed 3/15/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/3/02.
ARC 1528B
EDUCATION
DEPARTMENT[281]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 256.7(5), the
State Board of Education hereby rescinds Chapter 78, “Standards for
Graduate Practitioner Preparation Programs,” Iowa Administrative
Code.
The requirements of this chapter were incorporated into
281—Chapter 79, “Standards for Practitioner and Administrator
Preparation Programs,” in November 1999.
A waiver provision is not included. The State Board has
adopted a uniform waiver rule.
Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa
Administrative Bulletin on February 6, 2002, as ARC 1367B. No public
hearing was held. This amendment is identical to the Notice, as
published.
This amendment will become effective May 8, 2002.
This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code sections
256.7, 256.16 and 272.25(1).
The following amendment is adopted.
Rescind and reserve 281—Chapter 78.
[Filed 3/15/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/3/02.
ARC 1490B
EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT
DIVISION[605]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 17A.3, 34A.6,
and 34A.22, the Emergency Management Division hereby amends Chapter 10,
“Enhanced 911 Telephone Systems,” Iowa Administrative
Code.
Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa
Administrative Bulletin on February 6, 2002, as ARC 1347B. No public
comment was received on these amendments. These amendments are identical to the
amendments published under Notice of Intended Action.
These amendments to the current rules and the Wireless
Enhanced 911 Implementation and Operation Plan provide more definitive eligible
cost guidelines for Public Safety Answering Points and further clarify the
process that the Public Safety Answering Points use to recover these eligible
costs from the Wireless E911 Emergency Communications Fund. Additionally, a new
subrule addresses how the Division will recover overpayment of funds. Finally,
the administrative hearing process in 605—10.15(34A) is amended.
These amendments were adopted by the Emergency Management
Division on March 14, 2002.
These amendments shall become effective May 8, 2002.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter
34A.
The following amendments are adopted.
ITEM 1. Amend subrule 10.7(2) as
follows:
10.7(2) Adoption by reference. The “Wireless
Enhanced 911 Implementation and Operation Plan,” effective February 1,
2000, and available from the Emergency Management Division, Hoover State Office
Building, Des Moines, Iowa, or at the Law Library in the Capitol Building, Des
Moines, Iowa, is hereby adopted by reference with the following changes
effective May 8, 2002: Section F, provide further clarification of eligible
costs for public safety answering points and the Iowa department of public
safety; Section G, provide further specification on the surplus payment process
for local E911 service boards and the Iowa department of public safety;
Attachment A, ensure that the application for surplus payments contains the
language contained in Section G.
ITEM 2. Amend subrule 10.9(8) as
follows:
10.9(8) The department of public safety or a joint E911
service board, to receive funds from the E911 emergency communications funds,
must shall submit a an annual
written request for such funds to the E911 program manager in a form as
approved by the E911 program manager. This approved application form
is contained in the “Wireless Enhanced 911 Implementation and Operation
Plan.” This application form is due on May 15 or the next business
day.
ITEM 3. Amend rule 605—10.9(34A) by
adopting the following new subrule:
10.9(11) If it is found that an overpayment has been
made to an entity, the E911 program manager shall attempt recovery of the debt
from the entity by certified letter. Due diligence shall be documented and
retained at the emergency management division. If resolution of the debt does
not occur and the debt is at least $50, the emergency management division will
then utilize the income offset program through the department of revenue and
finance. Until resolution of the debt has occurred, the emergency management
division may withhold future payments to the entity.
ITEM 4. Amend subrules 10.15(2) to
10.15(6) as follows:
10.15(2) Request for a hearing shall be made in
writing to the E911 program manager emergency management
division administration bureau chief within 30 days of the
administrator’s E911 program manager’s
mailing or serving a decision and shall state the reason(s) for the request
and shall be signed by the appropriate authority.
10.15(3) The E911 program manager
administration bureau chief shall schedule a hearing within ten working
days of receipt of the request for hearing. The E911 program
manager administration bureau chief shall preside over the
hearing, at which time the appellant may present any evidence,
documentation, or other information regarding the matter in dispute.
10.15(4) The E911 program manager
administration bureau chief shall issue a ruling regarding the matter
within 20 working days of the hearing.
10.15(5) Any party adversely affected by the
E911 program manager’s administration bureau
chief’s ruling may file a written request for a rehearing within 20
days of issuance of the ruling. A rehearing will be conducted only when
additional evidence is available, the evidence is material to the case, and good
cause existed for the failure to pre–sent the evidence at the initial
hearing. The E911 program manager administration bureau
chief will schedule a hearing within 20 days after the receipt of the
written request. The E911 program manager administration
bureau chief shall issue a ruling regarding the matter within 20 working
days of the hearing.
10.15(6) Any party adversely affected by the
E911 program manager’s administration bureau
chief’s ruling may file a written appeal to the administrator of the
emergency management division. The appeal request shall contain information
identifying the appealing party, the ruling being appealed, specific findings or
conclusions to which exception is taken, the relief sought, and the grounds for
relief. The administrator shall issue a ruling regarding the matter within 90
days of the hearing. The administrator’s ruling constitutes final agency
action for purposes of judicial review.
[Filed 3/14/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/3/02.
ARC 1533B
GENERAL SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[401]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 7A.30 and
18.4, the Department of General Services hereby amends Chapter 10,
“Inventory Guidelines for State of Iowa Personal and Real Property,”
Iowa Administrative Code.
These amendments incorporate standards set by the federal
Office of Management and Budget (OMB) Circular A87, Attachment B, 19a(2).
Agencies will be required to report fewer fixed assets for the statewide
Comprehensive Annual Financial Report (CAFR). Fixed assets valued at less than
$5000 will not have to be reported. The former limit was $2000. Agreement on
this change was reached by the Governmental Accounting Standards Board Statement
34 (GASB34) implementation committee, which included other agencies and the
State Auditor. GASB34 requires that capitalized assets be depreciated. When
the OMB Circular changes in the future, the Department will work with the
Department of Revenue and Finance to initiate a review of this policy. Agencies
may choose to report fixed assets at a more restrictive level. The rule change
also requires that the straight–line depreciation method be
used.
Notice of Intended Action for these amendments was published
in the January 9, 2002, Iowa Administrative Bulletin as ARC 1280B. A
public hearing was held on January 31, 2002. No comments were received. These
amendments are identical to the ones published under Notice of Intended
Action.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
7A.30.
These amendments will become effective May 8, 2002.
EDITOR’S NOTE:
Pursuant to recommendation of the Administrative Rules Review Committee
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin, September 10, 1986, the text of
these amendments [10.2, 10.3, 10.6] is being omitted. These amendments are
identical to those published under Notice as ARC 1280B, IAB
1/9/02.
[Filed 3/15/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published
4/3/02]
[For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement
4/3/02.]
ARC 1497B
HUMAN SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[441]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 217.6, the
Department of Human Services hereby amends Chapter 61, “Refugee Services
Program,” Iowa Administrative Code.
The Bureau of Refugee Services has been limited to providing
services to persons in the first 60 months of resettlement. The Department has
received a letter from the Office of Refugee Resettlement of the Administration
for Children and Families waiving the 60–month limit on social services,
effective with the receipt of the letter and for the remainder of federal fiscal
year 2002 (until September 30, 2002).
This waiver includes all services authorized by the governing
federal regulations, 45 CFR Part 400, except 45 CFR 400.155(h), which refers to
“any additional service, upon submission to and approved by the director
of the Officeof Refugee Resettlement, aimed at strengthening and supporting the
ability of a refugee individual, family, orrefugee community to achieve and
maintain economic self–sufficiency, family stability, or community
integration, that has been demonstrated as effective and that is not available
from any other funding source.”
This amendment revises policy governing refugee services to
allow services to be provided past the first 60 months of resettlement if the
Office of Refugee Resettlement grants an exception to the 60–month
limit.
This amendment does not provide for waivers in specified
situations because the amendment confers a benefit on those affected.
The Council on Human Services adopted this amendment March 13,
2002.
This amendment was previously Adopted and Filed Emergency and
published in the February 6, 2002, Iowa Administrative Bulletin as ARC
1329B. Notice of Intended Action to solicit comments on that submission was
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on February 6, 2002, as ARC
1328B. The Department received no comments on this amendment. The
amendment is identical to that published under Notice of Intended
Action.
This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code section
217.6 and chapter 622A.
This amendment shall become effective on June 1, 2002, at
which time the Adopted and Filed Emergency amendment is hereby
rescinded.
The following amendment is adopted.
Amend subrule 61.6(2) as follows:
61.6(2) Limitations on eligibility. Services as
described in rule 441—61.5(217) may be provided in the first 60 months of
resettlement unless the Office of Refugee Resettlement grants an exception to
the 60–month limit. Referral, interpretation, citizenship, and
naturalization services may be provided to the extent feasible past 60 months of
resettlement for refugees, except that refugees who are receiving employability
services, as defined in 441—subrule 61.5(11), as part of an employability
plan, as of September 30, 1995, may continue to receive those services through
September 30, 1996, or until the services are completed, whichever occurs first,
regardless of their length of residence in the United States. In any case,
services shall first be provided for those refugees who are in the first two
years of resettlement and who are in need of assistance in securing
self–sufficiency.
[Filed 3/13/02, effective 6/1/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/3/02.
ARC 1499B
HUMAN SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[441]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 249A.4, the
Department of Human Services hereby amends Chapter 75, “Conditions of
Eligibility,” appearing in the Iowa Administrative Code.
This amendment changes premium payment policy and procedures
for coverage under the Medicaid for employed people with disabilities (MEPD)
group. Because this is the only Medicaid coverage group that provides for a
premium to be assessed, a billing system had to be developed based on rules for
billing and collection of premiums.
Programming is required in three separate but interrelated
computer systems to issue Medicaid benefits for this group: the Automated
Benefit Calculation system for determination of eligibility, the SSNI system to
issue a Medical Assistance Eligibility Card, and a billing system to issue a
billing statement.
Under current policy, the approval month’s and all back
months’ premiums are due within 60 days of the date billed. Premiums for
the two months following the month of approval are due the fourteenth day of the
month following the month of approval. Each subsequent month’s premium is
due the fourteenth day of the month before the month the premium is to cover. A
client may choose to pay or not to pay any premiums due during or after the
month of coverage, without loss of ongoing eligibility. A client may also
designate the month a payment is to cover.
After implementation of this coverage group, the Department
encountered significant problems running the billing system. The Department has
determined that current policy relating to premiums cannot be programmed in all
systems in a way that allows the billing system to operate without regular
manual intervention. There is no way to correct the system problems without
changing premium policy. Policy staff and systems staff worked together to
develop rules on premiums that could reasonably be programmed into the three
interrelated systems.
Under this amendment, premiums will ordinarily be due on the
fourteenth day of the month the premium is to cover. The premium for the month
when the case is approved is due on the fourteenth day of the following month.
Premiums for the months before the month of billing will be due the fourteenth
day of the third month following the month of billing. The Department will
apply premium payments in a specified order:
1. To the current calendar month in which the payment is
received if the premium for the current calendar month is unpaid.
2. To the following month if payment is received in the last
five working days of the month and the premium for the following month is
unpaid.
3. To prior months when full payment has not been received.
Payments will be applied beginning with the most recent unpaid month before the
current calendar month, then the oldest unpaid prior month and forward until all
prior months have been paid.
4. When premiums for all months above have been paid, any
excess shall be held and applied to any months for which eligibility is
subsequently established, as specified in paragraphs “1,”
“2,” and “3” above, and then to future months when a
premium becomes due.
As ongoing payments will be due in the month they are to
cover, the option to pay or not to pay premiums without loss of ongoing
eligibility is limited to premiums due after the month they are to cover.
Clients will no longer be able to designate the month a payment is to
cover.
The Council on Human Services adopted this amendment on March
13, 2002. Notice of Intended Action regarding this amendment was published in
the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on January 23, 2002, as ARC 1299B. No
one attended the public hearings on this amendment or submitted comments. This
amendment is identical to that published under Notice of Intended
Action.
This amendment does not provide for waivers in specific
situations because all recipients should be subject to the same premium payment
policies.
This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code section
249A.4.
This amendment shall become effective June 1, 2002.
EDITOR’S NOTE:
Pursuant to recommendation of the Administrative Rules Review Committee
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin, September 10, 1986, the text of
this amendment [75.1(39)“b”] is being omitted. This amendment is
identical to that published under Notice as ARC 1299B, IAB
1/23/02.
[Filed 3/13/02, effective 6/1/02]
[Published
4/3/02]
[For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement
4/3/02.]
ARC 1500B
HUMAN SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[441]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 249A.4, the
Department of Human Services hereby amends Chapter 75, “Conditions of
Eligibility,” appearing in the Iowa Administrative Code.
These amendments make the following changes to policy
governing Medicaid eligibility that were identified while the Department was
completing the rule assessment mandated by Executive Order Number 8. These
amendments:
• Change the terms
“women,” “woman,” and “her” to the
gender–neutral terms “people,” “person,” and
“the person” in the description of the coverage group for people who
have been screened and found to need treatment for breast or cervical cancer.
This is consistent with the language of the federal Social Security Act, which
does not limit the coverage group to women. At the present time, only women are
being screened for breast or cervical cancer under the Centers for Disease
Control and Prevention Breast and Cervical Cancer Early Detection Program
established under Title XV of the Public Health Service Act, as required for
eligibility under this coverage group. However, it has come to the
Department’s attention that men can also get breast cancer.
• Remove the word
“contributions” from the list of examples of the types of benefits
for which a person applying for or receiving Medicaid must also apply. A
constituent group commented that it knew of no benefit for which a person could
apply that would be defined as a contribution.
• Lengthen the time period
from five working days to ten calendar days within which an applicant or
recipient must express an intent to apply or refuse to apply for other benefits.
A constituent group commented that five working days was an unreasonably short
time period. In February of 1999, the Department standardized, to the extent
possible, the minimum time an applicant or recipient should be given in which to
provide information necessary to determine initial or ongoing eligibility at ten
calendar days. This policy was overlooked in that effort.
• Clarify that social
security numbers are required as a condition of eligibility only for people for
whom Medicaid is being requested. Social security numbers are not required for
other people in the eligible group for whom Medicaid is not being
requested.
• Clarify, in response to a
comment from a constituent group, that references to the attorney general in the
definition of “federal means–tested program” mean the United
States Attorney General.
• Add the name of a social
security office where the Program Operations Manual System is available. The
name of this office was inadvertently omitted from the subrule when the rule was
adopted.
• Clarify that pregnant
women eligible for Medicaidin groups other than the Mothers and Children (MAC)
group who are required to cooperate in establishing paternity and obtaining
medical support will be automatically rede–termined eligible under MAC
when they fail to cooperate. Pregnant women in the MAC group are exempt from
cooperation. This change is being made in response to a State Medicaid Director
letter issued by the Centers for Medicare
and Medicaid Services (CMS) dated December 19, 2000, and
clarification from the Kansas City Regional CMS office.
• Clarify the intent to
exempt as income only retroactive corrective payments issued by the Family
Investment Program.
• Delete references to
retrospective budgeting that were overlooked when monthly reporting was
eliminated.
• Delete references to the
X–PERT system.
• Update form numbers and
names, organizational references, and Iowa Code references.
The Council on Human Services adopted these amendments on
March 13, 2002. Notice of Intended Action regarding these amendments was
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on January 23, 2002, as ARC
1300B. The Department received no comments on these amendments.
Changes were made to the Notice of Intended Action to update
addresses in subrules 75.4(1) and 75.13(2) to reflect Department restructuring,
which eliminated the Division of Medical Services.
These amendments do not provide for waivers in specified
situations because these amendments either confer a benefit or clarify existing
language. Individuals may request a waiver of eligibility conditions under the
Department’s general rule on exceptions at rule
441—1.8(17A,217).
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
249A.4.
These amendments shall become effective June 1,
2002.
EDITOR’S NOTE:
Pursuant to recommendation of the Administrative Rules Review Committee
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin, September 10, 1986, the text of
these amendments [amendments to Ch 75] is being omitted. With the exception of
the changes noted above, these amendments are identical to those published under
Notice as ARC 1300B, IAB 1/23/02.
[Filed 3/13/02, effective 6/1/02]
[Published
4/3/02]
[For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement
4/3/02.]
ARC 1501B
HUMAN SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[441]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 249A.4, the
Department of Human Services hereby amends Chapter 77, “Conditions of
Participation for Providers of Medical and Remedial Care,” Chapter 78,
“Amount, Duration and Scope of Medical and Remedial Services,” and
Chapter 79, “Other Policies Relating to Providers of Medical and Remedial
Care,” appearing in the Iowa Administrative Code.
These amendments allow advanced registered nurse practitioners
with psychiatric certification to enroll as Iowa Medicaid independent providers
for covered services.
Psychiatric nurse practitioners are already able to be
credentialed as independent practitioners by the Iowa Plan for Behavioral Health
(i.e., “Iowa Plan”) for the provision of services allowed under
their scope of practice for Iowa Medicaid recipients enrolled in the Iowa Plan.
The addition of this independent status will have little or no impact upon the
Medicaid population as a whole because, relative to mental and behavioral health
services, most Medicaid recipients are enrolled in the Iowa Plan. Medicaid
recipients who would benefit from this change would be those not covered under
the Iowa Plan: (1) dual coverage recipients (i.e., those covered by both
Medicare and Medicaid) so that their “crossover” claims from the
Medicare program would be payable by Medicaid, where applicable; and (2)
recipients in the Medically Needy with spenddown eligibility category.
It is not expected that there would be a significant or
discernable dollar impact related to this change. Although Iowa Medicaid would
now be able to pay Medicare crossover claims currently not being paid for
services rendered by these providers, the amount is not anticipated to be
significant. For other services rendered by these providers under
fee–for–service Medicaid, there would be an offset, to the extent
that services rendered by advanced registered nurse practitioners are payable at
85 percent of physician rates. Therefore, any increase in the claims volume
would be offset by these savings.
The Council on Human Services adopted these amendments March
13, 2002. Notice of Intended Action regarding these amendments was published in
the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on January 23, 2002, as ARC
1301B.
In response to comments from the Iowa Board of Nursing and the
Iowa Nurses’ Association, the Department has decided to change the name of
this provider group to “independently practicing advanced registered nurse
practitioner certified in family, pediatric, or psychiatric mental health
specialties.” This change affects every item in the Notice of Intended
Action.
Also, Item 9 from the Notice of Intended Action has not been
adopted due to changes made in ARC 1427B, which require Form
HCFA–1500 as the claim form for all Medicaid providers except as noted.
Therefore, a specific reference toindependently practicing nurse
practitioners’ use of Form HCFA–1500 is no longer
necessary.
These amendments do not provide for waivers in specified
situations because they confer a benefit by allowing this provider group to
provide treatment to their patients by allowing independent participation in
Iowa Medicaid.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
249A.4.
These amendments shall become effective on June 1,
2002.
The following amendments are adopted.
ITEM 1. Amend rule 441—77.36(249A)
as follows:
441—77.36(249A) Family or pediatric
Advanced registered nurse practitioner certified in family, pediatric,
or psychiatric mental health specialties. Advanced registered nurse
practitioners are eligible to participate in the Medicaid program if they are
duly licensed and registered by the state of Iowa and they
possess evidence of certification as a certified
family an advanced registered nurse practitioner or
certified pediatric nurse practitioner as set forth in certified in
family, pediatric, or psychiatric mental health specialties pursuant to
board of nursing rules 655—Chapter 7.
Advanced registered nurse practitioners in other
states another state shall be eligible to participate if they
are duly licensed and registered in that state and are
certified as a family advanced registered nurse
practitioner or a pediatric nurse practitioner practitioners
with certification in family, pediatric, or psychiatric mental health
specialties.
Family or pediatric Advanced
registered nurse practitioners certified in family, pediatric, or
psychiatric mental health specialties who have been certified eligible to
participate in Medicare shall be considered as having met the
above–stated these guidelines.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section
249A.4.
ITEM 2. Amend subrule 78.1(21) as
follows:
78.1(21) Utilization review. Utilization review shall
be conducted of Medicaid recipients who access more than 24 outpatient visits in
any 12–month period from physicians,;
family or pediatric advanced registered nurse
practitioners, certified in family, pediatric, or
psychiatric mental health specialties; federally qualified health
centers,; other clinics,; and
emergency rooms. For the purposes of utilization review, the term
“physician” does not include a psychiatrist. Refer to rule
441—76.9(249A) for further information concerning the recipient
lock–in program.
ITEM 3. Amend subrule 78.21(1) as
follows:
78.21(1) Utilization review. Utilization review shall
be conducted of Medicaid recipients who access more than 24 outpatient visits in
any 12–month period from physicians,;
family or pediatric advanced registered nurse
practitioners, certified in family, pediatric, or
psychiatric mental health specialties; federally qualified health
centers,; other clinics,; and
emergency rooms. Refer to rule 441—76.9(249A) for further information
concerning the recipient lock–in program.
ITEM 4. Amend rule 441—78.23(249A)
as follows:
441—78.23(249A) Other clinic services. Payment
will be made on a fee schedule basis to facilities not part of a hospital,
funded publicly or by private contributions, which provide medically necessary
treatment by or under the direct supervision of a physician or dentist to
outpatients. Payment will be made for sterilization in accordance with
78.1(16).
Utilization review shall be conducted of Medicaid recipients
who access more than 24 outpatient visits in any 12–month period from
physicians,; family or pediatric
advanced registered nurse practitioners, certified in
family, pediatric, or psychiatric mental health specialties; federally
qualified health centers,; other
clinics,; and emergency rooms. Refer to rule
441—76.9(249A) for further information concerning the recipient
lock–in program.
Risk assessments, using Form 470–2942, Medicaid Prenatal
Risk Assessment, shall be completed twice during a Medicaid recipient’s
pregnancy. If the risk assessment reflects a high–risk pregnancy,
referral shall be made for enhanced services. See description of enhanced
services at subrule 78.25(3).
Clinics which that wish to administer
vaccines which are available through the vaccines for children program to
Medicaid recipients shall enroll in the vaccines for children program. In lieu
of payment, vaccines available through the vaccines for children program shall
be accessed from the department of public health for Medicaid recipients.
Clinics shall receive reimbursement for the administration of vaccines to
Medicaid recipients.
ITEM 5. Amend subrule 78.31(5) as
follows:
78.31(5) Services rendered by family or
pediatric advanced registered nurse practitioners certified
in family, pediatric, or psychiatric mental health specialties and employed
by a hospital. Hospitals may be reimbursed for services rendered by
family or pediatric advanced registered nurse
practitioners certified in family, pediatric, or psychiatric mental health
specialties who are employed by the hospital and providing services in a
facility or other location that is owned by the hospital, but is not on or part
of the hospital’s licensed premises, if reimbursement is not otherwise
available for the services rendered by these employed nurse practitioners. As a
condition of reimbursement, employed family or pediatric nurse
practitioners rendering these services must enroll with the Medicaid program,
receive a provider number, and designate the employing hospital to receive
payment. Claims for services shall be submitted by the employed family
or pediatric nurse practitioner. Payment shall be at the same
fee–schedule rates as those in effect for independently practicing
family or pediatric advanced registered nurse
practitioners certified in family, pediatric, or psychiatric mental health
specialties under 441—subrule 79.1(2).
ITEM 6. Amend rule 441—78.40(249A)
as follows:
441—78.40(249A) Independently practicing
family or pediatric advanced registered nurse
practitioners certified in family, pediatric, or psychiatric mental health
specialties. Payment shall be approved for services provided by
independently practicing family or pediatric advanced
registered nurse practitioners certified in family, pediatric, or
psychiatric mental health specialties within their scope of practice,
including advanced nursing and physician–delegated functions under a
protocol with a collaborating physician, with the exception of services not
payable to physicians under rule 441—78.1(249A).
Family or pediatric nurse Nurse
practitioners are not considered to be independently practicing when they are
auxiliary personnel of a physician as defined in 78.1(13)“b,” or
when they are employees of a hospital or clinic. An established protocol
between a physician and the family or pediatric nurse
practitioner shall not cause a family or pediatric nurse
practitioner to be considered auxiliary personnel of a physician, or an employee
of a hospital or clinic. The family or pediatric nurse
practitioner shall have promptly available the necessary equipment and personnel
to handle emergencies.
Utilization review shall be conducted of Medicaid recipients
who access more than 24 outpatient visits in any 12–month period from
physicians,; family or pediatric
advanced registered nurse practitioners, certified in
family, pediatric, or psychiatric mental health specialties; other
clinics,; and emergency rooms. Refer to rule
441—76.9(249A) for further information concerning the recipient
lock–in program.
Independently practicing family or pediatric
advanced registered nurse practitioners certified in family,
pediatric, or psychiatric mental health specialties who wish to administer
vaccines which are available through the vaccines for children program to
Medicaid recipients shall enroll in the vaccines for children program. In lieu
of payment, vaccines available through the vaccines for children program shall
be accessed from the department of public health for Medicaid recipients.
Independently practicing family or pediatric nurse
practitioners shall receive reimbursement for the administration of vaccines to
Medicaid recipients.
This rule is intended to implement Iowa Code section
249A.4.
ITEM 7. Amend subrule 79.1(2),
basis of reimbursement provider category “family or pediatric nurse
practitioners,” as follows:
Provider category
|
Basis of reimbursement
|
Upper limit
|
Family or pediatric Advanced
registered nurse practitioners certified in family, pediatric,
or psychiatric mental health specialties
|
Fee schedule
|
Fee schedule in effect 6/30/01 less 3%
|
ITEM 8. Amend subrule 79.14(1),
paragraph “b,” subparagraph (11), as
follows:
(11) Family or pediatric Advanced
registered nursepractitioners certified in family, pediatric, or
psychiatric mental health specialties.
[Filed 3/13/02, effective 6/1/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/3/02.
ARC 1502B
HUMAN SERVICES
DEPARTMENT[441]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 249A.4, the
Department of Human Services hereby amends Chapter 78, “Amount, Duration
and Scope of Medical and Remedial Services,” Iowa Administrative
Code.
These amendments make the following changes to Medicaid policy
governing optometric and optical services:
• Delete an unnecessary
reference to billing codes in the provider manual.
• Combine single lens and
multifocal lens services under one paragraph.
• Establish limits for
dispensing new lenses:
1. Up to three times for children up to one year of
age.
2. Up to four times per year for children one through three
years of age.
3. Once every 12 months for children four through seven years
of age.
4. Once every 24 months after eight years of age when there is
a change in the prescription.
• Establish limits for
dispensing new frames.
1. One frame every six months is allowed for children through
three years of age.
2. One frame every 12 months is allowed for children four
through six years of age.
3. When there is a prescribed lens change and the new lenses
cannot be accommodated by the current frame.
Exceptions to policy are routinely approved for new frames for
children who more quickly outgrow frames. It is cost–effective to provide
new frames when the current frame cannot accommodate the new lenses.
• Clarify and expand
coverage for protective lenses for:
1. Children through seven years of age.
2. Recipients with vision in only one eye.
3. Recipients with a diagnosis–related illness or
disability where regular lenses would pose a safety risk.
Exceptions to policy are routinely approved for protective
lenses for small children and recipients with a diagnosis–related illness
or disability where regular lenses would pose a safety risk. Protective lenses
were previously allowed for recipients with vision in only one eye.
• Allow safety frames
for:
1. Children through seven years of age.
2. Recipients with a diagnosis–related disability or
illness where regular frames would pose a safety risk.
Exceptions to policy are routinely approved for safety frames
for small children and persons with a diagnosis–related disability or
illness where regular frames would pose a safety risk.
• Provide that payment shall
be made for replacement of glasses when the original glasses have been lost or
damaged beyond repair. Replacement of lost or damaged glasses for adults aged
21 and over is limited to once every 12 months. The service utilization review
process revealed abuse of replacement glasses. It is cost–effective to
establish limits.
• Clarify that contact
lenses are allowed for recipients with aphakia. Up to eight pairs of contact
lenses are allowed for children up to one year of age with aphakia. Up to four
pairs of contact lenses per year are allowed for children one to three years of
age with aphakia. Small children with aphakia require more frequent lens
correction.
• Require prior approval for
a second lens correction within a 24–month period only for recipients
eight years of age and older. Exceptions to policy are routinely approved for
additional lens corrections for children. Accurate vision is critical during
early childhood development through age seven.
• Clarify that safety frames
are reimbursed by invoice. No fee schedule amount has been established for
safety frames.
• Clarify that visual
therapy is not covered when provided by opticians.
• Provide a
cross–reference to the optometrist rules regarding payment and procedure
for obtaining services and supplies in the optician rules rather than repeating
the rules. The optician rules were outdated and inconsistent with covered
optometric services. Opticians provide the same lens and frames services as
optometrists. It is redundant to restate the coverage in a separate rule
section.
• Correct
cross–references to the prior authorization rule.
The Council on Human Services adopted these amendments on
March 13, 2002. Notice of Intended Action regarding these amendments was
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on January 9, 2002, as ARC
1229B. The Department received no comments on these amendments. One change
was made to the amendments published under Notice of Intended Action. In
paragraph “h” of subrule 78.6(1), an exception for people with a
mental or physical disability was added to the limits on replacement of lost or
damaged glasses for adults. The paragraph now reads as follows:
“h. Repairs or replacement of frames, lenses or
component parts. Payment shall be made for service in addition to materials.
The service fee shall not exceed the dispensing fee for a replacement frame.
Payment shall be made for replacement of glasses when the original glasses have
been lost or damaged beyond repair. Replacement of lost or damaged glasses is
limited to once every 12 months for adults aged 21 and over, except for people
with a mental or physical disability.”
These amendments do not provide for waivers in specified
situations because recipients may request a waiver of requirements for payment
for optometric and optical services under the Department’s general rule on
exceptions at rule 441—1.8(17A,217).
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
249A.4.
These amendments shall become effective on June 1,
2002.
EDITOR’S NOTE:
Pursuant to recommendation of the Administrative Rules Review Committee
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin, September 10, 1986, the text of
these amendments [78.6, 78.6(1), 78.6(3) to 78.6(5), 78.7, 78.7(1) to 78.7(3),
78.28(3)] is being omitted. With the exception of the change noted above, these
amendments are identical to those published under Notice as ARC 1229B,
IAB 1/9/02.
[Filed 3/13/02, effective 6/1/02]
[Published
4/3/02]
[For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement
4/3/02.]
ARC 1496B
MEDICAL EXAMINERS
BOARD[653]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 147.76 and
272C.3, the Board of Medical Examiners hereby amends Chapter 10,
“Resident, Special and Temporary Licensure,” Iowa Administrative
Code.
The Board adopted the amendment to Chapter 10 during a
telephone conference call on March 8, 2002. Notice of Intended Action regarding
this amendment was published in the January 23, 2002, Iowa Administrative
Bulletin as ARC 1306B. This amendment is identical to that published
under Notice of Intended Action.
The amendment substitutes the Test of Spoken English (TSE) for
the Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) as the measure used to test
the English proficiency of international medical graduates who are seeking a
special license to serve on the faculty of a college of medicine in Iowa. Fifty
is the passing score on the TSE.
This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code chapter
148.
This amendment will become effective May 8, 2002.
The following amendment is adopted.
Amend subparagraph 10.4(3)“a”(4) as
follows:
(4) Demonstrate proficiency in English by providing a valid
ECFMG certificate or verification of a passing minimum
score of 50 on TOEFL, the Test of English as a Foreign
Language the TSE, the Test of Spoken English administered by the
Educational Testing Service;
[Filed 3/14/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/3/02.
ARC 1494B
MEDICAL EXAMINERS
BOARD[653]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 147.76 and
272C.3, the Board of Medical Examiners hereby amends Chapter 17,
“Licensure of Acupuncturists,” Iowa Administrative Code.
The Board adopted the amendments to Chapter 17 during a
telephone conference call on March 8, 2002. Notice of Intended Action regarding
these amendments was published in the January 23, 2002, Iowa Administrative
Bulletin as ARC 1307B. These amendments are identical to those published
under Notice of Intended Action.
The amendments clarify the English proficiency test
requirements for those acupuncturists who have taken one or both parts of the
certifying examination in a language other than English.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
147E.7 and chapter 148E.
These amendments will become effective May 8, 2002.
The following amendments are adopted.
ITEM 1. Amend rule
653—17.3(148E) by rescinding the definition of “English
proficiency.”
ITEM 2. Amend subparagraph
17.4(1)“c”(2) as follows:
(2) The board may, at the recommendation of the
committee, choose any of the following examinations to test the English
proficiency of any applicant: TOEFL, TOEIC, or TSE. An applicant
who passed NCCAOM written or practical examination components in a language
other than English shall achieve a minimum score of 50 on the Test of Spoken
English (TSE) administered by the Educational Testing Service.
[Filed 3/14/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/3/02.
ARC 1515B
NATURAL RESOURCE
COMMISSION[571]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code subsection 455A.5(6),
the Natural Resource Commission hereby amends Chapter 28, “Snowmobile and
All–Terrain Vehicle Registration Revenue Cost–Share Program,”
Iowa Administrative Code.
These amendments accomplish the following:
1. Clarify the type of land acquisition projects that are
eligible to receive ATV grant awards by adding a definition for
“previously disturbed” to rule 571—28.1(321G).
2. Expand on rule 571—28.10(321G) to make assurances
that equipment purchased with ATV or snowmobile registration funds is used for
the intended purpose as indicated in the original grant approval letter. The
amendment will also allow the Department to hold the project sponsor accountable
for the equipment by allowing the insertion of provisions in the formal grant
agreement.
Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa
Administrative Bulletin on January 9, 2002, as ARC 1256B. A public
hearing was held on January 30, 2002. No public comments were received. There
are no changes from the Notice of Intended Action.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
321G.7.
These amendments shall become effective May 8, 2002.
The following amendments are adopted.
ITEM 1. Amend rule
571—28.1(321G) by adopting the following new
definition in alphabetical order:
“Previously disturbed” means an area where the
plant community has been severely disturbed and has not recovered or the natural
(native) plant biota is nearly gone. Such an area has been so heavily disturbed
that the plant community structure has been severely altered and few or no
higher plants of the original community remain. Examples are newly cleared
land, cropland, improved pastureland, severely overgrazed second growth forest,
rock–gravel quarries, mines, and sand pits.
ITEM 2. Amend subrule 28.10(2) as
follows:
28.10(2) Real property and equipment shall be
disposed of as stipulated in the grant agreement under which it
was they were acquired. Reimbursements from the sale of real
property and equipment shall be credited to the appropriate snowmobile or
all–terrain vehicle registration account from which the funding
originated.
[Filed 3/14/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/3/02.
ARC 1516B
NATURAL RESOURCE
COMMISSION[571]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code subsection 455A.5(6),
the Natural Resource Commission hereby amends Chapter 37, “Boating Safety
Equipment,” Iowa Administrative Code.
These amendments provide for additional specifications for
inflatable flotation devices (PFDs) and personal flotation requirements for
operators and passengers of personal watercraft. These changes are necessary to
maintain consistency with current changes in federal regulations by the United
States Coast Guard.
Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa
Administrative Bulletin on January 9, 2002, as ARC 1261B. No comments
were received during this comment period or at the public hearing held January
29, 2002. There are no changes from the Notice of Intended Action.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code sections
456A.24 and 462A.3.
These amendments will become effective May 8, 2002.
The following amendments are adopted.
ITEM 1. Amend subrule 37.13(2) by
adopting the following new paragraph
“d”:
d. Type V PFD
ITEM 2. Amend subrule 37.13(3) by
adopting the following new paragraph
“d”:
d. Type V PFD
ITEM 3. Amend subrule 37.13(7) as
follows:
37.13(7) Nonapproved devices. Any PFD which has a
torn or missing strap, punctured flotation bag, waterlogged flotation material,
rotted materials in straps or webbing or cover, missing laces, missing hardware,
envelope torn or perforated, torn stitching or any other condition which impairs
the operating efficiency, or any PFD on which the U.S. Coast Guard approval tag
is no longer easily legible, or any inflatable device which has a discharged
or otherwise inoperable gas cartridge shall be deemed as not approved for
use on board vessels as equipment required by law.
ITEM 4. Amend subrule 37.13(9) as
follows:
37.13(9) Water skis and surfboards. Any person
engaged in water skiing, surfboarding, or other similar activity, except
for vessels known as windsurfers, shall wear a Type I, II, or
III or any Type V personal flotation device approved by the U.S. Coast
Guard. Inflatable devices are not approved for tow–behind
activities. Skiers participating in a tournament or exhibition may be
exempted from the personal flotation device requirement if the skiers are
wearing wet suits with built–in flotation and granted a specific exemption
in the special events permit issued by the natural resource commis–sion.
A flotation wet suit may include a full suit (top and bottom) or a
form–fitting top as long as the top will float the wearer when air is
expelled from the wearer’s lungs. A special event may include practice
sessions if all practice sessions for the season are listed on the special event
application. In that case, the application shall include a specific location,
date and time for each practice session.
ITEM 5. Amend rule 571—37.13(462A)
by adopting the following new subrule:
37.13(11) Personal watercraft. All operators and
passengers of personal watercraft must wear a U.S. Coast Guard–approved
Type I, II, III, or V personal flotation device. Inflatable personal flotation
devices are not approved for use on personal watercraft.
[Filed 3/14/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/3/02.
ARC 1514B
NATURAL RESOURCE
COMMISSION[571]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code subsection 455A.5(6),
the Natural Resource Commission hereby amends Chapter 40, “Boating Speed
and Distance Zoning,” Iowa Administrative Code.
These amendments eliminate the current horsepower restrictions
on Lake Icaria in Adams County and Three Mile Lake in Union County. The Adams
County Conservation Board and Union County Conservation Board have petitioned
the Department to remove the horsepower limit due to the newer manufactured
boats with modern engines and higher horsepower ratings. The amendments also
create a no–wake zone on a portion of the Mississippi River at the city of
Marquette. The city of Marquette has petitioned the Department for a
no–wake designation to slow boat traffic on the river and provide a safer
condition for boaters and the general public.
Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa
Administrative Bulletin on January 9, 2002, as ARC 1251B. No comments
were received during the comment period or at the public hearing held January
29, 2002. There are no changes from the Notice of Intended Action.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
462A.26.
These amendments will become effective May 8, 2002.
The following amendments are adopted.
ITEM 1. Amend rule 571—40.20(462A),
introductory paragraph, as follows:
571—40.20(462A) Lake Icaria, Adams
County—watercraft use. Motorboats of outboard or
inboard–outdrive type with power not to exceed 300
horsepower shall be permitted on Lake Icaria. The following rules
shall govern vessel operation on Lake Icaria in Adams County.
ITEM 2. Amend rule 571—40.44(462A),
introductory paragraph, as follows:
571—40.44(462A) Three Mile Lake, Union
County—watercraft use. Motorboats of outboard or
inboard–outdrive type with power not to exceed 200
horsepower shall be permitted on Three Mile Lake. The following rules
shall govern vessel operation on Three Mile Lake in Union County.
ITEM 3. Amend 571—Chapter 40 by
adopting the following new rule:
571—40.48(462A) Zoning of the Mississippi River,
Marquette, Clayton County.
40.48(1) All vessels, except commercial barge traffic,
shall be operated at a no–wake speed within the area of river mile markers
634.5 and 634.9 and designated by buoys or other approved uniform waterway
markers.
40.48(2) The city of Marquette will designate and
maintain the no–wake zone with buoys approved by the natural resource
commission.
[Filed 3/14/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/3/02.
ARC 1511B
PHARMACY EXAMINERS
BOARD[657]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 147.76 and 2001
Iowa Acts, chapter 182, section 5(10), paragraph “i,” the Board of
Pharmacy Examiners hereby adopts Chapter 9, “Automated Medication
Distribution Systems,” Iowa Administrative Code.
The new chapter establishes standards for the verification and
accuracy of automated medication distribution systems (AMDS) in the practice of
pharmacy as required by 2001 Iowa Acts, chapter 182, section 5(10), paragraph
“i,” enacted by the Seventy–ninth General Assembly. The rules
define various terms relating to AMDS and assign responsibility for medication
distribution and other functions relating to AMDS. The rules establish
requirements for policies and procedures and for record keeping regarding
utilization of AMDS and establish continuous quality assurance, monitoring, and
performance improvement requirements to be implemented by any pharmacy utilizing
AMDS in pharmacy practice.
Requests for waiver or variance of the discretionary
provisions of these rules will be considered pursuant to 657— Chapter
34.
Notice of Intended Action was published in the January 23,
2002, Iowa Administrative Bulletin as ARC 1304B. The adopted rules
differ from those published under Notice as follows:
The definition of “decentralized unit dose AMDS”
is amended by deleting the final phrase identifying examples of remote
locations. The examples identified in this definition are included in the
definition of “remote location.”
Subrule 9.5(2), paragraph “c,” has been changed
regarding the return of medications removed from a component but not
administered to a patient. The change provides that returned medications are to
be returned to the pharmacy or maintained in a manner that would prevent access
to the returned medications pending return to the pharmacy, deleting the
requirement that the medication be returned to the component. Revised paragraph
“c” reads as follows:
“c. Each AMDS shall provide a mechanism for securing and
accounting for medications removed from and subsequently returned to the system.
Medications removed from a system component but not administered to a patient
shall be returned to the pharmacy or maintained in a manner that would prevent
access to the returned medications except for the purpose of returning the
medications to the pharmacy. The provisions of this paragraph regarding
preventing access to returned medications except for return to the pharmacy
shall not apply to items that are too large or bulky to be inserted into the
system’s return bin, to items requiring refrigeration, nor to limited
critical care items whose inaccessibility would compromise patient
care.”
Provisions regarding Board approval for alternate pharmacist
verification processes in subrule 9.7(2), paragraph “b,” and subrule
9.8(3) are amended to clarify that the Board will consider alternative processes
submitted pursuant to the requirements in 657—Chapter 34 for petition for
waiver or variance from Board rules. The revised paragraph and subrule read as
follows:
“b. Bar coding or technology–based verification.
When bar coding or other technology–based verification is utilized and a
pharmacist is not filling the dispensing component, the quality assurance plan
shall provide for random verification by a pharmacist. The plan shall provide
that, one day each month, all medication doses or bins contained in 5 percent of
the components utilized within the system be verified by a pharmacist. Or the
plan shall provide that, one day each month, 5 percent of the medication doses
or bins contained in each component utilized within the system be verified by a
pharmacist. If, however, the system includes fewer than five components, a
pharmacist shall, one day each month, verify all medication doses or bins
contained in one component utilized within the system. A pharmacy may petition
the board pursuant to 657—Chapter 34 for a variance for an alternate
pharmacist verification process.”
“9.8(3) Random verification. If the average
accuracy of the AMDS during the initial 60–day period is at least 99.7
percent for all medication doses dispensed, the quality assurance plan shall
provide for random verification by a pharmacist. The plan shall provide that 5
percent of all medication doses daily dispensed utilizing the AMDS be verified
by a pharmacist or it shall provide that 100 percent of all medication doses
dispensed on a specific day each month be verified by a pharmacist. A pharmacy
may petition the board pursuant to 657—Chapter 34 for a variance for an
alternate pharmacist verification process. Errors shall continue to be
identified and logged as provided by the quality assurance and monitoring plan
developed pursuant to rule 9.3(79GA, ch182) and shall be categorized as provided
in subrule 9.8(1).”
These rules were approved during the March 4, 2002, meeting of
the Board of Pharmacy Examiners.
These rules will become effective on May 8, 2002.
These rules are intended to implement 2001 Iowa Acts, chapter
182, section 5(10), paragraph “i.”
EDITOR’S NOTE:
Pursuant to recommendation of the Administrative Rules Review Committee
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin, September 10, 1986, the text of
these rules [Ch 9] is being omitted. With the exception of the changes noted
above, these rules are identical to those published under Notice as ARC
1304B, IAB 1/23/02.
[Filed 3/11/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published
4/3/02]
[For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement
4/3/02.]
ARC 1493B
PUBLIC HEALTH
DEPARTMENT[641]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 136C.3, the
Department of Public Health hereby amends Chapter 38, “General Provisions
for Radiation Machines and Radioactive Materials”; Chapter 39,
“Registration of Radiation Machine Facilities, Licensure of Radioactive
Materials and Transportation of Radioactive Materials”; Chapter 40,
“Standards for Protection Against Radiation”; Chapter 41,
“Safety Requirements for the Use of Radiation Machines and Certain Uses of
Radioactive Materials”; Chapter 42, “Minimum Certification Standards
for Diagnostic Radiographers, Nuclear Medicine Technologists, and Radiation
Therapists”; Chapter 43, “Minimum Requirements for Radon Testing and
Analysis”; Chapter 44, “Minimum Requirements for Radon
Mitigation”; Chapter 45, “Radiation Safety Requirements for
Industrial Radiographic Operations”; and Chapter 46, “Minimum
Requirements for Tanning Facilities,” Iowa Administrative Code.
The following itemize the adopted changes.
Items 1, 3 to 5, 9 to 11, 14, 16, 19 to 21, 23 to 25, 29, 30
to 32, 35, 44, 59, 61 to 63, 65, 68, 70, and 73 to 76 amend the rules to reflect
current federal regulations, correct cross references, addresses, catchwords and
general errors, and clarify wording.
Item 2 amends the definition of “major processor”
to correct a cross reference and amends the definition of “written
directive” to include orders for radiopharmaceuticals, which had been
previously omitted. Item 2 also adds definitions for “direct
supervision” and “high–level radioactive waste,” which
were not defined previously, in order to make their use uniform in all
chapters.
Items 6, 7, 8, 12, and 13 address fees.
Items 15, 57, and 58 rescind subrules the content of which has
been incorporated into Chapters 38 and 39 in order to make Chapters 38 and 39
stand–alone chapters. Responsibility for these chapters has been moved to
another bureau.
Items 17, 18, 33, and 46 to 48 place agency policies into the
rules.
Item 22 changes where the individual monitoring device should
be worn in accordance with industry standards.
Item 26 clarifies how long records should be kept.
Item 27 adds new requirements for fluoroscopic equipment.
This change is the result of documented burns resulting from radiation exposure
during medical procedures.
Items 28 and 51 address items new to the industry.
Item 34 changes the frequency of image monitoring to ensure
image quality.
Items 36 to 43 amend Chapter 41 to allow training hours
approved by the agency to be used to meet requirements. This allows hours that
are not submitted specifically to the AMA to be used to meet
requirements.
Item 45 adds a requirement that physicians interpreting
radiographs in Iowa show proof of Iowa licensure. This requirement ensures that
physicians working temporarily in Iowa are qualified.
Items 49, 50, and 52 to 56 revise training programs for
operators under Chapter 42 that are now in agency policy or incomplete in
current rules.
Items 60, 64, 66, 67, 69, 71, and 72 amend wording to reflect
the new definition of “direct supervision.” Items 60 and 71 also
rescind definitions of “personal supervision.”
Items 77 and 78 replace current lists of photosensitizing
agents with a more user–friendly list and require that this list be used
by operators. During inspections of facilities, it was noted that consumers
were not reading the current lists because of the terminology used.
Notice of Intended Action regarding these amendments was
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin on February 6, 2002, as ARC
1317B. A public hearing was held on February 26, 2002, at 8:30 a.m.
in the Conference Room, Department of Public Health, 401 S.W. 7th Street, Suite
D, Des Moines, Iowa. There were no persons in attendance at the hearing. Five
sets of written comments were received, reviewed, and incorporated as
appropriate. The changes made from the Notice of Intended Action are listed
below.
1. The definitions of “working level” and
“working level month” in Item 1 have not been rescinded in order for
the rule to remain consistent with NRC requirements.
2. In Item 20, the phrase “applicable provision”
has been changed to “applicable provisions” to cover all items
contained in the federal standards.
3. In Item 27, all references to “rads” have been
changed to “rad,” which is the proper term for both singular and
plural.
4. Noticed Item 29, which proposed to amend subparagraph
41.2(17)“b”(1), has been withdrawn for further review of new
technology.
5. In Item 75, the monitoring device listed under
“record type” is moved to the proper place in addition to being
amended.
The State Board of Health adopted these amendments on March
13, 2002.
These amendments will become effective May 8, 2002.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter
136C.
EDITOR’S NOTE:
Pursuant to recommendation of the Administrative Rules Review Committee
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin, September 10, 1986, the text of
these amendments [amendments to Chs 38 to 46] is being omitted. With the
exception of the changes noted above, these amendments are identical to those
published under Notice as ARC 1317B, IAB 2/6/02.
[Filed 3/14/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published
4/3/02]
[For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement
4/3/02.]
ARC 1492B
PUBLIC HEALTH
DEPARTMENT[641]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code section 17A.3 and 1996
Iowa Acts, chapter 1212, section 5, the Department of Public Health hereby
amends Chapter 177, “Health Data,” Iowa Administrative
Code.
These amendments delete references to the Community Health
Management Information System (CHMIS) which no longer exists, delete definitions
which no longer apply, delete references to physician data collection and
clarify the process to facilitate provision of data to the Department of Public
Health.
Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa
Administrative Bulletin on February 6, 2002, as ARC 1318B. The adopted
amendments are identical to those published under Notice.
The State Board of Health adopted these amendments on March
13, 2002.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code section
17A.3 and 1996 Iowa Acts, chapter 1212, section 5.
These amendments will become effective on May 8,
2002.
The following amendments are adopted.
ITEM 1. Amend rule
641—177.2(76GA,ch1212) by rescinding the definitions for
“claim,” “Community Health Management Information System
(CHMIS),” “patient identification number,”
“physician,” “severity of illness risk adjustment
codes,” and “uniform hospital billing
form.”
ITEM 2. Amend subrule 177.3(1) as
follows:
177.3(1) The department shall collect information from
other state agencies including the Community Health Management
Information System (CHMIS) for the purpose of public dissemination of
health data.
ITEM 3. Rescind subrule 177.3(2) and
adopt the following new subrule:
177.3(2) Hospitals shall submit data to the Iowa
Hospital Association which shall serve as an intermediary for the Iowa
department of public health. The information shall include inpatient,
outpatient and ambulatory information.
ITEM 4. Amend rule
641—177.4(76GA,ch1212) as follows:
641—177.4(76GA,ch1212) Department studies. The
department shall conduct special studies consistent with the intent of 1996 Iowa
Acts, chapter 1212, using data collected in accordance with subrule 177.3(1).
In conducting such studies, the department may utilize the services of a
contractor.
ITEM 5. Amend rule
641—177.8(76GA,ch1212) as follows:
641—177.8(76GA,ch1212) Address and specification for
data submissions. Data required to be submitted pursuant to this chapter
shall be sent by agencies and health care providers, or their
representatives, to the Iowa Department of Public Health, Center for Health
Statistics, Lucas State Office Building, East 12th and Grand Avenue, Des Moines,
Iowa 50319.
Data required to be submitted by CHMIS
pursuant to this rule shall be sent on a no–label,
nine–track tape or data cartridge to the Iowa Department of Public Health,
Center for Health Statistics, Lucas State Office Building, East 12th and Grand
Avenue, Des Moines, Iowa 50319 within 30 days following the CHMIS receipt of
required information in the form designated by the department within
30 days following the six–month calendar periods ending in June and
December.
[Filed 3/14/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/3/02.
ARC 1523B
REVENUE AND FINANCE
DEPARTMENT[701]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 421.1 and
422.68, the Department of Revenue and Finance hereby adopts amendments to
Chapter 7, “Practice and Procedure Before the Department of Revenue and
Finance,” Chapter 39, “Filing Return and Payment of Tax,”
Chapter 40, “Determination of Net Income,” Chapter 41,
“Determination of Taxable Income,” Chapter 42, “Adjustments to
Computed Tax,” Chapter 43, “Assessments and Refunds,” Chapter
46, “Withholding,” Chapter 52, “Filing Returns, Payment of Tax
and Penalty and Interest,” and Chapter 53, “Determination of Net
Income,” Iowa Administrative Code.
Notice of Intended Action was published in IAB Volume XXIV,
Number 15, page 1145, on January 23, 2002, as ARC 1302B.
Item 1 adds two new unnumbered paragraphs to subrule 7.5(3) to
cover the E–mailing of returns and other documents to the Department as
well as to authorize electronic signatures in lieu of handwritten signatures for
documents filed by E–mail and other electronic means. This amendment is
not the result of a 2001 legislative change but is supported by previously
enacted statutes.
Item 2 amends paragraph “b” of subrule 39.1(1) and
paragraph “c” of subrule 39.1(2) to describe a new higher income
threshold for the requirement for filing of returns by individuals who are
claimed as dependents on other taxpayers’ returns.
Item 3 corrects references to the Iowa Code that pertain to
adult offenders in rule 701—40.21(422), which allows for the additional
deduction for the hiring of an individual on parole or probation.
Item 4 revises numbered paragraph “7” of paragraph
40.38(1)“c” to reflect a change in the Department’s
administration of capital gains from the sale of rental properties so that a
taxpayer who has actively participated in a rental business would now meet the
material participation requirement for purposes of the capital gain deduction.
This revision is not due to legislation but is the result of resolution of a
protested case.
Item 5 adopts new rule 701—40.56(422) that describes the
taxation of gains or losses from the sale or other disposition of bonds of the
state of Iowa or its political subdivisions.
Also under Item 5 is new rule 701—40.57(422) that
describes the taxation of capital gains from sales or exchanges of property for
taxpayers using the accrual method of accounting who used the installment method
to report the capital gains from the transactions on their federal income tax
returns.
Item 6 adopts new subrule 41.3(3) for dealing with possible
federal refunds in 2001 that are from the federal rebate. The subrule provides
that, to the extent that federal income tax refunds are attributable to the
federal rebate, those refunds are not taxable for Iowa income tax
purposes.
Item 7 adopts new subrule 41.5(9), which supports the Iowa
itemized deduction for a portion of the annual registration fee for older motor
vehicles. This item is applicable for tax years beginning on or after January
1, 2002.
Item 8 amends individual income tax subrule 42.2(11) for the
research activities credit to include possible federal revisions in that credit
which were made in 2001.
Item 9 adopts new subrule 43.4(7) for the Keep Iowa Beautiful
fund checkoff. The subrule provides that the amount of checkoff of $1 or more
will be reduced accordingly if the refund due or amount paid with the return is
insufficient to pay the checkoff. The subrule provides that once an
individual’s return has been filed with the checkoff, the individual
cannot amend the designation to the checkoff. The subrule describes how the
Keep Iowa Beautiful checkoff is allowed only after certain other obligations of
the individual are satisfied and that previously enacted checkoffs have a higher
priority than this checkoff.
Item 10 amends rule 701—46.7(422) for the Accelerated
Career Education (ACE) Program, which is a training program administered by the
Iowa Department of Economic Development. The amendment provides that program
costs incurred prior to the signing of an agreement are now eligible for the
credit from withholding to the extent the costs were incurred on or after July
1, 2000.
Item 11 amends subrules 52.7(3) and 52.7(5) for the research
activities credit for corporations and the research activities credit for
increasing research activities in a quality jobs enterprise zone. The
amendments show that the Department has adopted possible 2000 federal income tax
changes which might impact the calculation of the Iowa research activities
credits.
Items 12 and 13 amend the implementation clauses for rules
701—52.10(15) and 701—52.14(422) for the research activities credits
for research activities conducted by an eligible business and for research
activities conducted in an enterprise zone. The amendments show that those
research activities credits are to be computed with possible changes in the
federal research activities credit that occurred in the 2000 calendar
year.
Item 14 adopts new subrule 53.11(8) for the additional
deduction for hiring individuals on parole or probation and corrects some Iowa
Code references relating to adult offenders.
These amendments are identical to those published under Notice
of Intended Action.
These amendments will become effective May 8, 2002,after
filing with the Administrative Rules Coordinator and publication in the Iowa
Administrative Bulletin.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code sections
15.333, 15.335, 15A.9, 260G.4A, 314.28, 421.17, 422.5, 422.7, 422.9, 422.10,
422.12A, 422.13, 422.16, 422.33 and 422.35 and 2001 Iowa Acts, House File 715,
House File 737, House File 757, House File 759, Senate File 140, Senate File 141
and Senate File 350.
EDITOR’S NOTE:
Pursuant to recommendation of the Administrative Rules Review Committee
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin, September 10, 1986, the text of
these amendments [amendments to Chs 7, 39 to 43, 46, 52, 53] is being omitted.
These amendments are identical to those published under Notice as ARC
1302B, IAB 1/23/02.
[Filed 3/15/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published
4/3/02]
[For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement
4/3/02.]
ARC 1521B
REVENUE AND FINANCE
DEPARTMENT[701]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code chapter 17A and
sections 421.14, 421.17(19), 452A.59, 452A.76, 453A.25, and 453A.49, the
Department of Revenue and Finance hereby adopts amendments to Chapter 7,
“Practice and Procedure Before the Department of Revenue and
Finance”; Chapter 10, “Interest, Penalty, Exceptions to Penalty, and
Jeopardy Assessments”; Chapter 67, “Administration”; and
Chapter 81, “Administration,” Iowa Administrative Code.
Notice of Intended Action was published in IAB Volume XXIV,
Number 16, page 1229, on February 6, 2002, as ARC 1342B.
Item 1 allows the Director to retrieve a protest that has been
transferred to the Department of Inspections and Appeals back to the
Director’s office for decision.
Items 2, 3, and 4 clarify that, for purposes of penalty
exceptions, mathematical, computational, and transposition errors will not be
considered as facts and circumstances disclosed on a return or deposit
form.
Item 5 sets a minimum bond for motor fuel licensees. It is
very expensive for the Department to deal with small dollar amounts on bonds.
This change sets a minimum and is more cost–effective for the
Department.
Items 6 and 7 permit the taxpayer’s E–mail address
or fax signature to constitute a valid signature on an applicationfor a motor
fuel license or cigarette permit. This is expedient because of the large number
of applications that are nowE–mailed or faxed to the Department.
These amendments are identical to those published under Notice
of Intended Action.
These amendments will become effective May 8, 2002, after
filing with the Administrative Rules Coordinator and publication in the Iowa
Administrative Bulletin.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapters
17A, 422, 423, 450, 452A, and 453A.
EDITOR’S NOTE:
Pursuant to recommendation of the Administrative Rules Review Committee
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin, September 10, 1986, the text of
these amendments [7.50(1), 10.8(1)“h,” 10.8(2)“f,”
10.8(3)“d,” 67.21(1)“c”(1) to (3),
67.23(1)“h,” 81.13(1)“i”] is being omitted. These
amendments are identical to those published under Notice as ARC 1342B,
IAB 2/6/02.
[Filed 3/15/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published
4/3/02]
[For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement
4/3/02.]
ARC 1522B
REVENUE AND FINANCE
DEPARTMENT[701]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 421.14 and
422.68, the Department of Revenue and Finance hereby adopts amendments to
Chapter 42, “Adjustments to Computed Tax,” Chapter 52, “Filing
Returns, Payment of Tax and Penalty and Interest,” and Chapter 58,
“Filing Returns, Payment of Tax, Penalty and Interest, and Allocation of
Tax Revenues,” Iowa Administrative Code.
Notice of Intended Action was published in IAB Volume XXIV,
Number 16, page 1230, on February 6, 2002, as ARC 1341B.
Item 1 adopts new rule 42.17(15E), which describes the
eligible development business investment tax credit and how that credit is
computed. The eligible development business investment tax credit is a new
individual income tax credit available to eligible development businesses which
have been approved by the Iowa Department of Economic Development.
Item 2 adopts new rule 52.20(15E) for the eligible development
business investment tax credit for corporation income tax purposes. This rule
is similar to the rule in Item 1.
Item 3 adopts new rule 58.9(15E) for the eligible development
business investment tax credit for franchise tax purposes. This rule is similar
to the rule in Item 1.
These amendments are identical to those published under Notice
of Intended Action.
These amendments will become effective May 8, 2002, after
filing with the Administrative Rules Coordinator and publication in the Iowa
Administrative Bulletin.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter
15E as amended by 2001 Iowa Acts, House File 349 [chapter 141].
EDITOR’S NOTE:
Pursuant to recommendation of the Administrative Rules Review Committee
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin, September 10, 1986, the text of
these amendments [42.17, 52.20, 58.9] is being omitted.
These amendments are identical to those published under Notice
as ARC 1341B, IAB 2/6/02.
[Filed 3/15/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published
4/3/02]
[For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement
4/3/02.]
ARC 1529B
SCHOOL BUDGET REVIEW
COMMITTEE[289]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Executive Order Number 11, the
State Board of Education hereby adopts Chapter 8, “Waivers or Variances
from Administrative Rules,” Iowa Administrative Code.
This chapter describes the procedures for applying for, as
well as issuance or denial of, waivers from Board rules. The purpose of this
chapter is to comply with Executive Order Number 11, which requires all state
agencies to adopt rules regarding waivers.
Notice of Intended Action was published in the Iowa
Administrative Bulletin on February 6, 2002, as ARC 1362B. A public
hearing was held on February 27, 2002. No written or oral comments were
received. These rules are identical to those published under Notice.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code section 17A.9A
and Executive Order Number 11.
These rules will become effective May 8, 2002.
EDITOR’S NOTE:
Pursuant to recommendation of the Administrative Rules Review Committee
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin, September 10, 1986, the text of
these rules [Ch 8] is being omitted. These rules are identical to those
published under Notice as ARC 1362B, IAB 2/6/02.
[Filed 3/15/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published
4/3/02]
[For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement
4/3/02.]
ARC 1505B
TRANSPORTATION
DEPARTMENT[761]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 307.10, 307.12
and 314.27, the Department of Transportation, on March 13, 2002, adopted
amendments to Chapter 105, “Holiday Rest Stops,” Chapter 106,
“Promotion of Iowa Agricultural Products at Rest Areas,” and Chapter
121, “Adopt–A–Highway Program,” Iowa Administrative
Code.
Notice of Intended Action for these amendments was published
in the February 6, 2002, Iowa Administrative Bulletin as ARC
1379B.
The amendments to Chapters 105 and 106 reflect current
Department organization, change metric measurements to English units of measure,
and clarify the requirements. The amendment to Chapter 121 reflects current
Department organization.
These rules do not provide for waivers. Any person who
believes that the person’s circumstances meet the statutory criteria for a
waiver may petition the Department for a waiver under 761—Chapter
11.
These amendments are identical to the ones published under
Notice of Intended Action.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapters
307 and 321.
These amendments will become effective May 8, 2002.
EDITOR’S NOTE:
Pursuant to recommendation of the Administrative Rules Review Committee
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin, September 10, 1986, the text of
these amendments [amendments to Chs 105, 106, 121] is being omitted. These
amendments are identical to those published under Notice as ARC 1379B,
IAB 2/6/02.
[Filed 3/13/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published
4/3/02]
[For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement
4/3/02.]
ARC 1506B
TRANSPORTATION
DEPARTMENT[761]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 307.10 and
307.12, the Department of Transportation, on March 13, 2002, adopted amendments
to Chapter 151, “City Requests for Closure of Primary Road
Extensions,” Iowa Administrative Code.
Notice of Intended Action for these amendments was published
in the February 6, 2002, Iowa Administrative Bulletin as ARC
1380B.
These amendments reflect current DOT organization, update
references to the Iowa State Patrol and the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices, add an implementation clause and delete two provisions which allow
little flexibility as to why and how long an extension of a primary road can be
closed for reasons other than fire, construction or repair.
These rules do not provide for waivers. Any person who
believes that the person’s circumstances meet the statutory criteria for a
waiver may petition the Department for a waiver under 761—Chapter
11.
These amendments are identical to the ones published under
Notice of Intended Action.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter
321.
These amendments will become effective May 8, 2002.
EDITOR’S NOTE:
Pursuant to recommendation of the Administrative Rules Review Committee
published in the Iowa Administrative Bulletin, September 10, 1986, the text of
these amendments [151.1(1), 151.1(2)“a” and “e,”
151.1(3), 151.1(4), 151.1(5)“a” and “b”] is being
omitted.
These amendments are identical to those published under Notice
as ARC 1380B, IAB 2/6/02.
[Filed 3/13/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published
4/3/02]
[For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement
4/3/02.]
ARC 1507B
TRANSPORTATION
DEPARTMENT[761]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 307.10 and
307.12, the Department of Transportation, on March 13, 2002, adopted amendments
to Chapter 520, “Regulations Applicable to Carriers,” Iowa
Administrative Code.
Notice of Intended Action for these amendments was published
in the February 6, 2002, Iowa Administrative Bulletin as ARC
1320B.
Iowa Code section 321.449 requires the Department to adopt
rules consistent with the Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations promulgated
under United States Code, Title 49, and found in 49 Code of Federal Regulations
(CFR), Parts 390 to 399. Iowa Code section 321.450 requires the Department to
adopt rules consistent with the Federal Hazardous Materials Regulations
promulgated under United States Code, Title 49, and found in 49 CFR Parts 107,
171 to 173, 177, 178 and 180. To ensure the consistency required by statute,
the Department annually adopts the specified parts of 49 CFR as adopted by the
United States Department of Transportation.
Commercial vehicles transporting goods in interstate commerce
are subject to the Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations on the effective
dates specified in the Federal Register. Commercial vehicles transporting
hazardous materials in interstate commerce or transporting certain hazardous
materials intrastate are subject to the Federal Hazardous Materials Regulations
on the effective dates specified in the Federal Register. The adoption of the
federal regulations by the Department will extend the enforcement of the
regulations to commercial vehicles operated intrastate unless exempted by
statute.
Proposed federal regulations are published in the Federal
Register to allow a period for public comment, and, after adoption, the final
regulations are again published in the Federal Register. Each year a revised
edition of 49 CFR is published incorporating all of the final regulations
adopted during the year. Although revised editions of 49 CFR are usually dated
October or November, the publication is not actually available in Iowa for
several months after that date.
The amendments to the Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations
and Federal Hazardous Materials Regulations that have become final and effective
since the 2000 edition of the CFR are listed in the information below. The
parts affected are followed by Federal Register (FR) citations.
Amendments to the
Federal Motor Carrier Safety
Regulations and
Federal Hazardous Materials Regulations
Part 391 (FR Vol. 65, No. 194, Page 59363,
10–05–2000)
This final rule updates and simplifies the medical examination
form used to determine the physical qualification of commercial motor vehicle
drivers operating in interstate commerce.
Parts 172, 173 and 177 (FR Vol. 65, No. 197, Page 60382,
10–11–2000)
This final rule contains editorial corrections to a final rule
issued in the Federal Register on September 29, 2000.
Part 393 (FR Vol. 65, No. 225, Page 70218,
11–21–2000)
This final rule extends the expiration date of November 20,
2000, to December 31, 2001, to enable motor carriers transporting manufactured
homes to continue loading tires up to 18 percent above the load
rating.
Part 390 (FR Vol. 65, No. 227, Page 70509,
11–24–2000)
This interim final rule requires each motor carrier filing a
Motor Carrier Identification Report (MCS—150) to file an update of the
report every 24 months. A motor carrier that submits similar information to a
state as part of its annual vehicle registration requirement under the
Performance and Registration Information Systems Management program will be in
compliance if it files it with the appropriate state commercial motor vehicle
registration office.
Part 390 (FR Vol. 66, No. 8, Page 2756,
1–11–2001)
This final rule adopts the statutory definition of a
commercial motor vehicle (CMV) to require motor carriers operating CMVs designed
or used to transport between 9 and 15 passengers (including the driver) for
compensation to file a motor carrier identification report, mark their CMVs with
a U.S. DOT identification number, and maintain an accident register. These
requirements are being imposed to monitor the operational safety of motor
carriers operating smallpassenger–carrying vehicles for
compensation.
Parts 171, 172, and 173 (FR Vol. 66, No. 22, Page 8644,
2–1–2001)
This final rule updates three incorporations by reference in
the hazardous materials regulations to include the most recent amendments to the
International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code, the United Nations Recommendations
on the Transport of Dangerous Goods and the United Nations Recommendations
Manual of Tests and Criteria. This action is necessary to facilitate the
continued transport of hazardous materials in international commerce.
Part 390 (FR Vol. 66, No. 28, Page 9677,
2–9–2001)
This final rule delays the effective date of the adoption of
the statutory definition of a commercial motor vehicle in FR Vol. 66, No. 8,
Page 2756 from February 12, 2001, until April 13, 2001.
Part 393 (FR Vol. 66, No. 109, Page 30335,
6–6–2001)
This final rule changes the deadline for compliance with
retroreflective sheeting requirements from June 1, 2001, to December 1, 2001,
for motor carriers operating container chassis. This enables these motor
carriers to continue using commercial motor vehicles without reflex reflectors
until December 1, 2001.
Parts 171, 172, 173, 177, 178 and 180 (FR Vol. 66, No. 120,
Page 33316, 6–21–2001)
This final rule amends the hazardous materials regulations to
maintain alignment with international standards by incorporating various changes
to proper shipping names, hazard classes, packing groups, special provisions and
packaging authorizations. In addition, this final rule revises the requirements
for intermediate bulk containers and United Nations portable tanks.
Parts 171 and 172 (FR Vol. 66, No. 163, Page 44252,
8–22–2001)
This final rule provides exceptions from requirements to place
new poison inhalation hazard or poison gas labels and placards on certain
packages and transport vehicles in international transportation. The poison
inhalation placards are required on a packaging, transport vehicle or freight
container carrying poison inhalation placard materials in the United
States.
Parts 107, 171, 172, 173, 177, 178 and 180 (FR Vol. 66, No.
167, Page 45376, 8–28–2001)
This final rule corrects inconsistencies in terminology and
makes minor editorial corrections to improve the hazardous materials
regulations. The amendments in this rule are minor and do not impose new
requirements.
Parts 107, 171, 172, 173, 177, 178 and 180 (FR Vol. 66, No.
167, Page 45177, 8–28–2001)
This final rule corrects editorial errors, makes minor
regulatory changes and improves the clarity of certain provisions in the
hazardous materials regulations. The amendments in this rule are minor and do
not impose new requirements.
Part 173 (FR Vol. 66, No. 189, Page 49555,
9–28–2001)
This final rule corrects the formula in Section 173.133 that
assigns the packing group and hazard zones for Division 6.1 materials.
The other amendments to this chapter are due to the
following:
• In Item 1, paragraph
520.1(1)“c” is stricken to eliminate confusion concerning
conflicting state law applicable to intrastate operators of commercial motor
vehicles.
• In Item 2, paragraph
520.1(2)“c” is amended to comply with 2001 Iowa Acts, chapter 132,
section 12, which requires the Department to adopt rules concerning the hours of
service for drivers of vehicles operated for hire and designed to transport
seven or more persons, including the driver.
Various portions of the federal regulations and Iowa statutes
allow some exceptions when the exceptions will not adversely impact the safe
transportation of commodities on the nation’s highways. Granting
additional exceptions for drivers and the motor carrier industry in Iowa would
adversely impact the safety of the traveling public in Iowa.
These amendments are identical to the ones published under
Notice of Intended Action.
These amendments are intended to implement Iowa Code chapter
321.
These amendments will become effective May 8, 2002.
Rule–making actions:
ITEM 1. Amend subrule 520.1(1) as
follows:
520.1(1) Regulations.
a. Motor carrier safety regulations. The Iowa department of
transportation adopts the Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations, 49 CFR Parts
390–399 (October 1, 2000 2001).
b. Hazardous materials regulations. The Iowa department of
transportation adopts the Federal Hazardous Materials Regulations, 49 CFR Parts
107, 171–173, 177, 178, and 180 (October 1, 2000
2001).
c. Effect of state law. The Iowa department of
transportation will follow and enforce the adopted federal regulations where not
in conflict with state law.
d c. Copies of regulations. Copies of
the federal regulations may be reviewed at the state law library or through the
Internet at http://www.fmcsa.dot.gov.
ITEM 2. Amend paragraph
520.1(2)“c” as follows:
c. Operators of vehicles for hire, designed to transport
more than 8 7 or more persons, but fewer than 16,
including the driver, must comply with 49 CFR Part 395 of the Federal Motor
Carrier Safety Regulations. However, the provisions of 49 CFR Part 395 shall
not apply to vehicles offered to the public for hire that are used principally
in intracity operation and are regulated by local authorities.
[Filed 3/13/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/3/02.
ARC 1508B
TRANSPORTATION
DEPARTMENT[761]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to the authority of Iowa Code sections 307.10 and
307.12, the Department of Transportation, on March 13, 2002, adopted an
amendment to Chapter 529, “For–Hire Interstate Motor Carrier
Authority,” Iowa Administrative Code.
Notice of Intended Action for this amendment was published in
the February 6, 2002, Iowa Administrative Bulletin as ARC
1321B.
The Code of Federal Regulations was updated in October 2001,
and the Department needs to cite the current version in these rules. No changes
to the federal regulations have occurred.
This amendment is identical to the one published under Notice
of Intended Action.
This amendment is intended to implement Iowa Code chapter
327B.
This amendment will become effective May 8, 2002.
Rule–making action:
Amend rule 761—529.1(327B) as follows:
761—529.1(327B) Motor carrier regulations. The
Iowa department of transportation adopts the Code of Federal Regulations, 49 CFR
Parts 365–368 and 370–379, dated October 1, 2000
2001, for regulating interstate for–hire carriers.
Copies of this publication are available from the state law
library or through the Internet at http://www.fmcsa.dot.gov.
[Filed 3/13/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/3/02.
ARC 1520B
UTILITIES DIVISION[199]
Adopted and Filed
Pursuant to Iowa Code sections 17A.4 and 476.1 and Iowa Code
Supplement section 476.53, the Utilities Board (Board) gives notice that on
March 15, 2002, the Board issued an order in Docket No. RMU–01–8,
In re: Competitive Bidding, “Order Adopting Rules.” The
Board is adopting a new chapter on competitive bidding to reflect changes to
Iowa Code chapter 476 that were enacted in 2001 Iowa Acts, House File 577. In
particular, Iowa Code Supplement section 476.53 allows rate–regulated
public utilities that file an application to construct or lease generating
plants that meet certain criteria to request that the Board specify in advance,
by order issued after a contested case proceeding, the rate–making
principles that will apply when the costs of the facility are included in
regulated electric rates. In making this determination, the Board is required
to make two findings. The second finding is the subject of these adopted
rules.
Iowa Code Supplement section 476.53(3)“c”(2)
requires the Board to make a finding that “[t]he rate–regulated
utility has demonstrated to the board that the public utility has considered
other sources for long–term electric supply and that the facility or lease
is reasonable when compared to other feasible alternative sources of supply.
The rate–regulated public utility may satisfy the requirements of this
subparagraph through a competitive bidding process, under rules adopted by the
board, that demonstrate the facility or lease is a reasonable alternative to
meet its electric supply needs.” The adopted rules establish a new
chapter, 199 IAC 40, for the competitive bidding process. It is important to
note at the offset that compliance with these rules on the part of the public
utility is voluntary. The public utility may, at its option, demonstrate that
it has considered other sources of supply and that its selection is reasonable
without resorting to the competitive bidding process contained in these
rules.
On August 3, 2001, the Board issued an order in Docket No.
RMU–01–8 to consider adoption of 199 IAC 40. Notice of Intended
Action for the proposed rule making was published in IAB Vol. XXIV, No. 4
(8/22/01), p. 287, as ARC 0888B. Written comments were filed by
MidAmerican Energy Company (MidAmerican), Alliant Energy (Alliant), Calpine, the
Iowa Consumers Coalition (ICC), and the Consumer Advocate Division of the
Department of Justice. An oral presentation was held on October 30,
2001.
The most significant change from the proposed chapter is the
elimination of the requirement for demand–side and all–source
solicitations. As pointed out by Alliant and Mid–American in their
comments, Iowa Code Supplement section 476.53 does not require all–source
or demand–side solicitations but, instead, requires only that utilities
have in effect a Board–approved energy efficiency plan. The Board
believes, at this time, energy efficiency and demand–side management can
best be furthered by focusing on the utilities’ energy efficiency plans
rather than injecting energy efficiency into the supply resource solicitation
process. Energy efficiency has played, and will continue to play, an important
role in reducing the need for new supply over the long term.
The Board has also deleted references in the chapter to
“standard industry practice.” Because no two states thataddress
competitive bidding by rule have adopted similar bidding rules, no
“standard industry practice” exists forregulatory–sanctioned
competitive bidding processes. While MidAmerican urged the Board to adopt
simplified rules that cite “standard industry practice,” MidAmerican
was unable to define the term at the oral presentation. (Oral presentation
transcript (Tr.) p. 10.)
Reference to undefined “standard industry
practices” could compromise the “safe harbor” that the rules
are intended to provide. The competitive bidding process is optional but is
designed to be a “safe harbor” in that a utility following the
competitive bidding process in the rules satisfies the requirements of Iowa Code
Supplement section 476.53(3)“c”(2). If the rules simply referred to
an undefined “standard industry practice,” the bidding process would
remain open to challenge even after the conclusion of a regulatory principles
proceeding (Tr. pp. 33–34). Compromise of the “safe harbor”
concept could result in litigation that would needlessly delay the construction
of generation plants.
The Board has changed the term “code of conduct”
to “standards of conduct” and made minor changes to rule 199 IAC
40.4(476). The Board emphasizes that 199 IAC 40.4(2)“a” is intended
for a utility’s direct communications with its affiliate and is not, for
example, a requirement that a transcript of bid conferences be made. Also, 199
IAC 40.4(2)“i” is intended to apply only to the competitive
proc–ess in these rules and not to other contractual relationships allowed
under Iowa law. These clarifications are in response to comments made by
Alliant and MidAmerican.
Alliant asked that utilities be allowed to recover the costs
associated with the independent evaluator. The Board believes these rules are
not the appropriate place to address cost recovery. However, it may be
appropriate for a utility to seek recovery of these costs in a ratemaking
principles proceeding, since the competitive bidding process adopted in new
Chapter 40 is expressly designed to provide evidence for this
proceeding.
The Board has retained the independent evaluator in the
adopted rules, but the rules take a minimal approach to the role of the
independent evaluator. In some states, the independent evaluator makes the
actual bid selection or has a significant voice in the selection process. In
these rules, the role of the independent evaluator is to oversee the process,
not the selection.
It is important to note that an independent evaluator is used
only if three choices are made by the utility or its affiliate. First, the
utility chooses to seek a determination of regulatory treatment for a new plant
in a ratemaking principles proceeding. Second, the utility chooses to use the
competitive bidding process set forth in the rules to establish in the
ratemaking principles proceeding that its proposed plant is reasonable compared
to other feasible alternatives. Third and most significant, the public
utility’s affiliate chooses to participate in the competitive bidding
process. Unless all three choices are made, an independent evaluator is not
required.
While merchant plant developers such as Calpine argue that the
independent evaluator should play a more significant role in the process, the
role the Board has assigned to the evaluator is appropriate because under 2001
Iowa Acts, House File 577 (Iowa Code Supplement section 476.53), the outcome of
the competitive bidding process is not binding on the utility, but, at the
option of the utility, is used as evidence in a ratemaking principles
proceeding. When a public utility affiliate is involved in the bidding process,
use of an inde–pendent evaluator provides other bidders some comfort that
the process is fair and that all bidders are subject to the same processes and
procedures. Even though the competitive bidding process is limited to
ratemaking principles proceedings, an unfair bidding process can result in
higher electricity rates for Iowa’s homes, businesses, and
industries.
In response to comments filed by the ICC, the Board has
increased the time to respond from 15 to 20 days in 199 IAC
40.2(1)“d” and 40.4(3)“a”(2). In setting these time
periods, the Board is attempting to balance the need to evaluate the information
with the need to move the bidding process forward as quickly as
possible.
Two additional points require clarification. First, utilities
may seek confidential treatment under 199 IAC 1.9(6) for their build or lease
cost estimates required by 199 IAC 40.3(476). Second, the adopted rules do not
require that utilities conduct transmission studies before issuing their request
for proposals.
The changes to the noticed rules are in response to the
comments or are minor changes such that no additional notice is required. There
is no specific waiver provision in Chapter 40, but the Board’s general
waiver provision in 199 IAC 1.3(17A,474,476,78GA,HF2206) would
apply.
These rules will become effective May 8, 2002.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code section 476.1
and Iowa Code Supplement section 476.53.
The following new chapter is adopted.
CHAPTER 40
COMPETITIVE BIDDING PROCESS
199—40.1(476) General information.
40.1(1) Definitions. The following words and
terms when used in these rules will have the meaning indicated below:
“Affiliate” means a party that directly, or
indirectly through one or more intermediaries, controls, is controlled by, or is
under common control with a rate–regulated public utility.
“Arm’s–length transaction” means a
standard of conduct under which unrelated parties, each acting in its own best
interest, would carry out a particular transaction. Applied to related parties,
a transaction is at arm’s length if the transaction could have been made
on the same terms to a disinterested third party in a bargained transaction
where each party has substantially the same bargaining power.
“Control” means the possession, direct or
indirect, of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management and
policies of an enterprise through ownership, by contract or otherwise.
“RFP” means request for proposals.
“Supply–side resource” means a resource that
can provide electrical energy or capacity to the utility. Supply–side
resources include utility–owned generating facilities, and energy or
capacity purchased from other utilities and nonutilities. Supply–side
resources include modifications to existing generating facilities.
“Utility” as defined in this chapter refers to a
rate–regulated electric public utility selling to retail customers in
Iowa.
40.1(2) Applicability and purpose. The rules apply to
any rate–regulated electric public utility choosing to establish a
competitive bidding process under Iowa Code Supplement section
476.53(3)“c”(2). The rules establish minimum requirements for
bidding processes used to purchase supply. Under these rules, bids compete not
only with other bids but also with the utility’s own build or lease
options. Utilities maintain the right to secure or free up electric capacity
and energy through means other than a competitive bidding
proc–ess.
40.1(3) General guidelines for resource acquisition.
The utility, as part of any solicitation under its competitive bidding process,
will provide estimates of the cost the utility would incur in building or
leasing the desired resource consistent with the requirements of 199 IAC
40.3(476).
40.1(4) Waivers. The utility may file for a waiver of
any or all of these bidding process requirements. In making a decision
regarding the granting of a waiver, the board shall consider, among other
things, whether the utility is investor–owned, the timing of the
solicitation, requirements of other regulatory bodies having jurisdiction over
the utility, and whether or not an affiliate of the utility is considering
bidding on the project.
199—40.2(476) Competitive resource acquisition
procedure.
40.2(1) Procedures. The utility shall use the
following procedures to competitively acquire supply–side resources under
its competitive bidding process. If an affiliate of the utility plans to submit
bids for supply–side resources it will own or operate, it shall
additionally adhere to the procedures specified in 199 IAC 40.4(476).
a. If a utility determines that it has a need for additional
supply–side resources, it shall make a general public announcement
indicating its needs and intentions. If an affiliate of the utility decides to
bid once a request for proposal is announced, it will alert the manager at the
public utility responsible for the request for proposal and bid process of its
intention.
b. The utility shall provide a statement to the board
indicating whether an affiliate of the utility desires, in the competitive
resource acquisition process, to submit bids forsupply–side resources it
will own or operate.
c. If an affiliate of the utility desires to submit bids for
supply–side resources, the utility shall select an independent evaluator
from the board–approved list of evaluators to perform the functions
specified in 199 IAC 40.4(3). The name of the independent evaluator selected
for this project shall be filed with the statement to the board required in 199
IAC 40.2(1)“b.” The utility shall provide the estimated cost to
utilize the services of the independent evaluator as part of its statement. The
independent evaluator shall be paid by the utility.
d. If a board–approved list of independent evaluators
has not been established under 199 IAC 40.4(3) at the time of the proposed
solicitation, the utility shall file a short list of names with the board with
qualifications and potential conflicts of interest as part of its statement
required in 199 IAC 40.2(1)“b.” Interested parties and the board
shall have 20 days to object to any names on the short list. Absent objection,
the utility may proceed with any independent evaluator identified on the list.
With objection, the board shall review the evaluators on the list and remove any
names that it deems are not independent of the utility or the bidding process,
or not qualified to perform the functions of the independent evaluator as
identified in 199 IAC 40.4(3). Any board decision to remove names from the
list will be issued within 15 days after the end of the objection period. If
the board determines none of the persons listed are sufficiently independent or
qualified to perform the functions of the independent evaluator, the process
will begin again with a new list from the utility.
e. The utility shall publish and circulate an RFP that
complies with the requirements of 199 IAC 40.5(476). The utility shall make the
RFP readily available to interested persons by conspicuously posting the request
on its Internet site or other public electronic bulletin board. The RFP shall
be filed with the project’s independent evaluator if one is
required.
f. Within 30 days after publication of the RFP, the utility
shall convene a bid conference open to all potential bidders. The bid
conference shall be held no less than 20 days after it is noticed. At the bid
conference, the utility shall answer questions posed by bidders concerning the
RFP. Bidders may request and the utility may hold more than one bid conference
if needed. However, in no event shall a bid conference be scheduled later than
30 days beyond the issuance of the RFP. The independent evaluator, if required
pursuant to 199 IAC 40.4(3), shall attend the bid conference.
g. At the conclusion of the bid conference(s), the utility
shall publish and circulate the date for submission of sealed bids. That date
shall be no earlier than 30 days following the last bid conference.
h. The utility shall file its build or lease cost estimates
required by 199 IAC 40.3(476) with the board seven days prior to the
deadline for other bidders.
i. If an affiliate of the utility desires to submit a bid for
supply–side resources it will own or operate, it shall submit its bid to
the independent evaluator, the board, and the utility one day prior to the
deadline for other bidders.
j. After the close of the deadline for the submission of bids,
the utility shall commence a review to determine whether the bids are responsive
to the minimum bid evaluation criteria specified in the RFP. All responsive
bids shallbe evaluated in accordance with the bid evaluation criteria specified
in the RFP.
k. Upon completing its evaluation, the utility shall file with
the board a short list of bidders whose bids the utility deems are most
reasonable in meeting the resource needs of the utility. The utility’s
filing of its short–list selection shall include a report that is
sufficiently detailed and rigorous to support those selections, including an
evaluation of all bids received and an explanation for why any bidders were
excluded from the short list. The utility shall provide copies of the report to
all bidders and other interested parties.
l. If an independent evaluator was required as part of the
solicitation, the independent evaluator shall submit its certification of the
fairness of the bidding process at the same time the utility submits its short
list to the board.
m. Upon filing of the short–list selection and
certification from the independent evaluator, if required pursuant to 199 IAC
40.4(3), interested parties shall have 15 days to file a complaint alleging
that a bidder was excluded from the short list due to unfair treatment,
significant errors in the selection process, or other similar reasons.
n. Absent complaints regarding the short–list selection,
the utility may select a resource provider from the short list, choose the
utility–build or lease option, or combine both options to meet its
resource needs, whichever the utility deems most reasonable. Final selection
and contract negotiations reside solely with the utility.
40.2(2) Evaluation of bids. The evaluation of bids
submitted in a competitive bidding process must be based on the criteria
identified in the utility’s request for proposal. Bids should compete not
only with other bids but also with the utility’s own build or lease
options, including plant life extensions, upgrades, and modifications.
40.2(3) Contract negotiations. The utility shall
negotiate all contracts. A utility may negotiate a pricing structure that is
suitable for the resource, considering such factors as the reliability of the
resource, need for security of performance, the availability of other means of
ensuring security of performance, the nature of the resource, the level of risk,
and other appropriate factors. The utility shall negotiate contract terms that
appropriately allocate the risks of future fuel costs and other resource costs
between the resource provider and the utility.
40.2(4) Utility reporting. The utility conducting a
bid solicitation under its competitive bidding process shall submit a written
report to the board within 45 days of completion of its evaluation of bids.
This report shall describe in detail the evaluation of bids and the
utility’s comparison of the bids received to its own utility–build
or lease options. The report shall also include a copy of the utility’s
RFP, a detailed description of the utility’s bid evaluation and selection
process, and copies of all bids submitted to the utility in its bid
solicitation.
199—40.3(476) Utility–build
or lease cost
estimates.
40.3(1) General requirements. A utility conducting a
bidding process shall develop detailed cost estimates of its own build or lease
options. Those options may include units jointly planned with other companies,
plant upgrades or modifications, and plant extensions. The cost estimates shall
be detailed and filed on both a project and per–unit basis.
40.3(2) Project cost estimates. Project cost
estimates shall be current and based on the prices likely to be actually quoted
by manufacturers and vendors of power plant equipment. The utility–build
or lease option shall be structured on an incremental cost basis, including an
allocation of common costs incurred for the project’s development. The
utility shall detail in its filing the cost allocations and methodologies used
for overhead costs and any joint facilities used in its estimates.
40.3(3) Per–unit cost estimates. The utility
shall file estimates of per–unit costs in the same measurements or units
expected from other bidders on the project sufficient for the board to determine
the relative costs of the utility–build or lease option versus like bids
received from other bidders. The per–unit cost estimates shall clearly
identify the rate–making principles used in calculating these
costs.
40.3(4) Filing requirements. The utility–build
or lease cost estimates shall be submitted to the board seven days prior to the
utility’s receiving competitive bids for new electric capacity and
energy.
199—40.4(476) Utility affiliate bids.
40.4(1) General requirements. Any bid prepared by an
affiliate of the utility shall comply with the selection criteria specified in
the RFP and with board rules governing affiliate transactions (199 IAC 31). The
utility may not give preferential treatment or consideration to a bid prepared
by an affiliate of the utility. To ensure a level playing field for all
bidders, the utility shall comply with its standards of conduct as required by
199 IAC 40.4(2) and shall hire an independent evaluator to ensure compliance
with the standards of conduct prior to the drafting of the RFP.
40.4(2) Standards of conduct. Each utility must
establish standards of conduct to ensure that all transactions between the
utility and its affiliates are conducted on an arm’s–length basis.
The utility’s standards of conduct shall be filed with the board prior to
any solicitation under the utility’s competitive bidding process. At a
minimum, the utility’s standards of conduct shall include the
following:
a. The utility shall maintain full written records and notes
of all communications between the utility and the bidding affiliate and between
the utility and the independent evaluator, as well as all other
bid–related communications.
b. The utility shall ensure that the bidding affiliate has
access only to the same bidding information at the same time as other
bidders.
c. The utility’s RFP and evaluation team shall not share
with the bidding affiliate any information regarding the request for proposals,
standard contract, drafts of either document, information contained in those
documents, or any information about the preparation of those documents unless
and until such information is available to all other bidders in the
solicitation.
d. The utility shall establish for each RFP and bidding
process a single point of contact for all questions about bids and
evaluations.
e. The utility shall keep in a secure location all requests
for proposals and contract drafts, related bid documents, any analyses, notes,
communications, evaluations and any other written material concerning the RFP,
standard contracts, proposals, and all other documents related to the bidding
proc–ess.
f. The utility’s evaluation team members shall brief
management regarding confidential information about the bidding process only on
a need–to–know basis. Such briefings will not occur in general
staff meetings or other group meetings.
g. The utility will make all pertinent employees aware of its
procedures that must be followed between the public utility and the bidding
public utility affiliate or division for confidentiality of RFPs, standard
contracts, and other documents pertinent to the bidding process.
h. The utility shall not share resources with an affiliate
bidder unless such resources are also made available to other bidders.
i. The utility shall not contract on behalf of an affiliate
bidder for the provision of services and equipment that are not available to
other bidders.
j. The utility shall not withhold information about Clean Air
Act emissions allowances from potential bidders in order to circumvent or hinder
the competitive biddingprocess.
k. Employees of any bidding affiliate are prohibited from
participating in the evaluation process.
40.4(3) Independent evaluator. The utility
shall use an independent evaluator if there is a likelihood that an
affiliate’s bid may be included among the bids to be evaluated. The
utility shall maintain a written record of communications and contacts with the
independent evaluator.
a. Short list of approved independent evaluators. A
board–approved list of independent evaluators shall be compiled using the
following process:
(1) The utility shall file with the board a list with
qualifications of at least five independent evaluators it deems to be
appropriate in auditing the bidding and selection process under its competitive
bidding process. The utility shall reveal each listed evaluator’s
associations with the utility or any of its affiliates, divisions, or
subsidiaries that could create a potential conflict of interest.
(2) Upon the utility’s filing of the list, any
interested party shall have 20 days to object to either the independence or the
qualifications of one or more evaluators included on the list.
(3) After the time of objection has passed, the board shall
approve a final list of potential evaluators that it deems to be independent and
qualified to perform the functions of the independent evaluator as specified in
199 IAC 40.4(3)“b.”
b. Functions of the independent evaluator. The functions of
the independent evaluator shall include the following:
(1) Determine whether the utility complied with its standards
of conduct as required by 199 IAC 40.4(2).
(2) Determine whether the utility’s RFP complies with
the minimum requirements specified in 199 IAC 40.5(476).
(3) Determine whether the utility treated and considered its
affiliate’s bid in the same manner it treated and considered other bids
intended to meet the same resource needs.
(4) Determine if the transaction provides the utility’s
affiliate any unfair competitive advantage by virtue of its affiliation or
association with the utility.
(5) Certify with the board at the time the utility files its
short list of potential providers that the process was fair and complied with
the utility’s standards of conduct as required by 199 IAC
40.4(2).
(6) Any other determinations or certifications the evaluator
deems relevant.
199—40.5(476) Request for proposals (RFP). The
request for proposals shall clearly set forth the eligibility and evaluation
criteria and shall specify the weight to be given to any price or nonprice
selection criteria.
40.5(1) Minimum evaluation criteria. The price and
nonprice factors selected for evaluation and the weightings attached to each can
reasonably vary from utility to utility and project to project. However, the
following factors shall be considered for each supply–side project
solicitation:
a. Level and schedule of required capacity and energy
payments;
b. Status of project development;
c. System fuel diversity;
d. Reliability and performance measures;
e. Firm versus variable or indexed pricing;
f. Dispatchability;
g. Project location and effect on the transmission
grid;
h. Use of Iowa fuels, manpower, and other state
resources;
i. Benefits to be derived by the industries and communities
associated with a particular project;
j. Demonstrated financial viability of the project and the
developer;
k. Developer’s prior experience in the field.
40.5(2) Contents of the request for proposals. The
RFP shall contain sufficient information to apprise potential bidders of the
utility’s criteria for evaluation of bids received as part of the
competitive resource acquisition process specified in 199 IAC 40.2(476). This
information shall include the bid evaluation criteria, including the weights to
be assigned to each criterion, that the utility plans to use in ranking the bids
received. Specific information associated with the bid evaluation criteria
provided by the utility shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
a. Preferred fuel types;
b. The extent to which additional supply–side resources
must be located in certain geographic areas due to transmission constraints,
local load condition, permitting constraints, or other factors;
c. Important transmission constraints on the utility’s
system and on adjoining utility systems, and reasonable estimates of
transmission costs for supply–side resources located in different
areas;
d. The extent and degree to which supply–side resources
must be dispatchable, including the requirement, if any, that supply–side
resources be able to operate under automatic dispatch control;
e. Supply–side resource reliability requirements and
objectives, and the method(s) that will be used to measure the achievement of
those requirements and objectives, including the contribution of individual
supply–side resources;
f. The desirability of firm pricing and contract terms of
various durations;
g. The minimum bid evaluation criteria that must be met by a
bidder for a bid to be considered responsive to the RFP. The utility shall be
reasonable in its specification of minimum bid evaluation criteria and shall not
artificially limit the pool of bidders through unreasonable or excessively
restrictive minimum criteria;
h. The utility’s proposed standard contract for the
acquisition of supply–side resources.
199—40.6(476) Complaints. The board shall
resolve disputes between a utility and a bidder that may arise as a result of
implementation of the bidding process. The independent evaluator shall
participate by providing information on the bidding process including the
selection of the winning bid. A complaint by a bidder concerning the
utility’s decisions on the acquisition of resources in a solicitation must
be filed within 15 days of the filing of the short–list selection with the
board.
These rules are intended to implement Iowa Code section 476.1
and Iowa Code Supplement section 476.53.
[Filed 3/15/02, effective 5/8/02]
[Published 4/3/02]
EDITOR’S NOTE:
For replacement pages for IAC, see IAC Supplement 4/3/02.
Previous Bulletin
Table of Contents
Next Bulletin
© 2002 Cornell College and
League of Women Voters of Iowa
Comments about this site or page?
lsbinfo@legis.state.ia.us.
Please remember that the person listed above does not vote on bills. Direct all comments concerning legislation to State Legislators.
Last update: Tue Apr 2 22:10:01 2002
URL: /Rules/2002/Bulletin/ACB020403.html
rfc